|
this
document in PDF 
TNT
Products V7.0
November
2004
Table
of Contents
Introduction
Editorial and Associated News [by Dr. Lee D. Miller, President]
Official
Releases.
How Do TNT Innovations Occur?
Bigger, Bigger, and Bigger
Projects.
New Feature
Priorities.
Hardware News
Geologic Mapping
Station.
Starting TNT products from a Portable
Drive.
Serial ATA
drives.
Software News
Further Confusion over Wavelet
Compression.
LizardTech MrSID Compression to Be Supported in
DV7.1.
Reference Geodata
Orthorectifying OrbView-3
Images.
Landsat Global 15-Meter
Color.
SRTM
90-Meter.
Nebraska
1-Meter.
Floating TNT Licenses
Using a Floating License as a Fixed
License.
Updated
Tutorial.
Windows 95
Mac OS X
Version
Tracker.
Mac OS X 10.3.X
(Panther).
Mac OS X with Windows Remote
Desktop.
Mac OS X 10.4
(Tiger).
Ensuring the Correct TNT
Versions.
TNTsdk™
TNTsim3D™ for Windows
Building Massive Geospatial
Simulations.
Panoramic
Backgrounds.
Geospatial Scripting
(SML).
Custom View
Window.
Miscellaneous.
DV7.1 – Some Ideas for
Additions.
TNTatlas 7.0 for X
Atlas Discussion
Group.
Introduction.
Lincoln Sample
Atlas.
Afghanistan Sample
Atlas.
Miscellaneous.
TNTserver/clients 7.0
DV7.1 – Supporting OpenGIS’s Web Map Service
(WMS).
TNTview® 7.0
Price Reduced and Functionality
Expanded.
Inherited New
Features.
Upgrading
TNTview.
TNTedit™ 7.0
Inherited New
Features.
Upgrading
TNTedit.
Tutorial and Reference Booklets
New Booklets
Available.
Revised Tutorials with Major
Changes.
Quick
Guides.
New TNTmips Features
System Level
Changes.
New Coordinate Reference System
(CRS).
Shape
Objects.
2D
Display.
* 3D
Display.
* Manifolds.
Cartoscripts.
Georeferencing.
Raster Resampling Using
Georeference.
Raster
Mosaic.
Predefined Raster
Combinations.
Raster to Vector
Boundary.
Import/Export.
Font
Management.
Map
Calculator.
* Advanced Geometric Object
Conversion.
* Merging Objects.
* Vector and CAD
Extraction.
CAD Object
Warping.
Spatial Data
Editor.
Database
Features.
Text
Editor.
Style
Editor.
Geospatial Scripting Language
(SML).
Upgrading
TNTmips.
Internationalization and Localization
Localization
Editor.
MicroImages Authorized Resellers
AUSTRALIA.
BOLIVIA.
INDIA.
SOUTH
AFRICA.
CHINA.
Discontinued Resellers
Canada.
China.
Egypt.
Germany.
Ghana.
Guatemala.
Mexico.
Netherlands.
Pakistan.
Poland.
Russia.
Serbia and
Montenegro.
Spain.
Switzerland.
USA,
Florida.
USA, Colorado
United Arab
Emirates.
Appendix: Abbreviations
Attached Color Plates
Property Viewer Atlas for Lincoln, NE (2-sided)
Exploring District Services (2-sided)
Using Overlapping Polygons (2-sided)
Managing Display of Large Vectors
JPEG2000 Compression in TNTsim3D
Sky Domes in TNTsim3D
Sky Domes Provided with TNTsim3D
Adding Sky Domes to Landscapes
Startup Scripts in TNTsim3D (2-sided)
TNTsim3D Custom View
Snapshots from TNTsim3D (1/2 page)
Subterrain Color in TNTsim3D (1/2 page)
Property Finder Tool Script (2-sided)
Add Styling to DataTips (2-sided)
JPEG2000 Compression in Atlases
Greater Control Over
TNTatlas/X Startup (2-sided)
Afghanistan Atlases on CD (2-sided)
GraphTips in the Afghanistan Atlas (2-sided)
New Tutorials
Quick Guides Available from Menu
Directly Use PNG Files
Spatial Referencing in TNT (2-sided)
Coordinate Reference System Window
Predefined Coordinate Reference Systems
Predefined Coordinate Reference Systems Requiring Datum Selection
Custom Coordinate Reference System Setup
Graph Values from Multiple Rasters by Cell Location
Direct Display of
Shapefiles/Legends/Styles
Enhanced Sketch Annotation
Setting DataTip Background Color
Use a
DataTip, GraphTip, or Tool?
Local Time Zones (2-sided)
Pie Chart and Bar Graph (2-sided)
Enhanced DataTips and GraphTips (2-sided)
Profile of Nearest Line (2-sided)
Spyglass View (2-sided)
Pop-In View (2-sided)
3D Surface Rendering Modes
Transparency and Relief Shading in 3D Views
Pedestal and Fence in 3D Views
Stereo Viewing Modes
Anaglyph Stereo Viewing
Inexpensive Stereoscope Viewing
Stereoscope Viewing
Manifolds in 3D Views (2-sided)
Visualize 3D Geology Using Manifolds (2-sided)
3D Subsurface Model Using Manifolds
Create Cross-Section Manifold Objects
Edit Manifold Objects
Georeferencing Manifold Surfaces
Editing Manifold Surface Triangulation
Mosaic Directly into JPEG2000
Font Substitution in the TNT Products
Geometric Object Conversion
Copy/Paste between Geometric Objects (1/2 page)
Session Log Files (1/2 page + back)
Step through Elements with Tab Key
Database Table Creation Wizard (2-sided)
Database Wizard and Virtual Tables (2-sided)
Render Complex Layouts to SVG (2-sided)
Create Crystal Reports with SML (2-sided)
Terrain Curvature (2-sided)
Mosquito Habitat Statistics (U-Test) (2-sided)
Infrastructure Graphical Profile (2-sided)
Introduction
MicroImages
in its 19th year in business is pleased to distribute RV7.0
of the TNT products.
This is the 55th release of TNTmips
and adds approximately 280 new features submitted by clients and MicroImages.
Because of the length of this MEMO, the color plates are stapled
separately to make reading the MEMO and viewing the color plates more
manageable. Registered
and successfully completed downloads of TNTlite
are 26% higher in 2004 relative to 2003 and double the number in 2002.
MicroImages appreciates your support and assistance in promoting more
awareness of the TNT products around
the world. In exchange we continue
to concentrate our focus and resources on product development and support.
What
follows is a brief summary of many of the significant new capabilities in RV7.0.
-
TNTsdk: The software development kit used to build every TNT
product has been 20 years in the making and represents about 100 man years of
effort. Changing from Motif
graphical libraries to royalty free LessTif graphical libraries has permitted
the optional charge for TNTsdk to be
dropped. Now your RV7.0
CD and weekly patches permit you to install and maintain TNTsdk
and use it to build programs to add to your TNT
products’ menus including to TNTlite.
-
TNTatlas: A DVD entitled Property Viewer Lincoln, NE is
included with RV7.0 of your TNT
products. This sample atlas
demonstrates how a large collection of geospatial data (~50 gigabytes) can be
assembled into a form for easy general public use.
Navigation by an owner or address query is implemented in a TNT
Tool Script. Complex information
about each property is presented in the form of an enhanced DataTip.
A CD entitled TNTatlas of Afghanistan is also included to demonstrate
several completely new concepts that can be added to your atlases.
It demonstrates the dynamic pop-in of spatially aware graphical
information using the new GraphTip and Display Control Script features.
-
TNTsim3D: Large JPEG2000 texture layers can be used without any
performance degradation. For
example, a 50 GB image could be compressed 12 to 1 and distributed on DVD as
part of a landscape. Cloudy skies
and other panoramic dome backgrounds are provided and add realism to all
simulated views. TNT
scripts (SML) can be used to add
dynamic custom features. New SML
functions let you exit these scripts by using the flight controls (which means
keyboard, mouse, or joystick), rather than having to de-select the script from a
menu. Startup scripts now permit
simulations to automatically start up in specified positions, following
programmed paths, and so on. A
Custom View can be started with an observer position related to and locked to
the simulated changes in the Main View. The
contents of this Custom View can be the same, selected, or entirely different
components of the landscape.
-
TNTserver/clients: TNTserver
can now serve up results as JP2 (JPEG2000 compressed) and PNG (compressed) in
addition to JPEG rasters. Graphical
layers can be served up as Scalable Vector Graphics with a database table and
embedded/linked rasters. The latest
TNTclients have been modified to use
these new data structures.
-
TNTview: The price of TNTview
has been lowered from US$1000 (NAFTA) or US$1200 (international) to a uniform
US$500 fixed license and US$600 for each floating seat for all supported
platforms. See the sections below
entitled 2D Display, 3D Display, and others for all the RV7.0
features automatically inherited by TNTview.
-
2D Display: Labels created as part of a CAD sketch layer can now have
frames and leader lines. DataTips
can be enhanced in appearance by using all the TNT
text codes in their formation including picking the background color inside
their frames. GraphTips and Display
Control Scripts are now available.
-
Shapefile Layers: Shapefiles can now be quickly auto linked and
displayed as layers in a composite 2D and 3D view with styles and symbolism.
Styled entries for shapefile elements now show in the LegendView.
TNT special visualization
features can be used, such as DataTips, selection procedures, and so on.
-
JPEG Layers: An auto link to JPEG compressed rasters permits them to
be selected for use as layers in 2D and 3D views.
Companion world files (*.jgw) provide their georeference.
-
PNG Layers: An auto link to PNG compressed or uncompressed rasters
permit them to be selected for use as layers in 2D and 3D views.
Display processes will use companion world files (*.pgw) for georeference
if found. An opacity mask layer,
ICM color profile, and other features are stored in the link file and used.
-
3D Display: All older rendering modes have been removed and only the
three current methods are provided. Relief
shading can be optionally computed from the DEM and viewed.
A layer can use the transparency setting for the layer or for each
individual polygon for all rendering methods.
Complex pedestals can be created downward or upward for a fence effect.
Pedestals can be curved and have smoothed shaped color effects.
Manifolds can be viewed with or without 3D surface views.
-
Manifold Surfaces: Raster, vector, CAD, and linked objects can now be
georeferenced in 3D to orient and shape them into planar, curved, or folded
manifold surfaces representing cross sections, profiles, objects, and related
shapes. These 3D control points are
used to compute a TIN surface in a 3D view onto which the object is projected as
a texture. The TIN can be
interactively edited as well as the texture.
-
Stereo Display: A 3D view (texture plus DEM) can be switched into a
stereo mode that matches the available viewing device, such as a mirror
stereoscope or 3D monitor. Modes
include side-by-side, line interlaced, column interlaced, and anaglyph.
-
Display Control Script: This is a TNT
script that is stored with a group or layout and will auto run when either is
opened in the Display process. When
the cursor pauses in the view, just as with a DataTip, they can access its
geocoordinates, the nearest element (point, line, or polygon), and/or a raster
cell’s content. The rest of the script can use this result for anything that
can be done in a script.
-
GraphTips: Simple DataTips no longer need to pop-in as spatially
aware information just in the form of styled text.
Now data read for the cursor position using a Display Control Script from
attributes or computed from them can be presented in graphic forms—hence,
GraphTips. For example, GraphTips
can draw working clocks or combine attributes into a pop-in pie diagram or
histogram.
-
Dynamic Spatial Analysis: The geoposition/element(s) at the paused
position of a cursor can be used in a Display Control Script for a complex
geospatial analysis for every position of the cursor.
The inputs to the analysis can be any layers in the view or in objects of
any TNT geodata type.
The script can then project these results into their corresponding
locations in the current view (for example, as multiple GraphTips) or open and
present them in a new view. Move
the cursor, and it changes the analysis and results.
-
Editing Spatial Data: Features in a geometric object (vector, CAD,
shape, and TIN) selected by any TNT
selection method (region, attributes, cursor, …) can be copied and pasted into
any other type of geometric object or simply cut.
Manifold surfaces can be edited.
-
Validation. Validation of polygonal or full vector topology is faster
and more robust.
-
Coordinate Reference System: The industry standard ISO 19111
Coordinate Reference System (CRS) definitions and the corresponding EPSG
geodetic parameters, equations, and datum transformations are now supported
using a new Spatial Reference (SR) service, which supplies them to all TNT
products. Thousands of new CRS are
available. Datum to datum
transformations are used for more accuracy.
Defined units of measure are used to avoid conversion to/from meters to
increase accuracy and speed.
-
Mosaicking: Mosaics can now use linked MrSID, JPEG, JP2, or PNG files
or JPEG2000 compressed raster objects as input.
The resulting mosaic can be a lossy or lossless JPEG2000 raster object.
A null mask subobject is created to specify cells of null, or no, data.
-
Geometric Object Conversions: A mixture of several geometric objects
(vector, CAD, shape, region, and TIN) can be selected as input in the Extract or
Merge processes. The specific
output type is determined by your menu selection.
-
Render to SVG: Rendering into a Scalable Vector Graphics layout is
now faster. It uses a new improved
control window with tabbed panels. New
features include a JavaScript to reproduce any DataTips that were defined in the
source object(s), zoom up labels 2x when they are under the cursor, and others.
-
Geospatial Scripting Language: 20 SML
scripts designed to demonstrate new visualization and analysis capabilities are
illustrated and dissected in the accompanying color plates.
These include Display Control Scripts used for Enhanced DataTips and
GraphTips, TNTsim3D startup scripts,
a sample Dynamic Spatial Analysis script, and a TNTatlas
startup script to create a user input form for a complex query.
-
Tutorials: Two new tutorials are provided on the topics of managing
massive geodata layers and setting up the TNTsdk.
14 new Quick Guides are included and all Quick Guides can now be
installed and are indexed and accessible directly from within your TNT
products. 62 new color plates
accompany this MEMO to illustrate the use of the new features in RV7.0.
Four other tutorials have been expanded in scope to cover new features
and updated and 2 more have been updated.
Official
Releases.
Introduction.
For
20 years your requirements and our interest in addressing new opportunities for
geospatial analysis have continued to make TNTmips
and the other TNT products advanced
and flexible. In responding to this
continual demand and opportunity for new and more efficient features, the TNT
products are by necessity continually evolving.
As a result, you have to make the choice between reliability and your
need for new features, ease of use, speed, and so on.
MicroImages has an effective weekly patching system in place that
provides upgrades for several official versions of our TNT
products to support the evolutionary nature of our product development.
Patching is easy and can be done each week.
Cycling
Releases.
As
we approach the end of a development cycle of the next version of the TNT
products (for example, DV7.0), we
formally announce its new features. This came to you in synopsis form in a
MicroImages MEMO entitled V7.0 New Features.
From our viewpoint, this is about the time that the initial coding of
most of the new features for the next version is complete and their improvement
is underway. This New Features MEMO
is issued to you as early in our development cycle as possible to permit you to
decide if you want to order that version and/or begin to experiment with it.
Soon
after the New Features MEMO reaches you, we begin to get inquiries about when we
will officially release that version. The
official release of a new version of the TNT
products is made on a specific date via microimages.com. On that day the
official release version of your TNT
product is posted for downloading (for example, TNTmips
RV7.0 on 17 November 2004
).
During the weeks prior to this official electronic release, MicroImages’
staff is searching for and correcting errors and making minor adjustments to
tune the features in the release. This
effort is guided by your and our observations from using each successive weekly
prerelease as DV7.0.
During this last period before the official release, our activities are
not focused upon adding new major features, but some may appear that were not
documented in the early New Features MEMO.
Electronic
Release of Versions.
On
the day of the official release we are merely changing the name and status from
a development version (DV7.0) to the
official release version (RV7.0).
As a result, the official release differs from the last or weekly posting
of the development version by one week. The
first patch file posted the next week (PV7.0)
will differ from the official release version by 1 week, then 2 weeks, and so on
as will the full release version posted for download.
One significant thing that happens on this official release date is that
development of new features ceases. Correspondingly,
on that date a new development version is created internally at MicroImages (for
example, DV7.1 on 17 November 2004
).
Within a few weeks, when some new features are working in this new
development version, it is made available for downloading and new descriptive
material about it begins to appear at microimages.com.
Making
Your Update Decision.
You
can enter this weekly cycle at any time you choose that is permitted by your
subscription status by downloading an RV, PV, and/or DV that each may differ
from their previous release in weekly increments. If you are maintaining dual
versions (for example, the latest PV7.0
and DV7.1), you may be updating them
frequently. You probably became
aware of some interesting new feature via a new color plate(s), our daily news,
or eventually via the new feature summary MEMO.
You may decide to set up and start using DV7.1
because you need access to, or at least want to experiment with, some new
feature available in the DV. You
then often lobby us with suggestions for improvements in these new features
while such changes are easy to make. You
also report errors so that you can get these new features into working shape for
your immediate application via the DV. In
the weeks just before the official release, adding significant changes and
features decreases significantly and tuning and error correction are the focus
of our activity in that version. As of the date of the official release, no new
features are added to that version, a new development version is created for
that purpose, and the patches to the official release are focused only upon
correcting the inevitable additional errors you locate when running your
specific production projects.
From
all of the above you can conclude that the concept of an “Official Release”
of the TNT products is somewhat
arbitrary and subjective as our product evolution simply progresses from week to
week. The point at which you as a
client, institution, or reseller install the newest versions of the TNT
products is, thus, arbitrary. The
earlier in a development cycle that you install and work with the development
version, the faster you will gain access to its new features and the more likely
you will be motivated to, and become interested in, participating in the
perfection of that version as well and in influencing its final features and
form.
Physical
Release of Materials.
When
the effort of bringing a DV to the point of officially releasing it as an RV is
complete, the physical materials for it can be completed, such as writing this
MEMO, printing hundreds of thousands of color plates, reproducing color booklets
and Quick Guides, duplicating many thousands of CDs and DVDs, and packing and
shipping. This takes time.
Many popular commercial product upgrades first become available as a
download with rather useless help file updates and later via a single CD
providing the same lack of information but packaged in a big, fancy, and
otherwise empty box. This may work
for your products that are feature stable, such as a word processor or
spreadsheet, if you have good Internet access (not a modem), access to
commercial retail outlets, and are willing to buy expensive books months later
to consult regarding the possible new operations provided in the upgrade.
It is not workable approach for a complex, rapidly evolving, and more
expensive professional product, such as TNTmips.
Independent
User’s Flexibility.
As
a typical professional TNTmips user,
you are probably using a Windows- or Mac- based computer with dual displays, 1
GB of memory, hundreds of gigabytes of drive space, and DSL or cable Internet
access. While TNTmips
is a very large set of programs on a relative basis, each copy of it now has a
relatively small footprint on your large hard drives.
Your high speed network access enables you to effortlessly grab our large
weekly releases while at lunch and maintain several of them on your hard drive.
MicroImages also insures that, if you have multiple versions of your TNT
product installed on the same computer, they can be operated totally
independently.
Dependent
User’s Production Approach.
The
TNT product upgrades are widely
distributed internationally and must reach users with a wide variety of highly
varied distribution channels and Internet bandwidth.
Those of you with fast Internet connectivity can have your RV within days
of its postings. You do not need
the CD containing it. In fact, it
is likely that something on that CD has already been patched by the weekly
patches before the CD reaches you, and you have already downloaded your release
and patches to it. Those who are in
remote locations who can not at least borrow a fast Internet connection have to
wait for the CD to arrive and probably stay with using that version and its
potential problems. Those of you
using floating licenses with software installation, maintenance, and version
testing controlled by system managers have to live with their decisions with
regard to when they upgrade you. You
are again experiencing the same circumstances that originally led to the
personal computer rebellion and now to the monopoly of various software
products. In this case, try to
persuade them to let you have access to 2 TNT
versions: “the tried and true and something new.”
MicroImages’ various official release and patching procedures are
designed to support this widely diverse clientele (for example, fast versus slow
web access) and international customs (for example, locations with an absolute
aversion to prepaying for or even maintaining software).
How
Do TNT Innovations Occur?
Innovations
in application software are not born out of nothing.
Software evolves based on multiple factors, some controllable (for
example, existing features and the introduction of new libraries) and some
uncontrolled (for example, new operating systems versions and hardware and
increased computational power). Innovations
in the TNT products come about
within these circumstances in a process that might be thought of as guided
chaos. Thus, when we release new
features with long range objectives, their utility may not be clear to you and
may not even be totally clear to us.
Examples
of earlier TNT innovations of this
type might be the transparent use of geodata objects without regard to their
projection or coordinate reference systems, keeping all information for a
geodata layer together in a single object, managing geodata of differing
structures in a single file, adding the concept of scale to objects and views, TNT
scripting, and so on. The utility
of these features introduced over time may not have been immediately apparent,
but they now provide the building blocks of your current TNT
products’ advanced capabilities.
Enhanced
DataTips, GraphTips, Display Control Scripts, and Dynamic Geospatial Analysis
introduced in RV7.0 provide an
interesting example of how slowly perfected software building blocks can be
assembled and reassembled into innovative new TNT
features. The history of how these
features evolved from the simple DataTip idea may be of interest and provide
insight into how these new features work and can be applied. As you read this
account, you might wish to jump ahead and examine accompanying color plates in
the category entitled Sample
GraphTip Scripts to help you visualize the kinds of results they can
provide. These color plates are
also referenced and discussed in specific detail in the corresponding technical
sections of this MEMO.
Can
we spatially interact with a view? DataTips
are born.
Years
ago in the 20-year evolution of the TNT
products, we happened to see the idea of a pop-in feature identification label
in some other small software product. At
the time, this was the basis for the addition of the DataTips concept into the TNT
products. Our implementation took
this example idea further by permitting you to designate which attribute to
present as the DataTip for the element at or nearest to the cursor.
As soon as this feature appeared, you asked for more in the form of
longer strings for the prefix and suffix for better identification of the
information shown in the DataTip. This
led to requests for multi-line DataTips and then to DataTips presenting
information from more than one field.
Can
we compute their contents? DataTips
are computed, not simply read.
Next
came the desire to manipulate the “raw” values in an attribute field before
they pop in as a DataTip. An early
example of this was the need to change the units of the value in the field
before showing it in the DataTip or to combine real fields together to compute
and present a new and more meaningful value.
In a parallel development elsewhere in the TNT
products, the idea of defining and using virtual fields was evolving.
This capability made it possible to make new fields available that were
not really there in the tables and records (in other words, they are virtual).
They are defined using an equation or TNT
script from other real or virtual attribute fields in the table(s) and
reevaluated every time they are used for anything.
These virtual fields appear and behave the same as real fields in the
designated table and to other TNT
processes. In general, this
approach is analogous to the use of computed fields in what is called a
“view” in a database session and terminology.
At
that conjuncture, it was easy to adapt the virtual field concept for use in the
DataTip application. So now the
evolution of the DataTip had led to the ability to set up DataTips that
presented in real time the results of a model computed from the values of the
attributes at the current position of the cursor.
This procedure can be said to be “spatially aware” since when the
cursor position is changed, this model is instantly computed from the current
field values and the result then automatically pops in as a DataTip.
This was considered innovative at that time because, if some other
program or database activity changed the field(s) in the attribute table(s),
this changes the computed value of the virtual field and the corresponding
DataTip.
Can
we get modeled contents? DataTips
evaluate models.
You
can use this feature to compute modeled results from complex equations to define
the virtual field from geodata layers that may be hidden from view.
One example would be the use of the simple Universal Soil Loss Equation (USLE)
to compute and display as a DataTip the potential soil erosion for any point in
the image being viewed. The
equation defining the value of this virtual field would be derived from hidden
vector layer(s) of soil properties and raster layer(s) of terrain properties.
These hidden layers do not even have to match the image layer being
viewed in projection, cell size, area extent, and so on.
Why
can’t we style the content? Complex
DataTips get styled.
Innovation,
or the application of others’ innovations to our products’ objectives, can
not stop. Computer power enables
it, you demand it, competition requires it.
Through all this you and we continued to communicate and work together.
Thus, about a year ago at a weekly informal lunch meeting of the
MicroImages software engineers, we were discussing how we could respond to your
requests to improve the appearance of DataTips.
The
initial focus of the discussion was that the information presented in a DataTip
would be easier to understand if they used font styles and tabs.
The immediate requirement causing this review at the meeting was the use
of font styles to differentiate prefixes from values and units and to align the
values vertically for easier reading.
In
a few minutes of discussion, it was concluded that this feature and many other
related to formatting could be easily implemented for use in DataTips in a
couple of days’ work. Simply
permit the DataTip text to contain the many format codes used in the text editor
by modifying the DataTip display code to use them.
Within a few days this was applied and used in the attractive DataTip
that pops into the Lincoln Property Viewer sample TNTatlas
DVD accompanying this MEMO. It is
also illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Property Viewer
Atlas for Lincoln,
NE.
Easy, yes, but it requires today’s computing power and years of other
earlier TNT developments to be
interactive and to build and display many lines of formatted data from multiple
layers in a fraction of a second.
Can
the changing data change the style? Enhanced
DataTips arrive.
Next,
at this same meeting, the idea followed that it would be useful if the text
color and background color of the frame of the DataTip could be determined at
the time of its display and changed based upon its current value.
These visual stimuli could be used to alert you or your user of some
particular aspect of the content or the changing content of the DataTip.
For example, “red” background could indicate that the temperature,
pressure, and other values for the flow in the nearest pipeline are critical and
out-of-range, “yellow” that they are approaching critical, and “green”
means that they are in safe range. Of
course, this is merely an example as you might want the pipeline and DataTip to
automatically pop in to the view if its condition is “red” and approaching
critical.
A
practical use of color to draw the attention of the user to specific conditions
is illustrated in the color plate noted above by changing the background color
of the DataTip and the corresponding value to alert you of the floodplain
category of the property. This
zoning might be of particular interest since a lending bank may require the
potential buyer to purchase expensive floodplain insurance, pay higher mortgage
interest rates, or even have a no-loan policy for flood prone areas.
In this example on your sample DVD, all you have to do is move the cursor
to the house of interest. Alerting
you to this special condition in this complex spatial reconnaissance TNTatlas
would not be very interactive by other means.
For example, this zoning could be reviewed by turning on the flood zone
vector layer for the view with polygons filled with transparent colors.
However, showing this and any of the other interrelated layers used in
this DataTip would soon obscure the view and make it difficult to understand,
particularly for your clients in other professions and with other backgrounds.
Another
example of how to use enhanced DataTips would be to present the results of a
Multi-Criteria Decision Analysis equation (MCDA) that applies linear weights to
the attributes of several hidden vector objects (for example, land use, soil
properties, elevation, slope, temperature, rainfall, …).
This MCDA equation would combine the attributes of these layers to
populate a virtual table with virtual fields whose values are the suitability
index for each potential crop. The
virtual field for each crop could even incorporate local production costs,
conservation impact (for example, erosion potential), and market value for each
crop and present these factors with or incorporated into these crop suitability
indices. All these virtual fields
could be dynamically evaluated at any cursor position, combined, and popped into
the view as a single attractive enhanced DataTip for all major crops with a
layout similar to the enhanced DataTip in the Lincoln Property Viewer atlas.
How
could this MCDA-derived DataTip be used in a rural scenario?
Assume you or your client need to work with local land owners and land
stewards who are not particularly computer aware and do not even want to know
anything about geospatial analysis. One
objective is to show any one of them at any unscheduled time what is likely to
be the most suitable crop(s) for their land using “appropriate technology.”
Unscheduled is the key word here; it’s when they walk into your office
unannounced or you stop at their village with a portable computer.
If you start out by showing them some complex paper map prepared in
advance or screen view of the suitability of the general area for each potential
crop you are using “inappropriate technology” and will only confuse them.
As
an alternative, suppose you have prepared in advance a nice color image of the
area, with an overlay of some general road, village, label, and property
boundaries. You then view this in a
free TNTatlas, the new low-cost TNTview,
or any other TNT product including a
TNTserver.
You use this view to help them get their bearings in a 2D view of their
general area. You first and then
they move the cursor around on the 2D view, and wherever they hesitate, an
enhanced DataTip pops in showing clearly labeled values for the suitability of
each potential crop for an area they can recognize from the image and its simple
feature overlays in the view.
Maybe
they need a 3D view or even a TNTsim3D
opened to help them get oriented in the 2D view.
However, from this DataTip when moving the cursor around, they will
easily get the idea of the comparative crop suitability.
They may be concerned at this point about how these values are derived,
but could care less about how the underlying technology manages it.
Next they will want to see the general variability of the suitability of
a crop in their area rather than these point results.
Now you or they can make a simple step further and turn on a single
vector overlay showing in transparent color the suitability of a single crop for
the entire area of possible interest, and so on.
But
text is not the best way to present interrelated values!
GraphTips arrive.
The
design for implementing a GraphTip approach for an interactive graphical
presentation similar to DataTips was defined at the same lunch meeting.
We recognized that DataTips were getting complex and being used to
present multiple lines of interrelated values.
It was then a small but innovative jump to discussing how this
information might be presented in a graphical form as a GraphTip that pops in
instead of a DataTip.
GraphTips
are an interactive form of pin mapping. The
simplest example of this is to pop in a pie diagram or a bar graph to visually
show the percentage relationship between several database fields, for example
the relative population of men and women in a county.
Yes, a pinmap layer or map could present this same graphical information
by showing all the pins. This is
the way pin mapping is used in a physical printed map.
However, in an interactive setting all these pins, unless carefully
controlled by scale, can obliterate the basic theme layers in the view and each
other. So now you can use GraphTips
to present these same symbolic results as an interactive presentation that
automatically shows these details for every position of the cursor.
Why
are we limited to only one graph? Display
Control Scripts are added.
After
these simpler GraphTip concepts were developed, even more complex applications
of the GraphTip concept were discussed at a later informal lunch meeting.
These ideas were sufficiently complex and varied that they could not be
achieved by further extension of the DataTip/GraphTip coding structure.
So the idea of using our codeveloped TNT
geospatial analysis scripting
language (SML) to provide for more
real time, complex spatial decisions to determine what to draw and where to draw
it. Thus, the concept of a Display
Control Script (DCS) was added to the TNT
products.
In
some ways GraphTips created by a DCS are closely allied to the already familiar
idea of using a TNT script to add
new special tools to the icon bar or menu in the view.
However, you “pull information to you” with a Tool (Tool Script)
since it only evaluates information about the position when you click on it.
A DCS “pushes information at you” in the form of instructions,
graphs, images, or whatever you preprogram it to do if the cursor simply pauses
on or near a feature in the layer.
Examples
of a Tool and a Display Control Script that have been deliberately designed to
have very similar objectives (a moving spyglass view of another layer) are
discussed in the technical sections below.
While Tool Scripts and DCSs have different internal structures, in
application they may only differ in operation in a simple fashion.
A Tool is selected and turned on by your deliberate choice and action. You
then may get a dialog to define how the tool should operate.
The simplest dialog at the start of using a Tool might let you select the
object in the layer list or any other overlapping object for use with the Tool.
You must then click the Tool in the view to initiate its activity.
In
contrast, a Display Control Script (DCS) is automatically evaluated every time
the cursor moves a designated minimum distance in screen pixels and pauses a
specified period of time, usually set to 0.5 seconds.
When these cursor movement/pause conditions are met, the DCS, which has
been concurrently running, automatically operates on layers typically hidden in
the view, or on objects in fixed directory locations.
These objects can be of changing size, content, different Coordinate
Reference Systems, and so on but must be named and found in the preprogrammed
directory positions or kept track of by some means, such as top or bottom layer.
The DCS draws in a GraphTip and then closes it when the cursor is moved.
However, since it is a TNT
script, it can take a wide variety of other geospatial actions leading to the
next kind of dynamic application.
Can
we graphically present spatially interrelated results?
Dynamic Geospatial Analysis
arrives.
Via
the Display Control Script (DCS) we have ended up this RV7.0
development cycle with the idea that multiple GraphTips can pop into your view
that are at positions that are spatially related to, but not at the pause
position of the cursor. These
GraphTips can visually represent the data about features at remote locations in
or off the edge of the view. This
is illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Exploring District
Services.
This
is a dynamic analysis. If you pause
the cursor at any location on the color image of Lincoln, 3 GraphTips symbolically representing
school buildings pop in at the location of the 3 different schools (elementary,
middle, and high school) that serve the geographic location of the cursor.
Move the cursor and the school symbols move around appropriately. This is
a DCS so no mouse click is necessary and its use is completely
“discoverable,” simply pause the mouse over the view!
In
this example DCS, the cursor position is used to detect the property parcel from
a hidden vector layer when the cursor is paused.
This parcel is overlapped by the three school attendance area polygons in
the hidden school attendance vector layer.
This permits the point at which the school is located to be found in this
layer and the GraphTip school symbol to pop in at that position.
The accompanying color plate entitled Using Overlapping Polygons
graphically illustrates how the DCS uses these unseen vector elements.
This DCS script is listed and dissected on the backs of these 2 color
plates.
Now
it is up to you, at least for this development cycle.
Show us what you can do!
In
many applications of TNTmips as a
geospatial specialist, you are setting up materials for other professionals to
use and exploit. We might define
their goal as “interactive spatial data mining” and we have decided to call
this activity in the TNT products
Dynamic Geospatial Analysis. DataTips
are now commonly used in your applications but took some time and improvements
to become ubiquitous.
While
perhaps complex to set up, this school example is the latest crest of the wave
of our innovations in this direction.
Each time we provide a new crest, you exploit it in innovative ways in
your area of interest and extend our initial applications well beyond our ideas.
For example, you might set up geodata and GraphTips for an expert
geologist to explore for spatial relationships in digital layers of geological
geodata. Yes, you or your
client might find these conditions by successive “batch-like” applications
of other geospatial analysis tools, in other words, you jointly think up a
scenario and then run out the map for visual or hardcopy review.
However, this greatly reduces the chance that the expertise of the
several professionals involved will be used to interact and “think
spatially” rather than simply periodically “evaluate spatially.”
Can you think up ways to use these new interactive capabilities to search
for spatial relationships that can be interactively discovered?
And
we have not truly invented anything new! “Innovation
favors the well prepared!”
It
is easy for us to think that we discovered or invented these new kinds of tools
and ideas. What in fact is
happening is that “we are actually discovering” how to adapt and apply what
we have observed elsewhere for use in the particular focus of our TNT
products. Most of these concepts
discussed above are used in other types of application products, but not
necessarily in competitive geospatial analysis products.
For example, many analogs of these ideas are encountered in web browsing
if you are using a broadband connection and dynamic HTML, flash, SVG, and so on.
They are discovered and added to your TNT
products using our building blocks as part of our efforts to maintain the most
innovative, professional-level, desktop geospatial visualization and analysis
software available.
Bigger,
Bigger,
and Bigger
Projects.
Introduction.
The
innovation in the TNT products
discussed above is interesting and potentially useful in some of your
applications. But it is certain
that the size and scope of your geospatial analysis tasks for the TNT
products will grow and grow and continually require our development efforts to
keep up. You can handle these large
geodata tasks in a lot of little orthoimage pieces or map units using a
batch-like strategy, but this may impose limitations, such as edge effects.
You can also approach these tasks for your nation, state, or the world
using large, single objects and Project Files.
It
should be clear to you that just as the outer boundaries of your projects expand
toward some physical, geographical, or political boundary, the inner detail
required will also continue to increase. Available
image resolution and extent will increase, GPS precision for line oriented
materials will increase, datum and local coordinate reference systems will be
refined, and so on.
This
is why the Coordinate Reference System (CRS) standardization and related
modifications have been released in RV7.0.
These standardized coordinate systems are the base needed to build these
obvious future “really big jobs” and meet their accuracy requirements.
For example, the new High Accuracy Reference Network (HARN) datums and
transformations in and out of older datums are being introduced into geodata
sets in Japan, Europe, and the
US to support new accuracy requirements.
Future
geospatial applications require standardized, industry wide, exchangeable, and
accurate CRSs. It may be as simple
as resolving the current arguments between image providers about how to
standardize the access to the CRS of JPEG2000 compressed images (*.jp2 files)
moved around the Internet. Or, it
may be as complicated as some future application in automatically driving a
vehicle.
As
you need them, these new demands are met by our TNT
upgrades released to respond to these new requirements in size and accuracy.
Often, it is you clients who are professional geospatial analysts (in
other words, those using TNTmips as
part of earning their living) who identify to us these new requirements by
asking for these kinds of “bigger and better features.”
These improvements can then be applied by all clients whether you are
developing geodata for a nation, state, or river basin or simply requiring very
high precision for preserving the spatial relationship of features in managing a
municipal infrastructure or recording and analyzing a small archaeological site.
Big
Project Strategy.
Throughout
its existence, MicroImages has focused on getting the really large project
completed as efficiently as possible on your desktop.
Our working premise is that if the TNT
products can do the really large geodata storage, access, and analysis in
acceptable times, the small activities of these types will appear to be nearly
instantaneous.
Your
concept of what is a “really large project” for your TNT
products has continuously ratcheted up over their 20-year evolution.
What is a “really large project” has primarily been, and continues to
be defined by the availability to you of larger and larger inexpensive hard
drives; CDs, then DVDs, and soon HDVDs as a publication media; the limits of
your operating system; and other limits these hardware factors place on TNT
objects and Project File sizes.
Our
original conceptual design of the Project File, its objects, and their
subsequent adjustments has enabled us to adjust the Project FIle to keep well
ahead of these improvements in your storage, operating system, and processing
power and the ever larger objects they permit you to use in your projects.
Today you do not hesitate to commit to undertake massive city, county,
province, and country sized projects in TNTmips
using single objects for each data layer.
Your
personal time is often most efficiently used if your project can be approached
in this fashion, even if you need to run a complex TNT
analysis task in the background while completing other work in a word processor
or even when it continues running unattended overnight. Then often, upon
completion of the project, you tile out the objects for export into other
formats in smaller units so they can be used in less robust products.
Certainly
your desktop hardware speed (processor, bus and drive access, memory, and so on)
and the efficiency of a required TNT
process control your efficiency in completing the task.
However, usually it is the storage media that enables you to consider
undertaking it as a “really big project” rather than inefficiently in pieces
or not at all. Yes, you most
certainly let us know when a particular process runs for hours or days.
We then go to work to determine if that process can be made more
efficient and faster. Sometimes it
is a matter of the basic limitations of the current hardware.
However, in either case, you often move ahead with your “really big
project” running slow tasks overnight or over the weekend.
Sample
Past Improvements.
The
Global Data Set DVD released as part of V6.9
and the Lincoln Property Viewer TNTatlas
released with RV7.0 demonstrate that
your large object approach to large projects can be viable and cost effective
and differentiate the TNT products
from others. Keeping pace with your
expectations in this area does require that new or completely revised building
blocks and strategies are needed and must be gradually introduced and perfected.
Some of these “really large project” software strategies introduced
over the past years in the TNT
products are:
-
image pyramiding for very fast display of images at any scale,
-
periodic implementation of new and better means of raster compression,
-
optimizing the internal structure of a polygonal vector object,
-
providing simpler topologies when polygonal topology is not needed,
-
using geodata in objects closer to their original CAD and shape designs,
-
indexing large database tables, and
-
continuing effort to speed up topology validation.
How
well have these past features you have had for years met these “really big
project” goals as we have evolved forward?
Inserted here is a web comment addressing the last feature listed above.
It was picked up from a discussion on a forum for an inexpensive GIS
product by a user of TNTmips 6.4
(circa 2000) and the latest version of the other product.
The TNTmips 6.4 version
mentioned is now more than 4 years old, a long time in this rapidly evolving
business. The inclusion of this
quote is not intended to be critical of the other low-cost products mentioned
(they have their own design objectives), but to present a totally objective
comment on how users of products react to how our products or their other
products use their time. This posting is obviously a comment from a user who
remains satisfied with the capabilities of V6.4
or has a lot of time and little money for upgrades.
From
a posting to manifold-l@lists.directionsmag.com on 18 November 2004
“Another
interesting thing I've just been looking at (and I know this has featured in a
few discussions, and [a
name] mentioned that they're working on it) is the display time for a large
drawing (75mb e00 file) of watershed basins (i.e. areas). I double clicked the
drawing and it opened up and is still working away at displaying the basins
(quite a while now) - in the meantime I've opened up TNTmips 6.4 and displayed
it in there. The initial time was about 1 minute, thereafter redrawing took less
than ten seconds (while Manifold is still not showing anything but the red dot
in the right hand corner). I then overlayed the flowpaths (couple of tens of
thousands of lines) on the basins in TNTmips, and again the initial display time
was about a minute, and thereafter redisplaying, zooming in/out, etc/ takes less
than 10 seconds. Selecting basins or flowpaths is almost instantaneous (recolouring
the line/area as well as showing the attribute data in the table). How do they
do it? I know this has been one of TNTmips' features for many years - very fast
drawing/displaying of vectors and rasters. I've seen ArcView battling with less,
and so do all the open source products (especially the Java products like Jump
and OpenMap) that I've worked with. It takes ages for larger vector objects to
display. I'm interested in how it's done - curious. I know there's a checkbox in
TNTmips, when you import vector data: Optimize vector for display. Also, a
process for optimizing old (pre 6.4, I think) vector layers. Any theories? What
voodoo art do they use to get MSWindows to display these things so very quickly?
Mmmh,
no drawing yet - Manifold's still oozing along... :-)
V7.0
Results.
A
major portion of the effort expended in getting you RV7.0
is to alter and improve TNT features
to accommodate your bigger, bigger, and bigger project materials.
These activities are summarized here in this context of largeness and
robustness improvements in RV7.0 and
are covered in much more detail later in this MEMO’s corresponding technical
sections.
Mosaicking:
making big raster objects bigger.
Assembling
mosaics of large areas from good quality orthoimages and collarless, good
quality, scanned maps is becoming common. Often
the source material is large in number (for example, thousands) and/or large in
uncompressed size, but provided in a compressed form such as JPEG, MrSID, or PNG.
By necessity, the target is also compressed, such as in a JPEG2000 object
or a JP2 file. Mosaic can now
accept as direct input any linked raster files, does not import them, and
outputs the mosaicked object in any supported raster type including a compressed
JPEG2000, JPEG, or standard lossless object.
To accomplish this kind of task, even if it is so big that it takes
hours, has required a lot of attention to be given to the RV7.0
version of Mosaic.
Compression;
making big raster objects small again.
JPEG2000
compression is now completely integrated for use in raster objects in RV7.0
of the TNT products.
For example, you can now mosaic directly into JPEG2000 compressed raster
objects. These objects can then be
used as texture layers in your TNTsim3D,
greatly increasing the texture raster dimensions of the Landscape File that can
be distributed on a DVD. JPEG2000
compressed images (as well as linked MrSID, and ECW) can be used to put much
larger images into your TNTatlas on
DVD and correspondingly for use by your TNTserver.
JPEG2000 files can even be served up by TNTserver
to reduce transmission time to a TNTclient.
Shape
Object: making shapefile layers faster.
Large,
single shapefiles are beginning to appear of over a gigabyte, usually due to
attachments to large database structures. The
use of the new shape object concept has been advanced in RV7.0
to greatly accelerate the ability of the TNT
products to directly link to large shapefiles and use them just like any other
layer in a TNT view.
Accompanying this has been the addition of procedures into this automatic
link to show the shapefile’s legend entries and styles in the TNT
LegendView for the linked object.
Coordinate
Reference Systems (CRSs): supporting the precision needed.
You
can not do many types of large projects without accurate, standard CRSs and
conversions between them and their possible datums.
RV7.0 introduces a completely
revised CRS based on ISO standard 19111:2003.
For example, your large project might have a small geographic extent,
such as a city, but require very high accuracies.
These could be difficult specifications to accommodate without using the
new High Accuracy Reference Network (HARN) datums and datum transformations
enabled by this new CRS management introduced first in RV7.0.
Merging
and Combining: assembling bigger,
more complex geometric objects.
Copy/Paste,
extracting, merging, and combining large vector, CAD, shape, and TIN objects can
now be set up to run with fewer intermediate steps using the new Geometric
Conversion Engine introduced in RV7.0.
However, the larger and more complex the objects combined directly into a
polygonal vector object or converted later, the greater the possibility that
conflation errors (in other words, microscopic topology errors) might occur.
This improved capability and your tendency toward creating larger
geometric objects, particularly vector objects, have required substantial
improvements in the validation of topology to detect and resolve these errors
and in speed to accommodate all the additional computation and checking this
necessitates.
Scale
Control: preventing meaningless, slow displays of large geometric objects.
Even
a trivial thing like displaying a large vector at meaningless map/view scales
has been addressed. Now you are
given a warning in the form of a Dense Layer Verification window and options if
the geometric object you are selecting to display at the current view scale is
so dense that it will simply fill in the view in a meaningless mass of
crisscrossing lines.
This
Dense Layer Verification window is illustrated in the accompanying color plate
entitled Managing Display of Large Vectors.
It will appear when you select a vector object for the current view that
exceeds an element density threshold. When
this warning window appears, you are being informed that at the current scale of
the view the vector will be slow to render and will solidly or densely fill in
the area it covers. You can choose
to dispose of this window using several toggles.
Do
not add layer.
Select
this toggle if you simply want to skip this layer for the moment.
You can then use some other layer(s) to zoom into your view to the local
area of interest, and then come back and add in this vector when it will display
with a lower element density.
Add
with full visibility.
This
toggle overrides this warning window and displays the vector object.
Add
with scale range of.
This
is the toggle that is initially on by default for each new large vector object
you display. Along with this toggle you are provided with data entry boxes to
set the scale range of the view window over which this layer will be drawn in
the view. Each box will have a
default scale value in it that you can edit.
The larger value will determine how far you zoom into the view for this
layer to begin appearing. It is
determined to be a reasonable scale from the element density.
The lower value is initially zero. If
it is set to some other value, it will determine when the layer will cease to
appear as you zoom in further and further.
If you set this toggle, the current values in this window will be saved
with this vector object and appear as defaults in the Dense Layer Verification
window the next time the vector is added as a layer in any view.
If you want to change the scale range previously set for any layer, reset
it the next time it is added or choose Show
Scale Ranges
from the Options menu in the Group or
Layout Controls window, and change it there.
Add
initially hidden.
This
toggle adds the vector to the layer list as a hidden layer. You
can then toggle the layer on when you have zoomed into the view to a scale at
which it is needed and will not be so dense that it obscures all other
previously added layers.
DV7.1.
Making it even better.
In
DV7.1 we plan to experiment to see
how other kinds of modifications can improve, or at least keep pace with, your
ever increasing project sizes. At
least two areas of investigation are related directly to how fast you can work
in your TNT products.
Buffering
Individual Layers.
As
you know, big geometric objects can take time to add to a composite view each
time any layer is turned off and back on. Using
a new memory buffering approach, it may be possible to add individual new layers
to a view or toggle those already showing off and then back on without
regenerating all the other layers in that view.
Selecting
File Opens a View.
Another
feature of possible wide interest, which has already been implemented in DV7.1
in its initial form, is the ability to double click on a file with a supported
extension (for example, *.jpg, *.jp2, *.shp, *.sid, and so on) and automatically
open the TNT product registered in
Windows for this file, the X server and the display process, link to the object,
and display it. You can also click and open to run an SML
script (*.tkp, *.sml), or a Landscape File (*.sim) for TNTsim3D,
or a Project File (*.rvc). Selecting
a Project File in this fashion will open it in the registered TNT
product using the first layout, the first group, or the first object it finds in
that Project File. Methods for
determining and controlling which of these objects to open when more than one is
present are currently being explored. This new capability is currently limited
to Windows but will soon be made available for Mac OS X and other TNT
supported operating systems.
Yes,
this click and go even works for a single layer if the free TNTatlas/X
is installed and is registered in Windows as the software used to open any of
these extensions. TNTatlas/X is
downloaded and installed as part of every TNTlite
and does not have the object size limitations of the other TNT
products included in TNTlite. Thus,
any supported file type or TNT
object can be opened in this fashion by a lite user and use all the features and
tools in TNTatlas/X, but only one
object at a time. If you want
to view more than one layer or layout then install and register these extensions
for use with the new, lower cost TNTview
product. Using the mouse to select
a *.jp2 or *.sid file of many gigabytes before or after compression can
automatically open TNTatlas (or your
other TNT product) to view the
raster in seconds! Shapefiles may
take a few more seconds but work just the same.
Will this new feature make the RV7.1
TNTatlas the most powerful and
useful FREE geodata viewer available?
New
Feature Priorities.
Will
the feature be there when you need it?
The
TNT products probably cover the
widest range of geospatial application areas and uses of any single product
without expensive extensions or options. However,
in a specific project, you often concentrate your use and requests for new
features in a specific area. For
example, your interest is primarily in using TNTatlas
as a geodata publishing tool. You
may go along in this fashion for years with this activity and may not feel you
need to keep your TNTmips current.
Suddenly you encounter a situation, say a new operating system, new
hardware lacking an earlier feature (for example, a portable with no parallel
port), a data source such as MrSID, large mosaics, a detailed project area with
a special local coordinate reference system, and so on.
Any one of these may require you to take advantage of the newest features
in the latest version of TNTmips to
make your TNTatlas.
Depending upon the potential generic nature of your request, you will
find it has been addressed in a recent version of the TNT
products. If you do not find that
feature in the current version, you begin to lobby for it or even for a
completely new direction in product development (for example, the introduction
of manifolds in this release). Every
request we receive is documented and assigned a priority.
It’s
a case of setting priorities.
At
the present time we have 2750 new feature requests of varying priorities, which
have accumulated over the last 20 years. The majority of these were not logged
by you, but internally by MicroImages’ staff as part of our internal design
decisions. RV7.0
completed 281 new feature requests from this list while 404 were added since RV6.9.
To manage our resources and product development we have to establish
priorities for which new features we add and which we do not add for each new
release. Once you have received back the code number assigned to any new feature
you have submitted, you can check the priority we give to it at www.microimages.com/support/features/. The
initial priority we assign to a new feature request is based upon our perception
of whether or not that feature represents a commonly needed feature for our
clients. However,
assigning a high priority to any new feature does not mean that it will be in
the next release. Often this is
because it requires some lower level, underlying, and not obvious developments
in the TNT code and must await these
developments; it can already be accomplished by other TNT
procedures; it is large and complex to implement; or it simply becomes less
important due to other internal software or operating system changes.
Increasing
a priority.
Finding
that a less than high priority has been assigned to your new feature request
does not mean you should give up on getting it.
Sometimes you have to be persistent and convince us that it is in our
interest and that of other clients to raise its priority. Or,
you may want to discuss the possibility of contracting with MicroImages to add
that feature to the TNT products.
Often we will cost share the expenses of such developments.
But, even if it is added in this contract fashion, the feature will not
be proprietary and will become available to everyone in the next TNT
release.
Opportunity
costs.
Many
commercial product companies will not respond to custom feature requests.
Why? Because the true cost,
not your perceived cost of commercial software development, is not obvious.
These are called “lost opportunity costs.”
This is the cost(s) of not completing the most important features of
common and wide interest at the earliest date with a limited resource, in this
case the time of the software engineering manpower available. Software engineers
experienced and capable of doing TNT
programming are a limited resource that can not be replaced simply because extra
money is made available.
Also
keep in mind that any new feature added to our commercial product whether by our
initiative, your lobbying, or by a contract must be maintained indefinitely on
all platforms, may restrict other future developments, must be supported for
all, requires documentation (for example, at least color plates), may delay
widely usable generic developments, can delay a release and thus, subscription
fulfillment, and so on. Consider these hidden costs of software development to
the extreme by reflecting on how large the Microsoft employee base has grown.
Yet clearly this gradual increase in their size was not accompanied by a
proportional increase in the number of software engineers actually coding their
products. As they grew larger and
larger, the proportion of their staff members writing product code is quite
small in comparison.
Design
costs.
However,
the biggest single hidden cost to us in adding more complex new features via
contract can be even less obvious. It’s
the time required to figure out what you want by our management and our software
engineers, especially when we speak different languages both literally and
professionally and reside in different nations necessitating written
communications. We are a software
development, production, and marketing company and are not staffed as you are by
geospatial analysts or professionals in the various application disciplines.
Yes, we have some professionals from the application areas, but they are
responsible for preparing written materials for all users and associated general
software feature design and testing. Whether
you are lobbying for a new feature, or possibly contracting for its addition,
considerable momentum and waste of time can be overcome if you simply arrange a
visit with us. And, of course, you
always have the opportunity to satisfy a special or unique need in the TNT
products using TNT scripts (SML)
or our TNTsdk.
Geologic
Mapping Station.
Periodically
this section brings to your attention hardware configurations of particular
interest to you as a geospatial analyst, such as good portables, good US$3000
workstations, and so on. This time
it discusses a high-end Apple system designed for a specific purpose that is
being used with available geodata and the latest RV7.0
32-bit and 64-bit builds of TNTmips.
This specific purpose is only one example of the many large project uses
for such a workstation.
Apple
Based High Resolution Workstation.
Apple
has available large, high resolution flat panel monitors in 20" (1680 by
1050 pixels), 23" (1920 by 1200 pixels), and 30" (2560 by 1600 pixels)
sizes. A MicroImages client site
has recently explained their configuration and use of TNTmips
systems on Mac OS X based workstations using these Apple monitors.
Their stations are based on Apple Power Macs with dual 2.5 GHz G5
processors (US$3000), a 30" monitor (US$3000), and a 23" monitor
(US$1800). The 30" monitor
requires an additional NVIDIA GeForce 6800 GT or Ultra DDL display card (US$600)
to support its extra high frequency refresh rates. Total
cost of this Apple workstation is US$8300 plus some additional US$ for more
memory. The top of the line Power
Mac has 8 memory slots for 8 GB and Apple promises very soon (V10.4 = Tiger?) to
let a single TNTmips process use
more than 4 GB. The TNTmips
Mac OS X system for this workstation would cost $5000 to $7500 depending on its
location and the need for the large format printing option.
Application.
The
application of these workstations is to compile geologic maps and other forms of
geologic information to guide the search for coal, oil, gas, and minerals in a
nation. The total cost of each
system is equal to a single day of field work for a professional geologist in
costly, remote, and/or potentially dangerous locales.
To reduce or eliminate field work time in hazardous areas, they are using
these workstations for their office preparation or the entire compilation task.
The results will be compiled and distributed at 1:100,000 scale in
printed and electronic form and then recompiled from this scale to a 1:250,000
series.
Geodata
Available.
Maps.
An
existing reconnaissance level geologic map of the nation was originally compiled
on 1:250,000 base maps and is available in a single vector object with
attributes.
More
than 1000 1:50,000-scale topographic maps are available in ~150 dpi scanned form
for the entire nation in JPEG format (*.jpg) and georeferenced with a world file
(*.jgw). The collars, or
marginalia, for these maps have been trimmed away.
RV7.0 can link to and display
these JPEG maps directly from this format. They can also be mosaicked directly
from this JPEG format and the result saved as a single JPEG2000 compressed
raster in one step for the whole nation under Mac OS X.
Elevation
Models
SRTM
30-meter elevation data is available for the nation.
RADAR-shadow holes in the SRTM data have been patched using elevation
data from other sources and some proprietary software.
Imagery.
Landsat.
Landsat
ortho imagery is available for the entire nation at 30 meters.
It has been extensively processed to bring up the geologic detail, such
as to remove as much vegetation as possible.
A proprietary process has been used to remove terrain induced radiance
effects using the DEM. For high
resolution viewing, the natural color and special image color enhancements, such
as ratioing, have been pan sharpened to about 15-meter resolution.
The
complete 15-meter natural color imagery for this site is in MrSID format (*.sid)
in 1 by 1 degree units. This same
kind of 30-meter Landsat image coverage of most of the world can be downloaded
from NASA in MrSID format (for details see the section below entitled Reference
Geodata). In either case, RV7.0
can link to and display multiple MrSID images directly from this format. These
images can also be mosaicked directly from the MrSID format and the result saved
as a single JPEG2000 compressed raster in one step for the whole nation under
Mac OS X.
High
Resolution.
Higher
resolution, 1-meter, pan sharpened imagery from IKONOS and QuickBird is
available for spot locations.
Other.
Gravimetric
and magnetic surveys are also available for some areas, as well as other
miscellaneous geodata of more detail for spot areas.
Working
at Map Scale on the 30" Monitor.
A
30" monitor is used for the 2D composite view of the georeferenced 1:50,000
color map quadrangle (white areas transparent) superimposed on the 15-meter
images of various types in the TNT
Spatial Data Editor. This is the base upon which the detailed map units are
interpreted and drawn.
Map
Views “To Scale.”
The
single 1:50,000 topographic map scanned at >150 dots per inch in color
yielded 5134 columns and 3707 lines and can be viewed at 1:50,000 on the
30" monitor. The
horizontal maximum fit of this on the 30" monitor is 5134 map cells / 2560
pixels or ~2.0 map cells or dots per pixel.
The vertical maximum fit of this on the 30" monitor is 3707 cells /
1600 pixels or ~2.3 map cells or dots per inch.
Thus, fitting the entire map on the screen would sample 2.5 map cells
into a screen pixel allowing for the vertical dimension and the marginalia of
the TNT view.
This translates to viewing the map at a resolution of about >150 dpi /
2.5 dots per cell or the equivalent of viewing the map at about a 75 to 100 dot
per inch scan resolution. When
resampled from the 2X pyramid layer formed in the link file for these JPEG
files, it produces a readable overlay of map features including the contours.
Alternatively,
this base map could be viewed on this 30" monitor at about 1:100,000 at the
full 150 dpi scan resolution. Then the 1X zoom icon would bring up a composite
view of Ľ of the area of the map in seconds to about 1:50,000 design scale
noted above.
Image
View “To Scale.”
Several
layers of Landsat images are added to this view before the transparent
topographic map is added (best enhancement for materials A, best enhancement for
materials B,… natural color, …). This
permits toggling them on and off and using the View-in-View types of tools.
These ~15 meter Landsat images require about 3300 pixels horizontally to
display at 1:50,000. So for the
30-inch monitor and a map scale of 1:50,000, you are viewing nearly the full
resolution of these Landsat images overlaid by a readable ~75 dpi map.
For a 2X zoom the imagery is zoomed ~2x and the map is displayed at
nearly its 150 dpi design scan resolution.
Any
Area “To Scale.”
The
30" monitor nicely fits the familiar map scales and boundaries as outlined.
However, you are not restricted to working map by map.
Working in this same range of scales you can just as easily get a 2D TNT
view of the images and map at the same scales where their 4 corners mosaic
together, but without first mosaicking them.
However a more direct approach would be to use the sketch tool in the
GeoToolbox to draw features across object boundaries in a 2D view and save them
as a CAD object. Later this CAD
object can be merged, refined with attributes, styles, and so on in TNTedit.
This
“sketch it first” is the classic approach to all visual image interpretation
(geology, forestry, …). First
concentrate on how the big picture fits together and capture the important
linear features in the easiest way possible by sketching them on mylar overlays,
which translates into sketching in a TNT
view in display. Then, as your
understanding of the site and its 3D structure matures, you edit and refine that
initial line work in the TNT Spatial
Data Editor as a CAD object or as converted to a vector object.
In this step you unify and encode the structure and finally identify it
(for example, add attributes and styles) within a schema and presentation
standards used by others in a printed and/or electronic form.
Referencing
3D and Control via the 23" monitor.
The
23" monitor is used for TNT
process control together with 3D views of the same or other combinations of
these image and map materials to act as a substitute for being on-the-ground.
This view is open, altered to various viewpoints, and used concurrently
with the mapping activities on the 2D map base in the Display, Spatial Data
Editor, or other TNT processes.
Various interrelationships between 2D and 3D views can be established,
such as concurrent layer control and a gadget that shows a trapezoidal outline
in the 2D view of the edges of the area in the perspective 3D to help understand
its orientation when the 3D viewpoint is changed.
The
3D view can also use other combinations of layers such as a Landsat natural
color image for realism or the enhanced false color images; color coded
elevation, shaded relief, contours, and topographic maps; a vector overlay of
the reconnaissance geologic map, lineaments, or the new interpretations; and so
on. As these 3D views are rotated
around, they help in visualizing how the surface structural features and their
manifestations indicate subsurface structures and trends.
These 3D views can then be used to 2D sketch in the detail between the
surface features seen only as edges in the 2D view.
DigitalGlobe and IKONOS images of higher resolution available for some
small areas are used to help identify the edge features that can be seen and
traced out for the total area being mapped.
They act as a substitute for some of the ground truth and also reduce the
cost of time in the field or improve its value.
Stereo.
The
new and improved stereo capabilities in RV7.0
and related hardware are discussed and illustrated in a later section.
These have not yet been factored into this geologic mapping project.
However, the use of mirror stereoscopes or the Sharp and SeeReal direct view 3D
monitors may be of use to improve the 3D understanding of the area being mapped.
Similarly, the value of manifolds for constructing and visualizing geologic
profiles in these 3D views is just becoming available to this project in this RV7.0
release.
Rendering
Speeds.
2D
Views.
TNTmips
is the fastest system available on the Mac OS X or a Windows-based platform for
handling composite views of multiple layers to scale.
Pyramiding rasters, fast JPEG2000 decompression, vector optimization, and
scale control are just some of the examples of how multiple objects of any size
are rapidly read to form a composite view.
However, if you want to delete or add a layer to the composite view, it
is all redrawn from these various sources.
At this time for DV7.1
MicroImages is experimenting with using separate real memory buffers of 32 bits
each (RGB and alpha) for each layer. This
would not change the time to create the original composite view, but might
significantly reduce the time needed to toggle layers on and off or add a new
layer. In this example application,
multiple Landsat layers are loaded at the outset as noted above.
If they could be rapidly toggled on to become the image exposed under the
transparent map layer, this would improve their geologic interpretation.
This might be possible using this new buffer per layer by simply rotating
their position in the display order.
3D
Views.
As
discussed below, making composite 3D views is now not only of high quality, but
in RV7.0 also has new features and
all previous features restored, for example, layer transparency.
Even reorientation of the viewpoint is faster in RV7.0,
for example 10 to 20 seconds. This
redisplay speed is important in this type of geological application and in other
plans for the TNT products.
Redisplaying a 3D view is already 2 to 4 times faster in DV7.1
and work in this area is being actively continued.
Windows
High End Workstation.
The
following dual display subsystems can be put in the Windows PC of your choice to
use for a similar application to that outlined above.
These high end Windows workstations are also currently being used by
other TNTmips clients for
applications where the highest quality image display is important.
Highest
Resolution Color Monitor.
ViewSonic
22" VP2290b (3840 by 2400 pixels called QUXGA-Wide) (US$6000)
www.viewsonic.com/support/desktopdisplays/lcddisplays/proseries/vp2290b/.
The
same monitor is also available from IIyama and IBM.
It is used in place of the 30" Apple monitor noted above for the 2D
image/map display. This monitor
uses 4 VDI video inputs to create the refresh rates needed for this resolution.
Therefore, it must be coupled with the Matrox Parhelia HR256 (US$2500)
quad out display board (see www.matrox.com/mga/products/p_hr256/home.cfm).
Best
3D Companion Monitor.
These
monitors are very similar in screen design and capability to the Apple 23"
monitor used for this purpose above.
HP
23" monitor HP f2304 (1920 by 1200 pixels) High-Definition LCD. (~US$2000).
Sony
23" monitor SDM-P234/B (1920 by 1200 pixels) (from Dell at US$1900).
The
Matrox Parhelia HR256 board used for the ViewSonic VP2290b uses a PCI bus slot. Thus,
one of these 23" monitors can be added via the display board in the
standard AGP slot of the PC, assuming it supports their higher resolution.
Other
Considerations.
If
you set out to assemble a Windows/PC based equivalent of the Apple station noted
above, please keep in mind the following features automatically available in the
Apple system. You will need a high
powered PC with a big power supply and plenty of cooling.
SATA serial drives are faster and best.
Your memory for each application is limited by Windows XP and a 32-bit
processor to 2 GB until a formal release of XP-64 is available for use with an
AMD F64 based processor or the future Intel equivalent.
DDR2 memory is used in the best PCs whereas only DDR memory is usable in
the Power Macs.
Starting
TNT products from a Portable Drive
If
you are using Mac OS X 10.x (presumably the latest release) you can use a
USB2.0, Firewire400, Firewire800, or cartridge hard drive or flash card as an
installation drive for your TNT
products making them physically portable across G4 and G5 based Macs.
This will permit you to move both TNTmips
software and your preferences along with the USB TNT
Software Authorization Key between your Apple portable, base system, classroom
units, and so on.
External
tri-interface drives supporting USB2.0, Firewire400, and Firewire800 are now
available and give the most portable drive flexibility. If the portable Firewire
drive is an 800 instead of a 400 (800 connectors are only on the PowerMacs at
this time), it will be just as fast as an internal drive.
On a USB2.0, Firewire400, or flash card, the startup and the loading of
processes may be about ˝ as fast or faster compared to the speed of an
installation on an internal drive. A
faster result than ˝ will depend upon the type of flash memory, USB2.0 support,
and so on.
A
1 GB USB2.0 thumb drive or memory stick could also be used to carry a TNT
product and geodata around in your pocket between Apple systems that are not
networked or can access a TNT
floating license but do not have the TNT
product locally installed. The
first thumb sized Firewire flash memory drives have now also appeared but are
Firewire400 and, thus, perform at about the same speed as the much more widely
available and cheaper USB2.0 drives.
The
above portability idea does not work quite as well for Windows-based systems.
Without a direct install to the internal hard drive of each computer, it
is unlikely that all the Windows libraries and many other factors will permit
this portability.
Serial
ATA drives.
Serial
interface SATA hard drives are now
only 10% more expensive than IDE interface drives and are approaching cost
parity with them. You should make
sure any new PC you buy uses these SATA drives, which are faster, more flexible
in use, and will soon be cheaper than IDE drives.
Further
Confusion over Wavelet Compression.
LizardTech
vs. ER Mapper.
After
an earlier apparent resolution by a Federal Judge of a LizardTech appeal, five
years of litigation has just been resumed between LizardTech and ER Mapper with
regard to their patent dispute over their proprietary wavelet compression
products. The dispute has focused
upon how limited memory is managed when compressing large rasters.
When insufficient memory is available to hold the wavelet coefficients
for the entire input raster because it is very large, the source image can be
broken down and compressed in tiles. If
a large, lossy compression ratio is targeted and each tile is compressed
separately, the slight differences in the lossy result can occur at the edges
between these tiles and may be visible.
An
approach to the application of consistent wavelet compression to match the edges
of a series of tiles is particularly significant when mosaicking many large
pieces into an even larger mosaic. For
example, you might wish to mosaic hundreds of uncompressed or compressed
orthoimages into a compressed province or national level image.
The management of these edge effects determines whether or not a large,
uncompressed mosaic must be temporarily created on a hard drive before it can
then be lossy compressed to 10 to 1 or 20 to 1 or more and if the large,
temporary uncompressed intermediate image can indeed be compressed.
How
to unify or mitigate this edge effect in the compression procedure is the
subject of this legal dispute. More
information on this topic and the current position taken by www.lizardtech.com/press/news.php?item=11-01-2004a,
and www.ermapper.com/company/news_view...
(...link obsolete...).
Please note that LizardTech is now wholly owned by Celartem Technology
USA, Inc., which is part of Celartem Technology, Inc. in Japan
File
formats can not be patented but the software used to create them may use
patented or copyrighted techniques. This
is the basis for legal disputes when the software used to create the wavelet
compressed file is deemed to be proprietary and using it is under control of a
license. LizardTech and ER Mapper
create their own compression and decompression files in this manner that have no
relationship to JP2 files and require a license from their patent holder to use
the software they provide to perform the compression.
Thus, in these legal disputes, it becomes a matter of deciding if a
patented technology has been used without a license to create their proprietary
compressed formats in a competitor’s product.
An
internal TNT raster object is
compressed into and out of JPEG2000 using the Kakadu library and not by
proprietary wavelet code or methods created by MicroImages.
You can use these raster objects without a license in the TNTserver,
the FREE TNTsim3D, and FREE TNTatlas
or as external JP2 files in any manner you choose.
However, you do need a TNTmips,
TNTedit, or TNTserver
to create JPEG2000 compressed raster objects or JP2 files.
Proprietary
Approaches Versus JPEG2000.
Since
the release of RV6.9 of the TNT
products in early 2004, both LizardTech and ER Mapper have announced the
addition to their products of support for the creation and reading of JPEG2000
compressed Part 1 compliant JP2 files. Their
support of these JP2 files is being added in parallel to their disputed
proprietary wavelet compressed file formats.
The question of how their support of this standard JPEG2000 JP2 file fits
in with their proprietary file’s performance, legal claims, and marketability
is best addressed to them.
LizardTech
is using the Kakadu library for this purpose.
This is the same library MicroImages selected for the first JPEG2000
features introduced in V6.7 2.5
years ago and continues to use. ER
Mapper’s approach to supporting JPEG2000 compression is unknown. The latest
version of the Kakadu libraries supports a form of tiling during compression for
memory management for very large images. RV7.0
of the TNT products does not utilize
this potentially contested procedure. Using
the amount of real memory common on your desktop computers (0.5 up to 2
gigabytes), large images up to 250 gigabytes can be JPEG2000 compressed without
this tiling in the TNT products.
The MEMO entitled Release of the RV6.9 Products and dated 31
December 2003
discusses this JPEG2000 compression of large raster objects in detail in the
section entitled JPEG2000 Compression.
This earlier MEMO can be reviewed in HTML or Microsoft Word formats at www.microimages.com/relnotes/v69/rel69.doc, and
www.microimages.
com/relnotes/v69/rel69.htm
respectively. How MicroImages will
handle JPEG2000 compression of even larger images is being investigated. An
example of the need for this would be the assembly and compression of the
15-meter NASA Landsat imagery of entire continents for public distribution as a
single compressed image.
LuraTech
located in Germany
was
heavily involved in the development of the JPEG2000 standard and has a licensed
proprietary wavelet-based compression product called Lurawave Smart Compress,
which creates files in the LuraTech Wavelet Format (*.lwf).
This proprietary format and compression library has been popular in
Europe
and
also now licenses a toolkit for JPEG2000 software development. In
the following published paper Carsten Heiermann, President of LuraTech in
Germany
concludes the following regarding the future of LuraTech’s proprietary
compression.
“To
close, I asked Heiermann to look ahead five years.
Would the company still be offering its proprietary solution?
He suggests that by then, there will be no new business in that area.
Even now, he notes, the company is not actively selling its proprietary
solution. Existing customers are
moving to JPEG solutions, sometimes running both concurrently as they make the
transition. New customers
invariably purchase the open standards-based solution over the proprietary
one.”
Quoted
from Image Compression Embraces Open Standards: A Conversation with Carsten
Heiermann of LuraTech, by Andena Schutzberg, EOM magazine, November 2004, pp
24-26.
Generic
Requirements of JPEG2000.
The
JPEG2000 specifications dictate how a JP2 file must be structured, but not how
this is most efficiently accomplished. The
Kakadu library is one procedure for wavelet compression of rasters into a
standard JP2 file. There are other
libraries and possibly other patented approaches used for this same purpose.
Since a file format is not patentable, patent disputes over wavelet compression
primarily focus upon the procedures and efficiencies employed in assembling and
compressing JP2 files.
MicroImages
and now LizardTech use the Kakadu library to create and read JPEG2000 compressed
rasters. Part 1 of the JPEG2000
specifications defines the features that can be incorporated into a stand alone
JP2 file. The Kakadu library
insures that the JP2 file created in or exported from these and the TNT
products meets the Part 1 compliance standard. It
is important to understand that a product can not claim to support the creation
and/or reading of a Part 1 standard JP2 file unless it can be decompressed and
used by other JPEG2000 Part 1 compliant products.
Variations are permitted by Part 1 depending upon the type and size of
raster material used. Even with
this variability the JP2 file created using this permitted variability must
still be useable in other products. However,
this does not guarantee how efficiently a Part 1 compliant program can read a
specific JP2 file. For example, the
pyramid structure inherent in a Part 1 JP2 file may be ignored by the reading
program making zoomed-out viewing quite slow because it is sampling.
Size
Limitations of JP2 Files in Other Products.
For
faster operation many low-cost commercial products that do not use pyramiding
are designed to work with full sized, uncompressed images stored directly in
real memory and go really slow if virtual memory has to be substituted when the
file size is large. As a result, if
these programs support using a JP2 image, they automatically decompress the full
resolution image into real memory and then into virtual memory as needed.
The pyramid structure automatically built into JP2 rasters is simply
ignored. If the raster is small,
this is not a problem. However,
this places limitations on how big a JP2 raster used in these products can be or
how long it will take to decompress and load it.
Some simply will not load a JP2 image over a few megabytes uncompressed
or automatically revert to virtual memory which, from a performance viewpoint,
is extremely slow and more or less equivalent to not working. Examples
of products with these size limitations on using JP2 images would be Photoshop,
QuickTime, and all known browser plug-ins.
LizardTech
MrSID Compression to Be Supported in DV7.1.
As
you will learn elsewhere in this MEMO, RV7.0
of the TNT products can now import
or link to and directly use MrSID formatted files on all platforms including Mac
OS X. Recently LizardTech and
MicroImages have come to an agreement whereby the RV7.1
of TNT products will be able to
export raster geodata into the MrSID format for use in the TNT
products such as your FREE TNTatlases
or in other software that can use MrSID files.
These MrSID files will be created with the accompanying georeference
information in a companion world file (*.sdw) and/or embedded in the MrSID
metadata.
The
integration of the LizardTech compression engine will be available in the early DV7.1
releases of TNTmips and TNTedit.
There will be no extra charge by MicroImages for providing you access to this
proprietary compression procedure beyond the charge to upgrade to RV7.1.
It is planned that it will be available for all TNT
supported operating systems including Windows, Mac OS X, Linux, and Sun.
It may be likely that this may be the first product to create MrSID
compressed files using the Mac OS X operating system.
Charges
for MrSID Compression.
As
you may already know, LizardTech’s stand alone GeoExpress mosaicking and
compressor product and any other product, such as TNTmips,
that provides compression into a MrSID
format, requires that you pay a per byte charge to LizardTech.
Since LizardTech does not charge anyone for decompressing and using
compressed MrSID files, this is their mechanism for charging end users for using
their proprietary compression engine. This
use fee is metered by a software data cartridge that you buy from LizardTech or
one of its dealers. You purchase it with an amount of compression encoded into
it. You then install it and every
compression into a MrSID file by your TNT
product reduces the capacity of the meter in your MrSID data cartridge until it
reaches zero or until you purchase and add additional capacity.
GeoExpress
permits a MrSID file to be read and recompressed into a new MrSID file without
charging their data cartridge. For
example, you can convert a lossless MrSID file into a more compressed lossy
MrSID file without any charge. In
contrast, as part of MicroImages’ agreement with LizardTech, if you choose
MrSID files for input to a TNT
process, such as mosaic, and designate MrSID as the output format, the data
cartridge will be charged for its compression according to the decompressed size
of the input objects you have selected.
Data
cartridge metering is based on the uncompressed input bytes you send into the
compression engine from the uncompressed equivalent of the TNT
source raster object and not on the size of the compressed raster object or
MrSID file. Please keep in mind
that a data cartridge is metering bytes and not raster cells, thus a 24-bit
color composite image will use 3 times as many bytes as its pixel count.
Additional information about the operation of their data cartridge can be
found at www.lizardtech.com/products/ geo/faq.php or can be addressed directly
to LizardTech. LizardTech does not
directly publish the prices of GeoExpress or data cartridges, however you can
get an idea of their prices from those charged to U.S. Government agencies from
the General Services Agency (GSA) price schedule at
saic-gsa.com/products/... (...link obsolete...).
| Note:
You will need to buy and install a LizardTech data cartridge to export TNT
raster objects into MrSID compressed files. |
Charges
for ECW Compression.
ER
Mapper’s approach to compression into their wavelet based proprietary
compression engine has exactly the opposite cost strategy.
A license for using this compression engine can be obtained
free-of-charge for the use of this engine in other products.
This free license limits the compression to the input of single
uncompressed rasters of 500 MB or less. It
is under this license that TNTmips
and TNTedit can export and compress
raster objects into the ECW format (*.ecw) within this size limitation.
To
compress rasters of greater than 500 MB uncompressed, a software developer must
pay a large, upfront, one-time charge and large annual charge.
Both of these licensing charges can be found at www.ermapper.com/pricing.aspx.
Once their compression engine has been added to another software
developer’s product, its end user can create ECW compressed files from
uncompressed rasters greater than 500 MB without paying any per byte fee.
| Note:
You can export TNT raster objects
that when uncompressed are less than 500 MB to ECW compressed files without an
additional charge. You can not
export a raster object that is greater than 500 MB when uncompressed.
|
Orthorectifying
OrbView-3 Images.
OrbView-3
1-meter panchromatic and 4-meter multispectral imagery can now be ordered with
Rational Polynomial Coefficients and orthorectified when a DEM is available
using TNTmips.
More information about obtaining their imagery in this form can be found
on their web site at www.orbimage.com. There
is no indication as yet that SPOT images can be ordered with Rational Polynomial
Coefficients.
Landsat
Global 15-Meter Color.
NASA’s
Goddard Space Flight Center sponsored the Earth Satellite Corporation to
assemble and mosaic global Landsat coverage of the earth in enhanced natural
color for circa 1972, 1990, and 2000. This
NASA project was managed at NASA/GSFC by Dr. Compton J. Tucker* and its assembly
and content are reported on in considerable detail in the article entitled NASA’s
Global Orthorectified Landsat Data Set, by Compton J. Tucker, Denelle M.
Grant, and Jon D. Dukstra, March 2004, Vol. 70, No. 3, Photogrammetric
Engineering & Remote Sensing, pp. 313-322.
[*footnote, Dr. Compton J. Tucker completed his Masters in Forestry
(1973) and Ph.D. in Forestry (1975) specializing in remote sensing under the
guidance of Dr. Lee D. MIller, President of MicroImages while both were at
Colorado State University. The long
time and continuing goals of MicroImages products in handling massive geodata
sets on a personal computer are set forth in other sections of this MEMO.
One might assume from these historically related activities of these
individuals that what was a common academic concept has become a lifetime
scientific challenge.]
Now
most of these image segments are available in latitude/longitude bounded blocks
for download in compressed MrSID files (*.sid) with companion world files (*.sdw)
from https://zulu.ssc.nasa.gov/mrsid/. The
circa 1990 imagery assembled from 7600 Landsat scenes is 28.5 meters in
resolution and covers most of the area of the continents except the Arctic
and
Antarctic. The circa 2000 imagery
assembled from 8500 Landsat scenes is 14.25 meters in resolution and also does
not cover the Arctic
and
Antarctic continents.
These
Landsat blocks for the 2000 epoch can be downloaded without charge.
In RV7.0 these blocks can be
mosaicked directly from the MrSID format into JPEG2000 compressed raster objects
or JP2 files. This imagery and procedure was used to prepare the single Landsat
image of all of Afghanistan
included on the enclosed TNTatlas of Afghanistan CD and compressed from 1.62 GB
to 164 MB in a single raster object (10:1).
These
larger mosaicked units trimmed to your area of interest and using JPEG2000
compression provide an unparalleled image map base for direct interpretation in
regional projects, such as described above in the section on Hardware.
They also provide an excellent base for your TNTatlas
and for reference in detailed projects when overlaid by the worldwide map vector
layers provided on the Global Reference Geodata DVD with your RV6.9
shipment.
SRTM
90-Meter.
The
most practical earth-oriented result of the Shuttle program was the Shuttle
Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) in 2000. Most
of this source material has now been processed into 30- and 90-meter elevation
data sets. All the 90 meter
resolution for North America
and South America
is available free from the USGS site
at http://seamless.usgs.gov/website/seamless/products/srtm3arc.asp.
Access to the 30-meter resolution is limited to the United States
and potentially to government agencies
in other nations. This SRTM data
has its holes patched using a surface fitting method.
The files can easily be mosaicked into larger elevation rasters, clipped
to the rectangular area of interest, and compressed lossy or lossless with
JPEG2000 into a raster object. This
is how the single JPEG2000 lossless elevation raster object of all of Afghanistan
was prepared for use on the enclosed
CD entitled TNTatlas of Afghanistan. These
elevation maps can be used with the circa 2000 Landsat images noted above to
create 3D views and TNTsim3D
simulations of almost any area of the world.
The
raw elevation data for all the areas covered by the mission is now available
from ftp://e0dps01u.ecs.nasa.gov/srtm but still has holes in it. MicroImages is
now receiving questions on how to patch the various holes or null areas in these
SRTM elevation rasters. These null
areas are due to a number of factors ranging from signal noise (1 or 2 cells),
water bodies with no RADAR return (usually a few more cells), topography induced
RADAR shadows (usually mountains and, therefore, many cells), and ground
coverage gaps. Since this hole
filling would be done once, or infrequently as new substitute data was developed
for these holes, it is an appropriate task for an SML
script. Such a script would be used
to improve the hole filling in the JPL processed results if better substitute
elevation data for these holes is available locally or developed with TNTmips.
Properly
patching holes in these SRTM derived elevation rasters requires that you supply
locally derived elevation data that can be smoothly inserted into these holes.
This missing elevation data might be derived by resampling the GTOPO30
global elevation raster on the Global
Reference Geodata DVD
for a coarse elevation patch. For
better results a substitute elevation raster could be created for the larger
hole areas using TNTmips.
For example, you could digitize the contours from scans of 1:50,000
topographic maps and then convert them to the needed elevation rasters.
Since this is a common problem, MicroImages has decided that it will
create an SML script to patch
substitute elevation data into these null areas.
Any good ideas you read about or have on this topic should be brought to
MicroImages’ attention now.
Nebraska 1-Meter.
This
data set is not global and is of more interest locally.
However, it is introduced here because it is illustrative of what can now
be accomplished for your nation, province, or region at reasonable project cost
using the new all digital cameras and orthophoto map production systems
available for purchase or lease.
Nebraska
was the first state (and the only state in 2003) covered by 1-meter color
orthophotos acquired by an airborne digital camera system for the purpose
of agricultural management and land conservation under the auspices of the
USDA’s Farm Service Agency. Using
other analog film based systems, 1- or 2-meter DOQQs were prepared for 1/10 of
the United States land area in 2003.
In 2004 approximately 1/3 of the United States
land area was covered by 1- or 2-meter
DOQQs acquired by a mix of digital and analog cameras (670 counties).
Additional details about this USDA image acquisition program, its sample
cost per DOQQ, and the availability of all of these DOQQs to the public via the
Internet can be reviewed in the article Imagery to Support USDA Agricultural
Programs: The National Agricultural Imagery, by Kent Williams, Earth
Observation Magazine (EOM), December 2004, Volume 13, Issue 18, pages 10 to 12.
The text of this article without the reference maps can be read at
www.eomonline.com/Common/ Archives/2004Dec/04dec_AgriculturalImagery.html.
According to this article these national coverage DOQQs will be available
in early 2005 from http://datagateway.nrcs. usda.gov/ or www.apfo.usda.gov.
The
digital imagery used for the 2003 Nebraska DOQQs was collected in a few summer
days and processed into excellent, almost completely cloud free, orthoimages in
a couple of months. The source
images were collected in wide north/south swaths across the state and processed
into Digital Ortho Quarter Quadrangle units of 3.75 by 3.75 arc minute areas for
distribution and use. The DOQQs
match all across the state in color and mosaic accurately at the edges since the
were clipped originally from larger orthophoto mosaics.
These DOQQs can be downloaded free in JPEG format from the State of
Nebraska ’s Department of Natural Resources’
website at www.dnr.state.ne.us/
databank/fsa03.html.
These
Nebraska DOQQs are posted for downloading in 2 different projections each of
just over 6000 files in JPEG (*.jpg) format with 6000 companion world (*.jgw)
files. One set has the JPEG DOQQs
in the correct UTM zone projection (3 different zones cover Nebraska
) and the other duplicate DOQQ set is
in the single Nebraska State Plane Coordinate projection.
You
can download an index map and several of these Nebraska DOQQ files to review and
to demonstrate the quality of the color orthophotos, which can now be acquired
by digital means for your province, nation, or project area.
Start out by mosaicking several DOQQs directly from their downloaded JPEG
file format into a JPEG2000 compressed internal object in TNTmips
7.0. Note that these good
quality color DOQQs do not require any color balancing for general viewing or
any contrast matching when mosaicked. Next
use this sample JPEG2000 compressed mosaic for directly interpreting detailed
surface cover, local infrastructure, or other geometric features of interest
using your TNT Spatial Data Editor
or the sketch tool in the TNT
GeoToolbox. Since the original DOQQs were georeferenced with the companion world
file, your mosaic and its interpretation into a topological vector, shape, CAD,
and/or geodatabase object will be also georeferenced in the target Coordinate
Reference System (projection and datum you choose in the mosaic or
interpretation steps).
Preparing
a small sample geodata set in this fashion with these Nebraska DOQQs, perhaps
with geometric interpretations in vector, shape, and CAD object types, will
provide you the demonstration material you need to show what you can do with TNTmips.
It also demonstrates what could be accomplished if an airborne data
collection effort of this type was cost shared between agencies or institutions
for your area.
Nebraska
is covered with 10-meter elevation
rasters prepared in cooperation with the USGS.
These DEMs can be downloaded from the Nebraska Department of Natural
Resources at www.dnr.state.ne.us/databank/dem.html.
Combining these DEMs with the 1-meter color DOQQs or your mosaic and your
geometric interpretations will create quality, high resolution TNT
3D views and simulations of the farms and ranches and other features that make
up almost all the land area and land use of Nebraska. These companion 3D views can also be
used with the 2D views in the Spatial Data Editor and sketch tool to illustrate
how they assist in the direct interpretation step to locate and identify the
desired geometric features. You can
then extrapolate from these Nebraska
results to how these geodata
acquisition and analysis procedures can be applied to mapping and monitoring the
smaller agricultural, timber, and natural areas and village infrastructure in
your nation.
Using
a Floating License as a Fixed License.
The
Software License Key that supports floating licenses can also be used for a
single-user fixed license on one computer.
This single-user support is provided as a convenience for situations,
such as when a Software License Key is needed for a notebook computer in a
remote, non-networked location. The key does not support simultaneous
single-user and floating licenses. So, if you want to use a TNT
product on the computer that is serving as the floating license manager, you
must check out one of the floating licenses.
| IMPORTANT:
If the Software License Key is used for a single-user fixed license on
the computer that is serving as a license manager or removed, the license
manager immediately shuts down all floating instances of the license. |
Updated
Tutorial.
The
tutorial containing the instructions for setting up a TNT
floating license is expanded to 20 pages and is current with the installation
and operation and use of RV7.0.
This tutorial is installed as one of your many TNT
product tutorials, can be accessed directly from your TNT
product CD, or downloaded from www.microimages.com/getstart/
pdf_new/enterpri.pdf
RV7.0
of the TNT products no longer
supports W95. Maintaining backward
compatibility of the TNT products
with this 10 year old operating system places restrictions on the capability of
the TNT products when they are being
used with modern versions of Windows. Please
anticipate that RV7.1 or perhaps RV7.2
of the TNT products may no longer
support W98, WME, and NT for similar reasons.
However, this will not occur before Microsoft ceases support for these
Windows operating systems.
Version
Tracker.
Version
Tracker at www.versiontracker.com is a very popular means of staying current
with the development and release activities for Mac OS X software products.
For example, you can get automatic email notification that a specified
product has been updated. It also provides access to similar information about
Windows product releases, but is not as popular with this community since there
are many competing sites. Since May
2004, information about the availability of the current release and the
development version of the TNTlite
and TNTmips products for Mac OS X
and Windows has been maintained on Version Tracker.
This information has also been updated weekly to announce and provide
access to the new features added via the weekly patches to the development
version. As a result, there have
been 7000 individual downloads of TNTlite
and TNTmips for Mac OS X, or about
1000 downloads per month started from this site.
A multipart download is counted only once, but incomplete downloads are
not counted.
Mac
OS X 10.2.x Dropped.
| MicroImages
has discontinued support of the TNT
products for all versions of Mac OS X 10.2 and earlier
versions of the Apple operating system. |
Upgrading
any Mac computer using the G3, G4, or G5 processor to Mac OS 10.3.x is not
expensive and provides the reliable Apple-supported X11 environment required by
the TNT products.
These processors are also required to provide sufficient power to operate
the TNT products effectively.
Mac
OS X 10.3.X (Panther).
The
TNT products now operate as either
32-bit or 64-bit applications under Mac OS X 10.3.7.
If you are using an earlier version of Panther, please install your free
upgrade to V10.3.7 before using your TNT
product.
Mac
OS X with Windows Remote Desktop.
MicroImages’
writing and testing staff use the 64-bit version of Mac OS X 10.3.7 and now use
G5-based Macs for their primary daily routine operation, testing, and
documentation of the TNT products.
They report that connection to their secondary Windows XP machines from
their Macs using Windows Remote Desktop works for
controlling various activities on the Windows machine.
This approach ties the 2 or more workstations together (Mac to Windows or
Windows to Windows) but requires only a mouse, keyboard, and 2 good monitors at
the primary workstation. This is an
effective means of moving your primary activity to a Mac (or new computer)
without losing access to the software functionality and special peripherals you
have built up on your existing computer. Furthermore,
since the TNT products are
cross-platform transparent, they do not care if you mix your Project Files
between these operating systems and their drives and other peripherals.
Mac
OS X 10.4 (Tiger).
PV6.9
of the TNT products will not
operate with Mac OS X 10.4 and will not be patched for this purpose.
If Apple officially releases Mac OS X 10.4 before the official release of
RV7.1 of the TNT
products, then an RV7.0 of the TNT
products will be released for Mac OS X 10.4.
If the reverse is true and MicroImages releases RV7.1
of the TNT products before Apple
officially releases Mac OS X 10.4, then you will have to have RV7.1
of the TNT products to operate with
Mac OS X 10.4.
Ensuring
the Correct TNT Versions.
Mac
OS X 10.3.7 and 10.4 require a G5 processor to operate in 64-bit mode and to use
the 64-bit version of the TNT
products. Occasionally
support questions have been received that are traced back to attempts to run the
64-bit version of TNTlite on a G3-
or G4-based Mac using V10.3.x. Both
PV6.9 and RV7.0
of the TNT products now produce
appropriate diagnostic messages if the version downloaded does not match the
capabilities of the processor and Mac OS X.
Motif
Required a Royalty.
Since
its first creation years ago, MicroImages’ TNT
products for Windows and the Mac have used the Motif graphical user interface
libraries. Even though
MicroImages purchased a license to use Motif in our TNT
products, a royalty fee had to be paid to the Open Group for every copy of their
Motif libraries compiled and distributed with our TNTsdk
for Windows and Mac OS X. Furthermore
this group charges totally unrealistic fees for each upgrade of their libraries.
On the other hand, when you use a Unix, or a Linux operating system, you
can simply use the Motif libraries automatically provided with their X server
since they pay the royalty.
MicroImages
has always wished to provide you free access to TNTsdk
for Windows to develop and add new compiled processes as this is in our interest
as well as yours. MicroImages has
had the option to pay this per copy royalty and absorb it as part of the price
of your TNT product.
However, this was contrary to the approach used in the TNTlite
versions of the TNT products since
The Open Group, among the other problems with their license agreement, made no
provision for the free distribution of their libraries.
This left no option but to control the distribution of the TNTsdk.
Using
LessTif is Free.
RV7.0
of the TNT products for Windows has
been modified to use a free open source equivalent of Motif called LessTif.
To quote from www.lesstif.org
This
change is totally transparent to you since LessTif is equivalent, function by
function, to Motif. However, this
change means that the large TNT
software development kit (TNTsdk)
library used to build all the TNT
products is now available for use, free of charge, by any MicroImages clients,
including those using the free TNTlite
versions of these products. However,
please remember that programs developed with the TNTsdk
will check the TNT product’s
Software Authorization Key unless the geodata objects and their analysis are
found to conform to the size limitations imposed on the FREE TNTlite
versions.
Reference
Booklet.
A
reference booklet entitled Using the TNTsdk is enclosed in printed form
with your TNTmips 7.0
kit. It is also installed in PDF
format as part of your online tutorials. It
explains how to set up and get started using your TNTsdk.
It is not a programmer’s reference manual!
Consult any current C++ reference manual for help in this area.
Unless you are an experienced programmer, you will find it easier to
solve your unique geospatial problems using MicroImages’ geospatial scripting
language (SML).
Compiler.
Effective
with this release of RV7.0 of the TNT
products you will need to set up and use Microsoft’s C++ compiler in Visual
Studio .NET 2003 - Professional Version for building programs using the FREE TNTsdk
for Windows.
Sample
Programs.
Sample
programs coded using the TNTsdk
libraries can be downloaded from www.microimages.com/products/tntsdksamples/.
These samples provide models on the folowing topics:
•
cadtovec.c
convert a CAD object to a vector object
•
mklayer.c
sample
for Mdisp layer creation from a
“fixed” file and object
•
objview.c
demonstrate
use of object display functions. This
program allows the user to view one or more spatial data layers.
•
rastinfo.c very
simple application allowing user to
select a raster and display basic information about it
•
smlapp.c an
older method for extending SML
functions with SDK
•
smlplug.c
a
better method for extending SML
functions by creating plugin modules to be called from SML
scripts
•
stdattr.c computes "standard attributes"
for CAD/TIN/Vector objects
Weekly
Upgrades.
MicroImages
is modifying daily the libraries that are used to build the TNT
products and, thus, the TNTsdk.
Functions and classes are constantly being added, adjusted, and
corrected. To help you keep up with
these changes, just as with those in the TNT
products, a new TNTsdk is posted
weekly for your access at www.microimages.com/product/tntsdk.htm.
Documentation.
The
documentation of all components of the TNTsdk
is maintained and updated as HTML text on MicroImages’ Internet website.
A Google search of MicroImages’ website such as TNTsdk
site:microimages.com will produce over 24,000 entries since all this
documentation for all functions, classes, and methods are indexed by Google.
However, a more specific Google search of TNTsdk RVC nullmask class
site:microimages.com yields 154 specific references on this subject in this
documentation. Using Google for
this access will, of course, be a couple of weeks delayed or out of phase with
the most recent weekly posting of these TNTsdk
libraries as part of the latest download kit.
This is the time it takes Google to periodically “crawl”
microimages.com and index the changes.
However, this Internet access can be useful since it is available anytime
and anyplace via Google’s powerful search engine.
For the documentation that is concurrent with each weekly upgrade, use
the search feature installed with the latest TNTsdk
libraries.
Support.
MicroImages
software engineers will provide limited support by email to assist you in
perfecting your TNTsdk based
programs. However, you should be
knowledgeable and experienced with building C++ programs before contacting us.
If you are planning a large project with the TNTsdk,
MicroImages encourages you to spend 1 or 2 weeks designing and implementing a
skeletal approach to your project or product at our offices.
This has proved quite useful to others using the TNTsdk
to develop other products. For a
reasonable fee, you will be provided an office and computer equipment and direct
consulting access to those who create and maintain the TNTsdk
and the TNT products we derived from
it.
Building
Massive Geospatial Simulations.
Previous
versions of the Landscape Builder in TNTmips
permitted you to apply JPEG2000 compression for textures that were stored as
external linked *.JP2 files. Now
the Landscape Builder process permits you to create textures with JPEG2000
compression as internal raster objects within the Landscape File.
This is illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled JPEG2000
Compression in TNTsim3D.
Landscape
simulations are usually designed to move around in real time and, thus, a very
minor degradation in texture (image/raster) quality is never noticed by the
user. JPEG2000 compression,
as contrasted to JPEG compression, is very effective at masking or hiding image
degradation at a 10 to 1 or 20 to 1 lossy compression ratio.
Even higher JPEG2000 compression ratios may be acceptable because only
intricate spatial details are lost and these losses may not be important in a
moving simulation. Using lossy
JPEG2000 compression for the texture and standard lossless compression for the
terrain means that TNTsim3D and very
large landscape areas can be distributed on a single DVD.
The
color plate noted above contains a table to illustrate how large a TNT
landscape model can be when distributed on a single DVD.
The table presents the area covered by a landscape model that uses color
image mosaics of varying ground resolution from various sources.
Each image is a texture in a single raster object compressed 15 to 1
using JPEG2000. For example, using
a 1-meter, 24-bit color image for a texture permits a maximum TNT
landscape area of 17,000 square kilometers to be distributed on a DVD, even more
if 16-bit color were used. This is
the size of a small province or state ( Massachusetts
=
21,386 square kilometers) or a very large county (Cherry County, NE =
15,438 square kilometers). Combining
JPEG2000 compression with other larger mobile media such as a cartridge hard
drive, USB2 or Firewire hard drive, or the ~8 times larger DVD replacements (Blu-ray
or HD-DVD of 25+ GB) will permit much larger landscape simulations to be
distributed.
If
high spatial detail is needed for any specific selected ground area in the FREE TNTsim3D
you can package the Landscape File with (or as) an atlas and from TNTsim3D
automatically open a 2D view of the same area in the FREE TNTatlas
product. Another alternative would
be to use a TNT geospatial script (SML)
in TNTsim3D to automatically launch
your browser with a TNTclient plugin
or a stand-alone TNTclient with the
selected point’s coordinates. This
could retrieve a lossless, high-resolution, multilayered view from a TNTserver
for that geographic position via the Internet or a private network.
The atlas used by the TNTserver
could contain all the geodata coverage for an entire province or nation.
This strategy would also be useful where the full resolution lossless
image and map geodata are restricted or proprietary.
TNTserver would provide
several ways to control this access such as:
-
restrict area viewable at full resolution (to the current view’s
area/resolution),
-
control access (by passwords and/or payment),
-
add additional layers (confidential or proprietary),
-
dynamically change layers (track moving features), and
-
prevent copying of the base geodata (restricted to capturing only current view).
TNTsim3D
can function in effect as a FREE 3D extension of your TNTserver
and client. It provides rapid 3D
simulation of the area covered by the server’s detailed atlas and provides a
natural access to the locations it covers (autostart from DVD, fly if mouse is
moved, point to an area, click, and get 2D details).
Panoramic
Backgrounds.
Skies
Add Increased Realism.
Adding
cloudy skies, sunsets, atmospheric conditions, and other backgrounds can
markedly increase the realism of your simulation.
TNTsim3D 7.0 can now project
these kinds of texture backgrounds onto the inside of a sphere or dome
encompassing your simulated landscape. This
provides a realistic, seamless, hemispherical sky dome or other background for
your simulation. Some of
these sky effects are illustrated in the snapshots of the TNTsim3D
views in the accompanying color plate entitled Sky Domes in TNTsim3D.
The
skies provided with TNTsim3D are
texture rasters projected inside a hemisphere encompassing your 3D surface.
Each of these images was derived from a single real hemispherical sky
photo or graphically modified equivalent. This
image was then unwrapped using an equirectangular projection into a panoramic
raster object whose columns represent the horizontal angle (0 to 360 degrees)
and whose lines represent a vertical angle of 90 degrees. TNTsim3D
projects the selected panoramic raster object in real time onto the inside of
the dome using the inverse of the equirectangular projection.
This procedure creates the appropriate sky background segment for every
view you have open in every direction including the new Custom View (with the
exception of the Map View).
Standard
Skies.
A
library of 16 prepared cloudy and sunset sky textures are now available with TNTmips
7.0 as JPEG2000-compressed raster objects in a reference file.
All of these sky textures are automatically available for use in TNTsim3D
and can be selected for viewing at any time with any of your Landscape Files.
These sky images are all illustrated in the accompanying color plate
entitled Sky Domes Provided With TNTsim3D.
Seven of these skies are real images photographed with a hemispherical
camera and were taken and placed in the public domain by Philippe Hurbain via
www.philohome.com. The remaining 9
virtual skies were artificially created by Johannes Schlörb and purchased,
downloaded, and modified for distribution from www.schloerb.com/Dreamscape2. You
can purchase and add your own skies to your Landscape files from this source.
Custom
Skies.
You
can create and add your own skies to your Landscape Files using your digital
camera. This might be considered if
you want your sky dome to contain local distant features on the horizon and
other special effects. This general
approach starts with a series of overlapping standard photos or graphics
covering the sky hemisphere, which can then be mosaicked and reprojected into a
panoramic raster in the equirectangular projection as described above.
A source of information for collecting these photos with your digital
camera and low-cost software for assembling them into a panoramic view is
www.panoguide.com.
You
might also copy one or more of the standard skies from the reference file and
edit it to have your local horizon features around the bottom edge. For example,
you could use raster editing to add distant representations of your mountains
and tree masses that match the colors and nature of the content of the surface
textures in your simulation. As
discussed below in more detail, you can then set a large radius for the sky dome
so that the center is below the average terrain (try 90%) to pull the dome and
these features down around the edge of your simulation.
This can create a distant skyline inside your dome and mitigate the
“looking over the edge-of-the-world” effect as you near the edge of your
landscape in the simulation. Using
the fog setting in the control panel can further improve the appearance of your
simulation by obscuring this edge.
Embedding
Skies.
The
Landscape Builder permits you to embed any number of your own sky domes into any
Landscape File. This procedure is
illustrated and discussed on the accompanying color plate entitled Adding Sky
Domes to Landscapes.
Positioning
Skies.
Any
time during the operation of TNTsim3D,
you can select a new sky from among the standard sky rasters in the reference
file or from your own panoramic rasters embedded in the current Landscape File.
Sky selection and the controls for positioning the dome relative to your
terrain are located on the new Options / Sky tabbed panel illustrated in the
accompanying color plate entitled Sky Domes in TNTsim3D.
Fixed
Sky Center
The
sky dome can optionally be centered relative to the approximate center of the
terrain surface. Choosing this
option means that its clouds and other background features will approach in your
views as you move forward. This
means that you can fly through and out of the sky dome depending upon how large
you make it. Setting it small, even
clipping out the corners of the landscape means that you will not be as likely
to see gross edge drop-off effects between the end of the surface and the dome
when the viewer is at high altitudes and/or near the its edge.
Moving
Sky
Center .
The
sky dome can optionally be set to move along with the observer position of the
Main View. In this case, its center
will always be somewhere on a vertical line passing through the observer
position. This vertical position is
determined by the other options you set for the dome position.
When the dome travels with the observer in this fashion the features on
it, such as clouds, never get any closer in the views.
This is realistic but can expose the bottom edge of the dome as the edge
of the surface is approached and/or for higher view angles.
Setting
Sky Diameter.
The
sky dome’s diameter can be set to be larger or smaller relative to the extent
of the surface being rendered using the Scale value you enter.
The default Scale value of 100% sets the dome diameter to the greater of
the north/south or east/west dimension of the surface it encompasses.
This means that the dome encompasses nearly all of the landscape extent,
but the remote corners may be outside the dome and obscured by the sky image.
Increasing this value above 100% can be used to enlarge the sky dome to
good effect. Decreasing it below
100% can clip the edge of your surface so you can not look over when the dome
center position option is set to lock it to the center of the landscape.
This can be useful if you have very large terrain and texture inputs.
Even setting this to clip off just some to the 90 degree corners for a
rectangular surface can be effective.
Setting
Sky Center
The
vertical position of the dome is set using the Height value you enter as a
percent of the current dome diameter. The
default of 0% places the center of the dome approximately on the terrain
surface. A negative setting places
the center of the dome proportionally below the surface.
This pulls the dome down around the edges of the landscape and can
prevent your view, especially at higher angles, from looking out under the edge
of the dome. A positive Height
setting greater than 0% will lift up the hemisphere and expose its lower edge.
Suggestions.
A
good place to start positioning your dome is to set it to move with the observer
and use a diameter larger than the terrain (try 200%).
This will permit you to pull down the dome by setting its Height/center
well below the surface, as you seldom look up.
You can then turn on fog as a function of distance to obscure the distant
edges of your landscape in your views and to make the skyline of your clouds
hazy and obscured as it is in the real world.
The
orientation of the dome relative to the surface can also be set using the Yaw,
Pitch, and Roll settings. These
settings rotate the sky dome contents relative to the plane of the landscape.
For example, if the sky dome has a sun in it, you can rotate it so that
the horizontal angle to the sun in the sky is 180 degrees opposite to the
shadows’ direction in your texture and any shaded relief effects.
You can also “recycle” the standard images of skies in the reference
file by rotating them to various new starting positions relative to your
landscapes.
Geospatial
Scripting (SML).
V6.9
of the TNT products introduced the
use of the TNT geospatial scripting
language (SML) to customize your TNTsim3D
simulation. RV7.0
makes several simple, but significant additions for use in the scripts you add
to your simulations. These include
a procedure to permit you to automatically start a script when TNTsim3D
is started. You can also
now detect the use of any input control and use this event to trigger actions in
the script, and interactively use the position selected on the surface with the
mouse in your script without halting the simulation.
Overrideable
SML Functions for Mouse and Input Device Actions.
V6.9
permitted your script to capture the 3D coordinates of the viewer's current
position in the simulation, as well as the coordinates of the view center, the
location on the terrain surface at the center of the Main View.
A script could use these coordinates to start an atlas, a browser, or
your own Visual Basic program, or to start up position-aware custom tools and
views.
RV7.0
scripts can now be created that can detect a mouse button-press event and
capture the corresponding surface geocoordinates of the cursor projected along
the line-of-sight of the Main View to its intersection with the terrain.
In other words, a script running concurrently with the simulation can
change the standard action of the mouse while the simulation continues to run
and accept input from other devices, such as a joystick.
A simple example of the application of this feature would be to program a
mouse button to record the position of the cursor and then redirect the viewer
to move toward that point. Or
feature coordinate positions and data might be reported and recorded for each
mouse click while the joystick is used to move through the simulation in the
normal fashion.
In
addition, an RV7.0 script can be set
up to detect the activation of any control on your joystick or other input
device and then take some programmed script action.
The detection of these kinds of input device events in a script permits
the script to be automatically stopped or interrupted during the simulation
simply by using any control on the joystick.
For example, a script flying a programmed flight path can be interrupted
at any time simply by moving the joystick, so that you can seamlessly regain
direct control of the simulation.
Startup
Scripts.
Color
plates distributed with the release of V6.9
of the TNT products illustrated the
use of geospatial scripts (SML) to
record a simulation flight path and to orbit a fixed point.
You can now add to your Landscape File an RV7.0
geospatial script (SML) that
will automatically start when the simulation starts and continue running as
desired. This startup script can be
used to set the initial position and orientation of the first view in the
simulation. It can startup the
simulation to orbit or fly a predetermined path until interrupted by your
actions. It can be used to provide
messages and collect input for the script before the simulation starts and to
provide many other control actions for your simulation.
Three simple examples of the use of a startup script are illustrated in
the accompanying color plate entitled Startup Scripts in TNTsim3D.
Landscape files that contain these sample startup scripts can be
downloaded for trial use from www.microimages.com/products/tntsimLandscapeFiles.htm.
Start
from a Default View.
The
most obvious use of a startup script in TNTsim3D
is to position its Main View at startup in a predetermined position and
orientation relative to the landscape. It
is no longer necessary to start every simulation at the center of your
landscape. A simple 13-line sample
startup script to do this as well as add your own custom sky background is
illustrated and dissected in the accompanying color plate entitled Startup
Scripts in TNTsim3D. This
script starts the Main View and all associated views at the predetermined
position. It also selects one of
the prepared sky backgrounds and turns it on.
After this script has set up the default startup view, all your flight
control devices are automatically active waiting for you to touch them to begin
flying out from this startup position. Add
this simple script section to the beginning of your more complex startup scripts
to preposition their starting view.
Starting
in an Orbit.
The
color plate distributed with V6.9
and entitled Customizing TNTsim3D with SML provided a sample script that
orbited a specified point. That
script, when selected from the Script menu in TNTsim3D
6.9, would detect the current viewer position and view point and begin
orbiting the viewer about that view point with a fixed orbit radius.
The orbit continued, and movement commands from the joystick or other
input device were suspended, until the script was stopped using this same menu.
This script has been modified to use the new RV7.0
startup procedure to automatically begin an orbit motion when the Landscape File
is opened. The script initiates the
orbit using preset viewer position, center location, and radius, but provides
the option of using the new mouse event detection to stop the orbit motion.
Pressing
the right mouse button during the orbit exits the script, stops the orbit, and
restores motion control to your input devices.
The right mouse button press in this case serves the same function as
using the Script menu to stop the script. This
transition from scripted flight path to user control is seamlessly accomplished
between frames. This script is also
illustrated and dissected in the accompanying color plate entitled Startup
Scripts in TNTsim3D. Note in
the illustration of this script that it also sets an appropriate fog level.
Since this sample script is set to orbit a feature central to the
landscape, this fog acts like ground haze to obscure the distant edges of the
landscape.
This
script could be easily modified to stop on activation of any joystick control
(in addition to or instead of a right mouse button press).
This modification would allow a seamless transition from the preset orbit
to normal flight controlled directly by you.
Starting
with a Path.
The
color plate distributed with V6.9
and entitled Create Flight Paths in TNTsim3D via SML illustrates and
dissects a sample script that records a flight path and orientation during
simulation in a simple tabular form. The
same script could then be used to playback the simulation for that path.
The startup script feature added in RV7.0
also permits TNTsim3D to be started
to automatically fly this prerecorded path.
It also selects one of the prepared sky backgrounds and turns it on.
It then restarts and loops through this path until the script is stopped
using the Script menu. This script
is described and discussed in the accompanying color plate entitled Startup
Scripts in TNTsim3D. If a path
is recorded so as to return to the starting view, then this use of a startup
script will appear to be a continuous loop over the terrain.
This script to follow a predetermined and possibly looping path can be
easily modified so that activation of any input device will cause this automated
looping simulation to halt and user controlled flying to begin in the direction
and orientation of the current axis of the Main, or
pilot, View of the simulation.
Custom
View Window.
TNTsim3D
6.9 provided options to
open several different auxiliary views in addition to the pilot, or main, view.
Thus preprogrammed Left, Right, Down, Rear, Point-of-Interest, and Map
Views can be selected and opened. You
can also open a view(s) fixed on a specific ground Point(s)-of-Interest (POIs).
RV7.0 adds the capability to
use the View menu to open a Custom View. The
content of the Custom View, just as with the preprogrammed and POI views, is
simulated and updated in real time relative to the movement of the observer in
the Main View. When initially
opened, the Custom View by default has the same content, XYZ observer position,
field-of-view, and orientation as the Main View.
The size of the Custom View window can be changed in the normal
interactive fashion. The content,
orientation, and observer position of the Custom View can be independently
altered relative to the axis of the Main View using icons and a control panel.
Just
as with the preprogrammed views, the terrain and texture in the Custom View can
be different from those in the Main View and chosen using an icon from any
provided in the Landscape File. The
position change for a Custom View is set as an offset to slide its viewpoint
ahead of, or behind, that of the Main View while keeping the view axis of the
Custom View the same as that of the Main View.
Using icons, a Custom View can also be zoomed in and then out.
If it is set up to use a different texture for the zoomed area, this view
might be used in 3D to read map features for the physical surface being
manipulated in the Main View. The
orientation of a Custom View can also be altered in its control panel using
roll, pitch, and yaw settings to view in any direction relative to the current
axis of the Main View. All these
options are discussed in more detail in the sections below and illustrated in
the accompanying color plate entitled TNTsim3D Custom View.
Selecting
Textures.
The
Custom View initially shows the default texture layer (the first texture
created) for each available terrain in the Landscape File.
However, just as in all other preprogrammed views, an icon is available
in the Custom View to permit you to set it up to use any terrain, texture, and
overlays available in your Landscape File.
Using a Custom View provides considerable flexibility in providing
different perspective and/or content reference views for the Main View depending
upon the purpose of your simulation.
Observer
Offset.
The
Custom View control panel provides an Offset value you enter as a distance.
This moves the observer position of the Custom View forward (+) or
backward (-) that amount from the observer position of the Main View, and along
its axis. This offset along the
axis is then maintained in real time in the specified units for all “flying”
changes in the Main View. By
default the size and height and width angles of the Custom View match those of
the Main View.
A
default offset of “0” means that the observer position of the Custom View is
the same as that of the Main View. An
offset of +10368 meters means that the XYZ observer position of the Custom View
has moved forward 10368 meters in front of the XYZ of the observer position in
the Main View along its orientation axis. This
moves the observer position of this view closer to the surface but does not
automatically change the Custom View window’s angular field-of-view.
Thus, the area of the surface viewed is less.
If you want to enlarge or reduce the area of the Custom View relative to
that of the Main View, use the mouse to drag an edge or corner of the window.
Correspondingly, if an offset of -26989 meters is entered, the observer
position of the Custom View is moved back 26989 meters from the observer
position of the Main View and along its axis.
This means that the Custom View is looking at the surface through the
position of the Main View, which is centered in the Custom View.
Setting
a large negative offset means that a much larger area of the surface is being
viewed relative to the Main View and all other preprogrammed views.
Thus, if a large terrain is available and loaded, a different synoptic
image might be selected for the texture of the surface viewed in the Custom
View. For example, the Main View in
the simulation could use a 1-meter color image to provide a detailed image,
while the pulled-back Custom View is set up to use a 15-meter color image that
constantly provides a synoptic or general area reference for the detailed scene
in the Main View. Conversely, a
Custom View with a positive offset could use a high-resolution scan of a
large-scale map as its texture, which would provide readable labels allowing you
to identify features at the center of the Main View as it is moved.
The
offset value you enter moves the observer position of the Custom View the
specified distance away from the position of the observer in the Main View.
Thus, a sufficiently large offset can push all or part of the Custom View
through or under the surface. It
will be immediately obvious that part of the Custom View is absent since it is
beyond the terrain. However, this
can be used as a feature if the underside of the surface has a different texture
and the Custom View has been reoriented to look backward.
In future versions of TNTsim3D,
additional controls will enable you to move the observer position of the Custom
View off the axis of the Main View. This
will provide the basis for using several Custom Views to provide a better grasp
of the structure of terrain and manifold surfaces being manipulated in TNTsim3D.
Zooming.
An
icon is available to zoom the contents of the Custom View without changing its
relative observer position to that of the Main View.
Each click on the zoom-in (+) icon narrows the initial field-of-view 5%
relative to the initially matching field-of-view of the Main View.
The size, position, and orientation of the Custom View window do not
change, so each click on this icon appears to zoom the contents of this view.
If the Custom View has been zoomed in, the zoom-out (-) icon is activated
and can be used to reverse the zoom back to the original scale.
As usual, the size of this view’s window can be changed in the normal
fashion to show more or less of the surface at any zoom level.
An
example use of zooming in would be when a map is used as the texture in the
Custom View. Several clicks on the
zoom-in icon would quickly zoom in this view relative to the image in the Main
View. This would permit map
features, such as labels and contour values and spacing, to be read for the area
near the center of the Main View.
Off
Axis Orientation.
The
view axis of a Custom View can be set to be in any direction relative to the
axis of the Main View. The
orientation of this off-axis viewing is specified by changing the roll, pitch,
and yaw to non-zero values in the control panel of the Custom View.
Yaw is the horizontal angle measured counter-clockwise from the Main
View’s axis. Pitch is the
vertical angle from the Main View’s axis.
Roll is the vertical angle from the horizontal in the plane perpendicular
to the Main View’s axis. Thus, if
yaw is set to be 180 degrees while pitch and roll are set at 0 degrees, the axis
of the Custom View is coincident with, but backward, along the axis of the Main
View. These same orientation
settings and an offset of 10000 meters means the Custom View is positioned 10000
meters in front of the Main View on its axis and is looking backward along this
axis of the Main View. As noted earlier, this permits a Custom View to be
positioned with an offset to be beyond or below a surface and to look at
features extending from or below the surface.
These settings also permit the Custom View to see the observer position
of the Main View.
Miscellaneous.
New
Starting Position.
The
default viewer position and orientation when a simulation is started have been
changed for RV7.0.
In V6.9 the viewer was placed
above the northwest corner of the landscape and pointed toward the landscape’s
center. This positioning provided a
synoptic view of much of the landscape, but entailed considerable motion to
reach interesting features within it. TNTsim3D
7.0 starts the viewer above the
center of the landscape with a view toward the northwest.
You can easily use the joystick to turn in any direction, then quickly
move toward any features that you find interesting.
Of course, a Landscape File can also be provided with a startup script to
set a predefined viewer position and orientation to immediately focus the
viewer's attention on particular features, as discussed above.
Grabbing
Snapshots.
A
snapshot of the contents of the Main View, including special effects such as the
sky, fog, and so on, can now be captured at any time during a simulation.
By default the F1 key grabs the contents of the view. You
then use the dialog this presents to specify the file name and location where
you wish to record this image as a *.bmp file.
F1 is commonly used for this purpose in games, but if you wish to assign
this action to some other key or input control, this can be done using the
Configure DirectInput button on the TNTsim3D
Options dialog. These operations
are illustrated in an accompanying color plate entitled Snapshots from
TNTsim3D.
Tinting
Views Below Terrain.
This
feature allows you to optionally select a color to tint the view if the observer
position of that view is below the terrain.
This feature will alert you when a view has penetrated the terrain, which
can be disorienting if unexpected and undesired if you have not set a minimum
terrain clearance limit. This
option for tinting and its color and opacity can be set on the Effects tab panel
of the TNTsim3D Options dialog.
Its effect is illustrated on the accompanying color plate entitled Subterrain
Color in TNTsim3D.
DV7.1
– Some Ideas for Additions.
Manifold
Surfaces.
The
relative positions of multiple manifold surfaces can be difficult to visualize
in a static 3D view. Adding the
ability to TNTsim3D to use manifolds
would allow them and the associated topographic surfaces to be explored in real
time. This would significantly
assist you in gaining a better understanding of the 3D relationships in these
multiple 3D surfaces. Adding this
feature will require that the Landscape Builder be modified to transfer these
surfaces into the Landscape File. TNTsim3D
will then be modified to project them into the various views.
The impact of this on your simulation’s frame rate is unknown at this
time. However, a significantly
slower frame rate (for example, 10 to 15 frames per second) could be tolerated
if necessary in simulations using multiple manifolds and a topographic surface
considering the benefit.
Positioning
Custom Views.
Understanding
spatial relationships in manifold structures would also be enhanced using Custom
Views with additional modifications. In
RV7.0 their observer position is
always on the axis of the Main View. For
manifold simulations it would be important to create Custom Views whose axes are
related to, but not coincident with the axis of the Main View.
This may be accomplished by providing additional Custom View controls to
position them relative to the Main View, but using these controls could be
confusing. Meeting these objectives
could be more flexible using TNT
geospatial scripts if the capabilities were added to open new views with
computationally defined orientations relative to the Main View.
A
typical example would be to open two Custom Views looking at the some
“center” position within the simulated structure.
The axis of one new view is offset 120 degrees clockwise from the Main
View and the other is 120 degrees counterclockwise.
The axis of all these views and their point of intersection are
maintained so that as the Main View is moved, all 3 continue to view the
structure from the same relative observer positions.
For example, if the observer position of the Main View is moved in and
up, then the observer positions of the two Custom Views move the same amount in
and up and the intersection point of the axes is maintained. If this procedure
is implemented in a TNT script, then
a startup script could set the initial Main View contents and then orbit the 3
views in tandem until user input moved the Main View. Many different kinds of
relationships between the Main View and the Custom Views may be needed and
creating these scenarios is an appropriate task for TNT
scripts.
Curved
Land Surface.
Creating
a curved land surface is needed as the earth surface area that can be covered by
a Landscape File is increasing. Suitable
free geodata is becoming available for large area simulations such as the free
15-meter color Landsat coverage of the continents.
JPEG2000 compression has created the opportunity to make use of these
large textures in your simulations. All
the 90-meter SRTM elevation data is now available.
The sky dome can be easily set to rotate with forward movement around the
curved surface to prevent looking under its edge.
Provision has also been included in TNTsim3D
to use complete spheres for the sky dome. However,
at this time it is unclear what the content of these spheres will be and where
it will come from. Is the sun
always up or does it get dark and stars appear when the terminator is crossed,
if so what does the surface look like?
Atlas
Discussion Group.
An
active creator of TNTatlases has
volunteered to maintain and moderate a discussion group by which you can
communicate with others with regard to your activities, news, ideas, tips, and
uses of the FREE
TNTatlas
product. This discussion is not a
MicroImages activity, however, your active participation in it is encouraged.
If you wish to join this discussion group, you can sign up at
http://groups-beta.google.com/group/
atlastalk, send your email address to atlastalk@mchsi.com or use the link at www.microimages.com/products/tntatlas/atlastalk.htm.
Introduction.
There
are many applications and also geographic areas of the world, including in the United States, where the general public’s Internet
access is not fast enough or even available at all to support the interactive
use of large collections of geodata materials.
TNTatlas/X provides you a
FREE means to make a controlled public distribution of a large assembly of
image, map, and tabular materials for use with all popular operating systems.
Automatically accompanying every TNTatlas
is a wide variety of tools to access, explore, and analyze these materials.
These include searching via scripts; interaction via simple or complex
DataTips; measurement, sketching, and other GeoToolbox tools; GPS support;
feature selection and location by several methods including queries; and a
variety of additional interactive tools.
TNTatlas
is also a FREE viewer for large geodata files.
Simply download the shapefile, JP2, MrSID, JPEG, PNG, … file and browse
to it for viewing and using any tool provided by TNTatlas.
For example, TNTatlas is the best
FREE viewer with tools for JPEG2000 compressed JP2 files.
Most other free JP2 viewers cannot even open large files and are
incredibly slow if they do. The direct viewing of these geodata file types is
fast since the TNT link to each of
these file types creates for it an accompanying link file providing many of the TNT
view-oriented optimization features.
TNTmips
7.0 provides you important new
features that are automatically available now for use in your TNTatlas
publications. The Lincoln Property
Viewer sample DVD demonstrates how to construct a detailed, special purpose TNTatlas
that is easy for the public to use for the designed objective.
The Afghanistan
atlas uses sample materials obtained
freely from the web to illustrate how to assemble several different
scale-controlled map and image themes. These
sample themes are then used as the geodata to demonstrate how GraphTips can be
used to interactively present tabular results as interactive “pinmaps.”
These
sample atlases deal with specific real estate and map/image distribution
applications. However, their design
can be a guide to creating your public atlases for other applications in your
area of interest. The “public”
here can be defined as anyone who is not particularly adept at using geospatial
materials but has a reason to use them. This
is the person (husband or wife, geologist, … even judge) or group of persons
(executive board, investors, regulatory board, … even jury) who make final
decisions for purchase, projects, and disposition and need the spatial knowledge
conveyed in your atlas to do so wisely.
Lincoln
Sample Atlas.
Objective
of Sample.
You
wish to determine the appropriateness of the price and longer term investment
potential of a home located in a newspaper advertisement before getting
emotionally involved with it via a visit. You should consider a number of
spatial questions in this assessment. Is
this house’s price similar to those in the neighborhood?
What is the general appearance of the neighborhood? How does this house
compare with those nearby in price, square footage, condition, general
materials, lot size, and placement? Are neighborhood houses owner occupied or
rented? Is it in the floodplain or
does it have other special zoning?
These
are important questions whose answers will determine how the house is priced
relative to its neighbors. The
answers will indicate if it will increase in value (which means, in a good
neighborhood with higher priced homes) or decrease in value (which means, larger
home and price in an neighborhood of smaller, older homes).
Think about how you would go about evaluating these spatially
interrelated questions in some other “X”View software.
A large, detailed color image of the entire city would need
to be instantly viewable at any resolution.
You need at least a dozen vector and other layers containing the spatial
details. Topology is particularly
important to insure that areas such as land parcels are not duplicated.
You need to know how to turn image overlay layers on and off, use queries
or at least select them from a list, locate and zoom to the property of interest
and to adjacent properties, and so on. Finally,
and of great importance, is the need to quickly view and evaluate all the
available information for the individual neighboring houses. And, of course,
none of this would be of value to you unless it was presented entirely in your
language!
Providing
easy access to this neighborhood material for any location in the city would not
be an easy goal to achieve with some “X”View, free or not!
Attempting to relate a number of different spatial layers overlaying an
image in an “X”View for a specific house will totally confuse the general
public user of the material. The
valuable, high resolution information that this user can extract from a detailed
image on their own of the house and neighborhood is obscured by this approach.
Yes, “X”View can present the detailed image of the neighborhood and
have all these layers available to be toggled on and off according the specific
interest of the user. It can
provide layers that are combined and processed to contain the specific spatial
results required about the neighborhood. “X”View
can even provide canned queries to retrieve specific details for a house.
However, the “X”View approach expects the “public” users to learn
how to understand the spatial presentation of graphical layers and use some
unfamiliar tools to formulate the questions of interest.
Overview.
RV7.0
of the TNT products is accompanied
by a FREE DVD that contains a home/parcel ownership TNTatlas
for Lincoln, Nebraska
.
The data contents of this atlas are not particularly interesting or
reusable by you as they are local and transitory.
However, this sample atlas has been designed and reproduced to illustrate
to you a variety of new features that have been introduced to TNTmips
7.0 to add new important capabilities for use in your FREE TNTatlas
product.
The
Lincoln DVD atlas demonstrates some of these and is focused upon showing you and
your clients how to distribute a 50 GB image with vector overlays such as how
to:
-
use scripted forms to go directly to the area of interest or just
navigate there,
-
use new enhanced DataTips to present complex information for any position
in the atlas without cluttering up the image,
-
craft an atlas for a public user and objective without using the color
fills, labels, pinmaps, layer controls, and many other confusing features.
The
accompanying color plate entitled Property Viewer Atlas for Lincoln, NE
provides an overview of this TNTatlas.
Startup
Tool Script.
Using
knowledge of the area (for example, a real estate broker or land developer) you
can use the zoom tools, map features presented by scale, and speed of the TNTatlas
to go right to a local area of interest and perhaps a specific house (especially
if it’s yours). However, this
atlas demonstrates how to include a Tool Script in your atlas to find and
automatically zoom to a specific parcel among the 100,000 covered in this atlas.
Since locating a specific parcel is the purpose of this atlas, this Tool
Script is automatically started when the atlas starts.
It can also be closed and restarted later using the “binoculars” icon
it adds to the icon tool bar. The
Tool Script generates a form for you to set up your owner name or address search
criteria. This is illustrated on
the accompanying 2-sided color plate entitled Property Finder Tool Script
and an excerpt from the script is described on its reverse side.
This
simple search form is designed using the XML approach provided in the TNT
geospatial scripting language. The
same form could be built using Visual Basic.
It provides tabbed panels to set up the search as either address oriented
or owner name oriented. When the
user has completed this very simple form and pressed the Search button, a fast
indexed search will find the parcel, outline it, and zoom in centered on it.
If your entries in the form are not specific enough to define a single
parcel, a list of candidate properties is presented from which you can then
choose the one of interest. This
Tool Script reproduced on the reverse of this color plate creates a flexible
search form since the TNT scripting
language is inherently geospatial and versatile by design.
The form it presents uses tabbed panels, drop down choices, constraints
and user feedback, sample entries, action controls, retrieval of results and
selection, and other features.
Address
Search Tabbed Panel.
The
Address Search tabbed panel provides for the entry of the street number, the
selection of its prefix from those available (for example, S, N, …), the
street name, and its type (for example, BLVD, RD, …).
This is illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Property
Finder Tool Script. Constraints will confine your choice of road prefix and
type to those available in this Lincoln
parcel owner dataset.
Some or all of this information is all you need to search for a Lincoln
property by its address. If
your entry is unique, it will zoom your view to that property.
If not, a list of properties to choose from is presented for your
selection.
Result
List Panel.
If
your address or owner name search finds a unique match and the zoom to the
parcel occurs, the Result List tabbed panel will show the complete address for
your reference. If your search
retrieved several addresses, they are presented in this panel in a scrolling
list. You can then select the
parcel of interest to complete the search and zoom to the parcel.
From
this panel you can choose the View Assessor’s Website Data button for the
unique parcel you zoomed to. You
can also select this button for a parcel on the list that you have highlighted
but not yet zoomed to. In either
case, this automatically opens your browser and takes you to the Lancaster
County Assessor’s website for the parcel zoomed to and outlined in the view or
selected from the list. This will
provide this website’s detailed ownership record of the selected parcel, which
includes a frontal photograph, sale history, a list of liens, access to the deed
of ownership, and so on. The URL
that the atlas automatically computes and sends to your browser for this purpose
will match and retrieve for the same unique parcel since the parcel layer used
in this atlas is derived from the same shapefile parcel layer and tables used on
this Assessor’s website.
Owner
Name Search Panel.
Select
this panel to search for a parcel by using its owner’s name.
Enter only a last name and optionally a first and middle name or initial.
An unusual last name may produce a unique hit whereas using “Smith”
alone may produce a long list. Many
properties also have joint ownership names.
In this case, as shown on the plate, an owner search will find and
retrieve an ownership list even when the owners’ names are listed in different
orders. Properly indexing the
100,000 records in the parcels layer ownership tables makes this and all
retrievals in a few seconds even when used directly from the DVD. Just
as above, the unique parcel or multiple owners’ name and address list will
appear in the same Result List panel.
Settings
Panel.
This
panel permits you to control the action that will take place if you click the
left mouse button outside the form on the image in the view instead of clicking
the Search button on the form to complete your search.
You can also set the zoom action for search results.
Zoom
In to Location.
This
toggle is the default and will zoom 2X to the specific parcel at the position
where you click—which means, you recognize the parcel from the image/map or
from its DataTip, so go there. The
search mode is still active and the form is still open for your use.
Zoom
Out from Location.
This
toggle will zoom out the image view by 2X while keeping the search mode active
and the form open for use. This
permits you to restore more of the image and try again.
View
Assessor’s Website Data.
This
opens your browser for the cursor selected home/parcel and takes you to the
Lancaster County Assessor’s website and automatically shows you their
information for that parcel, such as a frontal photograph, a sale history, a
list of liens, access to the deed of ownership, and so on.
Search
Zoom Options.
A
number of zoom options for search results are also provided on this tabbed
panel: Zoom to Property, Zoom to Block, Zoom to Neighborhood, and Keep Current
Scale. Zoom to Property is the
default setting.
Enhanced
DataTip.
The
public user of this atlas needs to see the details on the area in a local image,
has little patience for complicated tools, wants instant feedback and to easily
explore the available tabular information for any house/parcel in the
neighborhood. These requirements
are best satisfied by instantly popping into the view the desired known data
about any property they visit using the form and/or visit by simply moving
the cursor in the neighborhood. This data must be combined from its original
tabular form into the statistics of interest using virtual fields.
It also should be restructured for easy reading using fonts, tabs, text
styling, and employing text and background color to highlight critical
information. All of this is
illustrated in the enhanced DataTip for this sample atlas and on the
accompanying color plate entitled Add Styling to DataTips.
The details on all the new features used to structure these DataTips for
use in your atlas are discussed in the TNTmips
sections below entitled Styling DataTips.
How
well does this enhanced DataTip meet the needs of public use for which this
atlas was designed? It presents all
the spatial information in an attractive form derived from several vector layers
and attributes ranging from 100,000 parcel polygons to flood zones.
None of these layers are showing by default so as not to obscure the
image layer. However, they are
showing in the LegendView and can be toggled on if their proximity is of
specific interest (for example, the locations of public bicycle and pedestrian
paths). The enhanced DataTip
automatically pops in quickly for any of the 100,000 properties in the city when
the cursor hovers over them—you do not even have to click or know how to use a
mouse, just move it. It presents
the information in a content format easily understood by anyone.
Text and background colors are used to highlight a particularly critical
issue, which in this atlas is the flood zone status of the parcel.
Image
Compression.
This
atlas has been designed around the additional idea that its public user will
have an interest in, be attracted to, and use a detailed color image as part of
this activity. The more detailed
the image, the larger it becomes. The
image used in this atlas covers the city of Lincoln
in 24-bit color at a resolution of
approximately 1 foot and was obtained from a public source.
The uncompressed version of this image was 49.7 GB.
It has been compressed 12 to 1 to fit on the DVD as a
lossy JPEG2000 raster object of 3.97 GB.
The original and the compressed 12 to 1 image are compared at a highly
zoomed level in the accompanying color plate entitled JPEG2000 Compression in
Atlases. It is difficult to
detect any differences between them.
The
display in this atlas of this JPEG2000 raster object and vector overlays at any
scale is fast from the DVD and takes only 1 to 2 seconds if the Project File is
moved to a hard drive. Using it
from the DVD in compressed form is actually faster than if it was uncompressed
since less than 1/12 the data is read from the pyramid layer for any view.
A
TNTatlas can be optionally locked so
that no other TNT product can access
its Project Files. Using this
feature and internal JPEG2000 compression of the image, it is possible to
encapsulate all the geodata used in this atlas so that none can be extracted in
its entirety and then reused in some other manner or product.
Using this approach, the user can have complete freedom of use of these
materials but could only save or print snapshots at the current view’s screen
resolution.
Startup
Control.
This
sample atlas has been designed for a specific objective and public user. However,
it still provides all the advanced features and tools of any other TNTatlas.
These include the visualization and measurement tools, sketching, GPS support,
general queries, tabular views, and so on.
The focus of this sample and your atlases is set in part by temporarily
or permanently hiding these initially confusing capabilities. The user of the
atlas can subsequently explore and discover these advanced tools or can be
advised how to access and use them by your accompanying instructions.
For example, a neighborhood planning group might want to use the
measurement tools with this Lincoln
atlas to review the impact of a public
project on their neighborhood. Or,
a high school geography class might like to learn about how a GPS operates and
relates to image or map position.
Default
Design.
Previous
versions of your TNTatlas could be
simplified by using customization to hide those features not needed and
potentially confusing to its user focus. TNTmips
has extensive controls built in via its tntproc.ini file to determine how a view
should appear when you first start or even if you patch or update.
The size and position of windows, LegendView width, startup tool,
measurement units are just a few examples. These permit your many changes to the
defaults to be preserved and reused via this file. Now
your TNTatlas 7.0 can automatically
use these same settings via the TNTatlas
startup file (*.atl). More on this
topic is illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Greater Control
Over TNTatlas/X Startup.
Custom
Startup.
A
TNTatlas can provide special custom
tools you develop in the TNT
geospatial scripting language (SML),
such as discussed above and in the accompanying color plate entitled Property
Finder Tool Script. These
interactive tools can be very specific and important to the focus of the user of
the TNTatlas.
Anywhere in your atlas you could pop in HelpTips to instruct the user to
choose a specific tool. Remember, a
HelpTip is simply a DataTip that pops in after a couple of seconds for any
cursor position to provide instructions such as “Choose the Property Finder
icon above to locate any property by address or owner name.”
Since HelpTips are actually delayed-appearance DataTips, the instructions
they provide can even be changed by the position of the cursor.
In
TNTatlas 7.0 it is no longer
necessary to expect that its user will subsequently discover your key tool by
locating its icon or menu entry from your instructions or by chance.
You can now designate that your SML
script be activated when the atlas starts with a layout that contains the custom
tool saved for use with that particular layout.
Using this new feature, the sample Lincoln DVD atlas starts up in a
fashion that focuses its user directly upon what they are interested
in—locating a house/parcel. It
does not distract or confuse them with the other visible or hidden tools, which
they might be more inclined to try later if they get interested in what this
atlas can do and if they have initial, uncomplicated success in its use.
Lincoln Sample Atlas.
Details
on the use of this sample TNTatlas
can be found in the ReadMe files
(ReadMe.doc and ReadMe.txt) on the DVD. The
sources of this public data and general information about the objects in TNTmips’
internal format are provided below. All
object sizes listed include subobjects.
The
property parcels vector object included on the DVD was provided by the Lancaster
County Assessor’s Office as a 94.2 MB shapefile (size includes auxiliary
files, such as the database and projection).
This vector object represents the official quarterly property parcels
dated 29 March 2004.
The imported vector object after additional modifications is 138 MB with
polygonal topology and includes 100,099 polygons, 266,214 lines, and 175,737
nodes. The original database
structure has been modified to include virtual fields, standard statistics
tables, and tables tailored to speed owner and address searches by the Property
Viewer tool. This vector object
uses map scale control so you don’t waste time displaying a solid mass of
parcel outlines. This vector can be
drawn when you zoom in beyond a map scale of 1:40,000.
Many
of the other layers were obtained from the City of Lincoln
and Lancaster County Geographic
Information System Map Shop (www.ims.ci.lincoln.ne.us/...
[link obsolete]).
All of these files were downloaded
in shapefile format (*.shp).
Street
centerlines is a 12.0 MB vector object with 5,400 polygons, 18,002 lines, and
12,629 nodes. The complete
shapefile was 14.1 MB. Elements
from this vector object were extracted to supply two separate vector objects,
MajorStreets and MinorStreets, to provide faster initial display of this TNTatlas.
The MajorStreets vector is 3.28 MB with 4,855 lines and 4,299 nodes with
planar topology. The MinorStreets
vector is 8.37 MB with 13,134 lines and 11,259 nodes with planar topology.
The MajorStreets vector is visible when viewing the full extents of the
atlas. The MinorStreets vector
comes on when you zoom in beyond a map scale of 1:15,000.
Both turn off when you zoom in beyond a map scale of 1:4,000 because the
streets are easily seen in the orthophoto layer.
Only the MajorStreets and MinorStreets vector derived from the street
centerlines are used in the atlas, but all three vector objects are included on
the DVD.
Floodplains
is a 2.3 MB vector object with 525 polygons, 1,368 lines, and 935 nodes.
This layer is hidden by design and can be turned on by you at any map
scale.
Lincoln
schools are represented by a 74.5 KB
vector with 68 polygons, 70 lines, and 68 nodes.
This layer is hidden by design and can be turned on by you at any map
scale. The complete shapefile from
which it was imported was 48 KB.
County
schools are represented by a 33.2 KB vector with 21 polygons, 29 lines, and 22
nodes. This layer is hidden by
design and can be turned on by you at any map scale.
The complete shapefile from which it was imported was 15 KB.
Historic
Districts are represented by a 35.9 KB vector with 20 polygons, 38 lines, and 27
nodes. This layer is hidden by
design and can be turned on by you at any map scale.
The complete shapefile from which it was imported was 12.1 KB.
Bicycle/pedestrian
trails imported with additional database modifications became a 528 KB vector
with 96 polygons, 671 lines, and 585 nodes.
This layer is hidden by design and can be turned on by you at any map
scale. The complete shapefile from
which it was imported was 511 KB.
Onstreet
bike trails imported with additional database modifications became a 292 KB
vector with 9 polygons, 167 lines, and 176 nodes.
This layer is hidden by design and can be turned on by you at any map
scale. The complete shapefile from
which it was imported was 266 KB.
Planned
county trails imported with additional database modifications comprise a 62.4 KB
vector with 7 polygons, 67 lines, and 67 nodes.
This layer is hidden by design and can be turned on by you at any map
scale. The complete shapefile from
which it was imported was 37.3 KB.
School
districts are represented by a 96.1 KB vector with 90 polygons, 182 lines, and
125 nodes. This layer is hidden by
design and can be turned on by you at any map scale.
The complete shapefile from which it was imported was 81.9 KB.
The
cities layer used in this atlas was derived from TIGER data (*.rt1) originally
produced by the U.S. Census Bureau and downloaded from GeoCommunity (www.geocomm.com).
The
city boundaries used in this atlas were made by dissolving polygons in Lancaster
TIGER 2002 data. The complete TIGER
2002 data in its original TIGER format is 16.8 MB and after import is 14.3 MB. This
city vector object is 54.5 KB with 13 polygons, 13 lines, and 13 nodes.
The
townships layer used in this atlas was derived from data downloaded from
Nebraska DNR (www.dnr.state.ne.us/databank/statewide.html)
in shapefile format.
The
township vector object is 57.6 KB with 24 polygons, 57 lines, and 34 nodes.
The township names were added by consulting other maps.
LincolnOrthophoto.
This layer is a 12:1 JPEG2000 lossy compression raster, 3.97 GB,
mosaicked from data available from seamless.usgs.gov that was obtained from City
Ortho Imagery (www.mapmart.com/module/cityonefoot.htm).
The data was obtained in numerous MrSID 10:1 compressed tiles totaling
4.66 GB on two DVDs. These were
batch imported into uncompressed raster objects and mosaicked into a single 46.6
GB raster in TNTmips, which was then
JPEG2000 compressed to a 3.97 GB raster. If
this mosaic had been done in RV7.0
rather than an early DV7.0, the
separate compression step would have been eliminated—you can now compress
directly to JPEG2000 in the Mosaic process.
It is also not necessary to import the original tiles unless you want
them separately in TNT’s internal
format for some reason. The
mosaicked raster object has 145,000 lines and 115,000 columns.
The
elevation layer used in this atlas is derived from data downloaded from Nebraska
DNR (www.dnr.state.ne.us/databank/dem.html)
in DEM format (*.dem). Nine
10-meter resolution rasters with elevation in feet were mosaicked into a single
raster object with 4,247 lines and 3,273 columns that is 29.0 MB.
Afghanistan
Sample Atlas.
The
sample data for this atlas has been deliberately designed to fit on a CD.
For example, only the Kabul
area is covered by the very detailed
map sample and maps are available for downloading at most scales for much larger
areas. Using a CD will permit
almost anyone with a computer to try this atlas, which is of importance in this
example because it may potentially be used in areas where even electricity is
hard to come by. However, please
note that by using compression methods, such as JPEG2000 and others, a large
collection of sample data has been included.
More information on the purpose and features of this sample TNTatlas
CD can be reviewed on the accompanying color plate entitled Afghanistan
Atlases on CD.
Choose
from the 4 different atlases on this CD to experiment with the use of different
types of maps and images and scale-range control.
Each of the four atlases has its own GraphTip/Display Control Script
application. These new interactive
features are illustrated on the accompanying color plate entitled GraphTips
in the Afghanstan Atlas. These
new capabilities are discussed and illustrated in detail later in this MEMO in
the sections on GraphTips and Display Control Scripts.
However, since you might not have the data used in these subsequent
illustrations, they were easily adapted to be tried as part of this sample TNTatlas.
Demographics
& Hazards.
The
Demographics & Hazards atlas
includes theme maps in Project File format of population and urbanization at the
province and district level as well as a number of externally linked files that
provide additional information on population and urbanization, climate, food and
health care availability, and presence of landmines.
The population and urbanization geodata use province and district
boundaries, both of which were imported from shapefiles that were 357 and 718
KB, respectively. In Project File
format, the province boundaries are 309 KB and the district boundaries are 664
KB. As you zoom in, scale control
is used so that provinces are replaced by districts that are also theme mapped
to reflect population or urbanization. The
Demographic & Hazards atlas
demonstrates a GraphTip that pops in to display the name of the province, the
urbanization of the province presented as a pie chart and a percentage, as well
as the total population for the province.
Planimetric
Maps.
The
Planimetric Maps atlas shows
province boundaries at full view highlighting the province that contains Kabul
.
These are the same province boundaries described for the Demographics
& Hazards atlas using different display parameters.
You can zoom in and scale control will replace province boundaries with
district boundaries, or click when the HyperIndex Navigator is the active tool
to open a large (approximately 33" by 23" if printed full size)
planimetric map in PDF format for each province or a smaller map (half size in
each dimension) for each district where you click.
There are about 53 MB of maps in PDF format linked to the provinces and
districts. These maps present
settlements, boundaries, rivers, and roads.
The scale of these maps varies with the size of the province or district.
The GraphTip for the Planimetric
Maps atlas enlarges the label(s) beneath the cursor to make it readable
at any scale without all labels being so large that the map is obscured.
This GraphTip also deconflicts labels that are overlapping, enlarging and
positioning them out from their initial map locations with leader lines to their
original map position.
Country
Image Maps.
The
Country Image Maps atlas
initially presents a color-coded, 16-bit elevation raster for Afghanistan
.
When you zoom in, this atlas replaces the elevation raster with a Landsat
image sampled to approximately 60-meter resolution with 10:1 lossy JPEG2000
compression and a variety of map scale controlled vector layers.
The GraphTip for the Country
Image Maps atlas shows the nearest road line segment in profile.
The Country Image Maps
atlas includes a country-wide Landsat mosaic initially obtained as 6 files in
MrSID format compressed 35:1 for a total of 493 MB.
This file was imported and JPEG2000 compressed to 160 MB (including
pyramids) although a direct comparison cannot be made because the extents of the
original and that incorporated in the atlas are different.
The elevation raster was acquired in SRTM format (*.hgt, 456 MB) then
imported and JPEG2000 compressed to 133 MB including pyramids.
This atlas also includes a variety of vector overlays imported from
shapefiles for roads, airports, province and district centers, and hydrology,
all of which were imported from shapefile format.
Kabul
Maps.
The
Kabul Maps atlas provides maps of
the city of Kabul
and surrounding areas at five
different map scales. The initial
view of this link positions these maps over the same 16-bit, color-coded,
elevation raster of Afghanistan
seen with the Country
Image Maps atlas with the addition of these maps in their geographic
positions with instructions to zoom in. How
well features match across maps of different scales is demonstrated by zooming
in to the indicated area. The Zoom
In tool is the active tool for this layout, so you just have to click where you
want to zoom. The area of
comparison shows the seams between 1:10,000, 1:50,000 and 1:100,000 maps.
Maps at 1:200,000 and 1:500,000 are also included at this level of the
atlas. The GraphTip for this atlas
provides the slope and aspect of the topographic surface at the cursor location
both graphically and in text form. The
collection of Russian topo maps in MrSID format (30:1 compression) as they were
obtained was 18.1 MB. They are now
in internal Project File format with lossy, best quality JPEG2000 compression
and occupy 114 MB including pyramids.
Miscellaneous.
The
GeoToolbox permits viewing of cross sections in the other TNT
products. This feature is now also
available in TNTatlas and its use
can be reviewed from within your TNT
product by consulting the Quick Guides entitled Cross Sections with Style
and GeoToolbox from within your TNT
product.
The
default width of the LegendView when a TNTatlas
is autorun can be set as well as the DataTip viewing mode via the *.atl file.
The
specific tool that will be active and immediately usable (in other words, its
icon depressed) when a TNTatlas is
opened can be set in the *.atl file.
The
“navigation” icon buttons can now be removed using the TNTatlas
Customize window.
Only
minor modifications and adjustments were made in these products since RV6.9
was released. TNTserver
is now built weekly on the same schedule as the other TNT
products and weekly patches are posted. A
TNTclient can specify the type of
image to receive using a menu (in other words, send results as JPEG, JP2, PNG,
or SVG). A client option is
available to display/not display a list of hyperlinks if only one hyperlink is
available in the atlas at the point selected in the TNTclient.
A transparent panning button can be optionally added/not added by the TNTclient
at the edges of its view. TNTserver
uses UTF8 encoded strings for queries when used with an up-to-date
servlet engine (such as Tomcat 3.3.2).
DV7.1 –
Supporting OpenGIS’s Web Map Service (WMS).
This following WMS section was in the
MicroImages MEMO entitled Release of RV6.9 of the TNT Products as a
planned feature for TNTserver 7.0.
Other priorities in other products prevented this work from being
undertaken. It is now underway so
these sections are being repeated here from that previous MEMO.
Introduction.
MicroImages
is currently extending the TNTserver
to implement the protocol specified for the Open Geospatial Consortium’s (OGC)
Web Map Service (WMS) V1.1.1 (see www.opengis.org/specs/?page=specs). When
this is available, TNTserver will
still access a TNTatlas layout and
return either a JPEG, JP2, PNG file(s) or a SVG layout, but will then respond to
requests issued using either the WMS or the current TNT
protocol.
What Does It Add?
A browser-based client or any client can
issue requests to any available server implementing this WMS protocol and expect
it to respond correctly if it has implemented that particular feature of the
protocol. As a result, this new
version of TNTserver will also
respond to any of these clients written by others that issue WMS requests.
Conversely, a client you write or sample TNTclients
written by MicroImages can issue requests to any WMS site as well as TNTserver
and combine the results as appropriate. Furthermore,
supporting requests using only the
WMS protocol will not require the use of the Tomcat servlet engine with TNTserver.
Clarifications.
Supporting WMS protocol indicates that a
server will respond to requests that come to it using its documented protocol.
The designation that a server (for example, TNTserver)
implements WMS 1.1.1 protocol does not mean that it will respond to every
possible WMS request to it. It also
does not prevent that server from responding to requests in any other additional
protocol it may support as an alternative to or extension of the WMS.
Whether or not a server responds correctly or at all to a specific
request can vary widely. Almost all
server products listed as supporting WMS are in one category on the OGC
site (see www.opengis.org/resources/?page=products)
designated as “Implementing
Products, that is, software products that implement OpenGIS Specifications but
have not yet passed a compliance test.” Thus,
a close inspection of this OGC listing of server products reveals that at
present, only 3 commercial server products are certified by OGC as WMS 1.1.1 “Compliant
Products, that is, software products that comply to OGC’s OpenGIS®
Specifications.” These must
be further qualified by OGC adding that “Compliance
tests are not available for all specifications.”
It is also important to understand that a
server’s implementation of WMS 1.1.1 may be restricted to responding to
requests in that protocol. Thus,
the designations that a product implements WMS does not mean that the server can
issue requests in WMS or any other protocol to other WMS sites either locally or
over a network such as the Internet. To issue such requests, the server must
support the additional capability of acting as a client to other WMS sites.
Cascading Service.
The use of the terms “client” and
“server” in this context can be confusing because they are popularly used to
indicate the software implementation for the end users, such as the party using
the browser or other human interfacing product.
However, in a generic computer sense, being a server indicates a source
of information that will respond to an inquiry.
Thus, if the server product supporting WMS has an embedded client capable
of issuing requests in WMS protocol it is called a Cascading Web Map Service (CWMS).
The WMS 1.1.1 specification states:
“A
‘Cascading Map Server’ is a WMS that behaves like a client of other WMSes
and behaves like a WMS to other clients. For
example, a Cascading Map Server can aggregate the contents of several distinct
map servers into one service. Furthermore,
a Cascading Map Server can perform additional functions such as output format
conversion or coordinate transformation on behalf of other servers.”
Price Reduced and
Functionality Expanded.
| Drastic
reduction in TNTview price of 50%
for NAFTA and 58% for all other nations for use on a Mac, Windows, Linux, and
Unix platforms. |
Summary of Features.
Regardless
of what product you or your institution may now be using for your professional
GIS and image analysis, you and your associates and clients can also add and use
the most advanced geospatial visualization product available.
You can use it with a wide variety of popular geodata files to view 3D,
stereo, manifolds, atlases, pinmaps, routings, and other complex visualizations without
purchasing additional expensive extensions. It
also comes with a suite of interactive geospatial tools and a geospatial
scripting language to add your own tools and analyses. The only optional feature
is for printing larger than A3, A4, or 11" by 17".
Assemble
and use geographical overlays in 2D or 3D with composite legends, DataTips,
GraphTips, measurement tools, and so on for direct display without import
of large files of ESRI shapefile, LizardTech MrSID, ER Mapper ECW, Oracle
Spatial, and ODBC linked tables together with JP2 (JPEG2000 compressed file),
GeoTIFF, JPEG, and PNG, with any raster, vector, shape, CAD, or database objects
in MicroImages internal Project File format.
Hundreds of other raster, vector, and CAD formats can be added to a view
after they are imported.
Add
MicroStation DGN and Autodesk DWG to this list via DV7.1
and then RV7.1 along with the new
ability to double click on any of these formats to automatically open a
2D view in TNTview of any of these
geodata layers.
Directly
view these composite layers in any ISO/EPSG Coordinate Reference System they use
for their internal georeference or via a companion external file such as a world
file (for example, *.tfw, *.jgw).
Use
all the TNT selection tools, such as
direct element, query, regions, and others to interactively select elements from
any layer, internal object, or externally linked file.
Display attributes in single record or tabular form.
Use
any of the standard analysis tools such as sketch and save as CAD object,
measure, View-in-View, regions, and others.
Create,
add, use, and distribute your own geospatial analysis scripts for use with these
geodata including Tool, Macro, Display Control, Startup, Process, Import, and
other scripts, link to and communicate with external Basic, C, or Java programs,
or use the TNTsdk to extend this
product.
New
Prices.
Fixed
License:
TNTview 7.0 is now US$500 per
copy worldwide (formerly US$1000 NAFTA nations of USA, Canada, and
Mexico and formerly US$1200 for all
others).
Floating
License: TNTview
7.0 is now US$600 worldwide per each seat, which is each simultaneous user.
Adding
the large format printing option to a TNTview
to print layouts and images greater than A3, A4, or 11" by 17" is
unchanged at US$1500 for each user.
Items
in Package.
TNTview
will be delivered on a CD for the operating system specified.
The
package includes a USB Software Authorization Key and a serial key can be
specifically requested for use with Unix workstations only.
The
tutorial booklets entitled Displaying Geospatial Data and Navigating
will be included printed in color.
The
other tutorials and Quick Guides applicable to TNTview
will be installed from the CD, can be viewed online from within TNTview,
and can be printed locally as needed.
Relationship
to TNTmips.
TNTview
is a subset of TNTmips, which is
available on every supported platform including the new 64-bit version released
with V6.9. The processes in TNTview
and TNTmips use the identical code. TNTview
provides all of TNTmips that deals
with the management and 2D and 3D visualization of geospatial data but does not
support its creation or export. TNTview
provides about 25% of all the code making up TNTmips.
Your Software Authorization Key or floating license determines the subset of TNTmips
that will be installed and available for use with your TNTview
license. Various sites are already
using separate floating licenses (but one Software Authorization Key) to serve
out their independently licensed seats for TNTmips,
TNTedit, and TNTview.
Try
it Free.
Try
TNTview free as long as you like, no
time limit, with all your smaller GIS datasets or our samples by downloading TNTview
as part of TNTlite from
microimages.com/tntlite/. TNTview
provided as part of TNTlite is
identical to the professional TNTview
you buy in all aspects except it limits the size of the geodata it will work
with.
Characteristics
of Licenses.
Fixed
License.
A
fixed license is controlled by a physical Software Authorization Key, which must
be attached to a USB or serial port on your computer to permit TNTview
to operate. The USB key, and
therefore your license to use TNTview,
is completely portable and can be moved freely among computers using any of
popular operating systems supported by the TNT
products: Mac, Windows, and Linux. Simply
plug this key into the USB port and download and install the appropriate version
of TNTview for the specific
operating system. TNTview
portability is further ensured by an identical user interface and operation on
all platforms and complete interchange of your geodata sets without conversion.
Floating
License.
One
or more seats on a floating license are controlled by a physical Software
Authorization Key attached to a USB or serial port on a computer on your
network. This computer, which can
be using any operating system supported by the TNT
products, must also be running the floating license management software.
As many TNTview seats as your
purchase authorizes can then be checked out to any computer on that network and
these computers can be a mix of all popular operating systems (Mac, Windows,
Linux, and Unix). Separate seats
for TNTedit and TNTmips
can be ordered for use with the same USB or serial key and software license
manager.
Inherited New
Features.
TNTview
7.0 provides all the
following new features introduced in detail in the corresponding sections below
for TNTmips.
System
Changes.
Hundreds
of new Coordinate Reference Systems, datums, datum conversions, and related
features make up the Open Geospatial Consortium (OGC) Spatial Referencing System
used in the ISO 19111:2003 Spatial Referencing System standard.
These include all the Coordinate Reference System (CRS) definitions of
the European Petroleum Survey Group (EPSG) all of which are updated biannually.
These are now all incorporated into TNTview
in addition to those developed by MicroImages for previous use with your
imported or linked geodata. The map
calculator can also make all these new kinds of conversions.
Shapefiles
and their styles, projections, and other characteristics can be selected and
automatically used in TNT processes
and as display layers. These auto
links are much faster in RV7.0 as
they are now made via the TNT shape
object rather than via a CAD object as in V6.9.
Now you can also use the Spatial
Layer Controls to add TNT features
to be used with the linked shapefile, such as new styles and groupings and
DataTips. GraphTips, virtual
fields, implied one-to-one table linkages, new tables, and all the advanced
features and properties you expect to have for any geometric data layer in a TNT
product can be set up from the Group or Layout Controls and saved with the link
to the shapefile. Since these
advanced properties are stored in the shape object link file, the shapefile and
its table are not altered in any way although the originally associated table
can be edited in a TNT product or
ArcView.
The
compressed size of all compressed rasters can now be larger than 4 GB if
permited by the format’s specifications.
JPEG
and PNG compressed rasters can now be selected and automatically used in
processes and as display layers. Their
georeferencing and CRS information is automatically built for them in the link
to make their subsequent display and use as fast and efficient as internal
raster objects.
All
compressed ArcGrid files can now be imported.
Importing
non-topological datasets (for example, shapefiles, DXF, Oracle Spatial layers,
…) into a vector object applies all the improved deconflation operations as
part of the automatic topological validation procedure.
2D
Display.
Your
LegendView has styled legend entries for a linked shapefile if its AVL (ArcView
Legend) file accompanies it. When
no AVL file is present, legend entries are all in a single solid color.
CAD
layers can now have the same advanced label styling, frames, leader lines, and
other features as those used in vector layers.
CAD
layers can now have all the many new DataTips, Enhanced DataTips, GraphTips and
associated Display Control Script features described below in detail for TNTmips.
Linking
to and importing from MrSID files in V6.9
was the only significant TNTview
feature unique to a Windows system. Now new libraries from LizardTech also make
this feature available in TNTview
for the Mac OS X operating system.
Text
annotations can be added in anywhere in the sketch layer overlaying the view.
A sketch layer is a CAD layer and can be saved as CAD object for future
use in TNTview or the other TNT
products. Since this is a CAD layer
these annotations are actually labels and can have the same frame outlines with
background colors/transparency and multiple leader lines.
3D
Display.
3D
views now use only the advanced rendering methods that now all offer the
advanced features of the older, slower, lower quality rendering methods, which
have been removed from RV7.0 of TNT
products. Some of these new
features of the 3 new, high-quality 3D rendering methods include direct relief
shading, layer transparency, and smooth color/transparent pedestals and fences
(upward pedestals) both of which can follow around 3D surfaces with curved
edges.
Multiple
manifold layers can be vsualized in 3D views with or without surface views.
A manifold layer is a raster, vector, shape, or CAD object with 3D
georeference that is draped onto a continuous planar, curved, or irregular
surface of any orientation in space that can be defined by a collection of 3D
coordinates.
Maneuvering
around a wireframe representation of the terrain to select an initial 3D
observation position is now much faster.
Stereo
Display.
Complex
multi-layer 2D and 3D views of terrain surfaces and/or manifold surfaces can be
converted into high quality stereo views. These
stereo modes now include separate frames, column interlaced, line interlaced,
and anaglyph to support the use of almost any available popular stereo viewing
device. High quality stereo viewing
can now be done with a mirror stereoscope using one large or a pair of flat
panel monitors and also with the new stereo flat panel monitors that do not
require glasses or any other external viewing aid or device.
Rendering
of images into stereo views with parallax computed directly from the terrain
layer is now faster since they no longer need to be draped on the terrain.
This also improves the image quality for stereo viewing.
Importing
Geodata.
New
vector imports include CARIS ASCII and improved font support for MapInfo. New
raster imports are MrSID on the Mac and compressed ArcGrid.
Customizing.
As
usual the extensive additional features added to the TNT
cross-platform geospatial scripting language (SML),
such as those to create manifolds and new Display Control Scripts for creating
GraphTips, are available for use in your scripts to create special tools,
display effects, processing features, and so on.
The
TNT Software Development Kit (TNTsdk)
is now available FREE with every RV7.0
TNT product including TNTview.
Now you can add your own processes to your TNTview
menu or anyone else’s using all the C++ functions and classes used to build
the TNT products.
For windows you will be working with Microsoft’s C++ compiler in Visual
Studio .NET 2003, Professional Version. You
can compile the same program for use on the Mac, Linux, and Solaris using the
current version of GCC.
Please
be aware that the SML and TNTsdk
export functions and classes are not available for use in TNTview
to export geodata for use in other products.
Upgrading
TNTview.
To
a Different TNT product.
Any
TNTview can upgraded by its original
purchaser to a TNTedit or TNTmips
with full credit for its original purchase price (for example, US$500,
US$1000, or US $1200) after it has been upgraded at the very low price noted
below to the current version of TNTview.
Upgrading
from an Earlier Version.
If you did not purchase RV7.0
of TNTview in advance and wish to do
so now, please contact MicroImages by FAX, phone, or email to arrange the
purchase of this version. When you have completed your purchase, you will be
provided an authorization code by FAX. Entering
this authorization code while running the installation process allows you to
complete the installation of TNTview 7.0.
Fixed
License.
The prices for upgrading a fixed license
to RV7.0 from an earlier version of TNTview
purchased at the earlier higher prices are US$50 from V6.9
or US$100 from V6.8 or any earlier
version.
Floating
License.
The prices for upgrading each seat
on a floating license to RV7.0 from
an earlier version of TNTview
purchased at the earlier higher prices are US$60 from V6.9
or US$120 from V6.8 or any earlier
version.
| The
above special prices to upgrade to TNTview
7.0 are valid until the day of the
official release for downloading of RV7.1
of the TNT products
|
Future
Upgrades to TNTview.
Fixed License.
The worldwide prepaid price for a minimum
of 2 or more future upgrades for TNTview
will be $50 per each version. For
example, purchasing your upgrades now from RV7.0
to RV7.1 and to RV7.2
will be US$100.
When TNTview
7.1, RV7.2, or … are
officially released, upgrades to any current version from any earlier version (RV7.0
or earlier version) will be US$200.
Floating License.
The worldwide prepaid price for a minimum
of 2 or more future upgrades for TNTview
for each seat will be $60 per each version.
For example, purchasing your upgrades now from RV7.0
to RV7.1 and to RV7.2
will be US$120 per each seat,
which is each simultaneous user.
When TNTview
7.1, RV7.2,
or … are officially released, upgrades to the current version from any earlier
version (RV7.0 or earlier version)
will be US$240 per each seat, which
is each simultaneous user.
| Note
that prepaid subscriptions to 2 future releases of TNTview
are now only 25% of the price you will pay if you wait to upgrade until after
each new version (for example, 7.1) is released. |
Inherited New
Features.
TNTedit
7.0 provides all the new
features summarized just above in the section Inherited New Features for TNTview.
The following additional new features not available in TNTview
are summarized here for TNTedit.
All these new features in TNTedit
are introduced in greater detail in the corresponding sections below for TNTmips.
Georeferencing.
Manifold
surfaces can now be created by adding 3D georeference points to a raster,
vector, or CAD object to define a manifold object for 3D displays.
These point positions and connections can also be edited to shape the
surface. There is a detailed
discussion of manifolds and their use in a section below entitled Manifolds.
Control
points can now have names and IDs. Resampling
from geographic (latitude-longitude) coordinates can now create cells specified
in degrees/minutes/seconds. The
pyramid computation method for an output raster object can be selected from
None, Average, Sample, and Automatic.
Editing.
You can now copy from vector, CAD, TIN,
region, and linked shape objects (for example, a linked shapefile).
During the copy operation, you can now select the irregular area to copy
from any of these geometric objects using a region object.
This copy area selected from a vector, linked shape, CAD, or TIN layer
can be optionally controlled to be Partially Inside, Completely Inside, Clip
Inside, Partially Outside, Completely Outside, or Clip Outside the region
object.
Regardless of the type of geometric
object selected for the copy operation, this sub-area can be pasted into a
vector or CAD object. If pasted
into a vector object, its topology and database structure will be automatically
reconciled (validated) in the target vector object.
Right Mouse Button operations will now
allow the toggling through nearby elements (not just vector element types as in
previous TNTedit versions) for
vector and CAD editable objects.
Manifold
object geodata content can be edited in a 2D view and the results viewed in a
concurrent 3D view.
Database
Table Setup.
A simple wizard approach is now used when
you set up a new table and its relational linkages.
This includes setting up virtual tables.
Exporting
Geodata
Geographic
Markup Language (GML) can be exported from CAD or vector objects.
CAD or vector labels are exported to shapefiles.
Exporting raster objects to PNG, TIFF, and GeoTIFF files have improved
support.
Exporting
geodata via the SML and TNTsdk
export functions and classes are available in TNTedit
to use to create geodata for use in other products.
Exporting Via Scripts.
Tool
and Macro scripts started in TNTedit
now have the ability to use the MicroImages Import / Export SML
classes. For example, your special
selection tool implemented in a Tool Script could select features and export
their results directly to any supported external format while also using all TNTedit’s
functions to prepare these features.
Geospatial
Scripting Language (SML).
Tool and Macro scripts can use the Import
/ Export classes for SML scripts run
within TNTedit to output edit
results to custom formats.
Upgrading
TNTedit.
If you did not purchase RV7.0
of TNTedit in advance, and wish to
do so now, please contact MicroImages by FAX, phone, or email to arrange to
purchase this version. When you have completed your purchase, you will be
provided an authorization code by FAX. Entering
this authorization code while running the installation process allows you to
complete the installation of TNTedit 7.0.
The prices for upgrading from earlier
versions of TNTedit are outlined
below. Please remember that new
features have been added to TNTedit
with each new release. Thus, the
older your version of TNTedit
relative to RV7.0, the higher your
upgrade cost will be.
Within the NAFTA point-of-use area (Canada,
U.S., and Mexico) and with shipping by ground delivery. (+$50/each means US$50 for each
additional upgrade increment.)
| TNTedit
Product
|
Price to upgrade from
TNTedit |
V6.4 |
|
V6.9 |
V6.8 |
V6.7 |
V6.6 |
V6.5 |
and earlier |
| Windows/Mac/Linux |
US$350 |
550 |
700 |
800 |
875 |
+50/each |
|
for 1-user floating
|
US$420 |
660 |
840 |
960 |
1050 |
+60/each |
| UNIX
for 1-fixed license |
US$650 |
1000 |
1350 |
1600
|
1750 |
+50/each |
|
for 1-user floating |
US$780 |
1200
|
1620 |
1920 |
2100 |
+60/each |
For a point-of-use in all other nations
with shipping by air express. (+$50/each means US$50 for each additional upgrade
increment.)
| TNTedit
Product
|
Price to upgrade from TNTedit: |
V6.4 |
|
V6.9 |
V6.8 |
V6.7
|
V6.6
|
V6.5 |
and
earlier |
| Windows/Mac/LINUX |
US$400 |
750 |
950 |
1100 |
1200 |
+50/each |
|
for 1-user floating |
US$480 |
900 |
1140 |
1320 |
1440 |
+60/each |
| UNIX
for 1-fixed license |
US$750 |
1200 |
1550 |
1850 |
2000 |
+50/each |
|
for 1-user floating |
US$900 |
1440
|
1860 |
2220
|
2400 |
+60/each |
There
are now 77 TNT Tutorial and
Reference booklets. These booklets
provide more than 2000 pages and over 4000 color illustrations.
The most important of these booklets are up-to-date with the features in RV7.0
of the TNT products.
However, others still show minor differences primarily in the user
interface layouts of earlier TNT
versions. Additional revised
booklets will be provided as completed for your downloading via microimages.com. The new booklets provided with this release and those with
significant additions are illustrated and summarized in the accompanying color
plate entitled New Tutorials.
Each
new professional TNTmips ships with
3 thick notebooks containing a color printed copy of these 77 booklets.
Those of you receiving your RV7.0
upgrade on CD can view and refer to all of these booklets using Adobe Acrobat or
Reader. If you install all these
booklets as part of any TNTmips
product, you can directly access these booklets from the Display menu, by
choosing Help / Tutorial Overview and selecting the booklet, or via Help /
Search and using the index this provides.
New
Booklets Available.
Working
with Massive Geodata Objects. (printed
copy provided)
Large
geodata sets are available or you are assembling them in TNTmips.
This booklet provides advice on how to structure and maintain them for
optimal use in the TNT products.
Individual rasters and mosaics can use appropriate compression and a null
value mask. Compute standard
attribute tables (for example, area, …) only when needed.
Merge contiguous vector objects to eliminate management and fragmentation
of many pieces. Merge line and
polygon objects when they need not be kept separate.
Dissolve out unnecessary polygon boundaries.
Remove excess nodes. Thin
down vector lines. Maintain a
simpler topology if possible until full polygonal topology is required.
Transfer attributes to simplify relational databases and remove duplicate
records. Setup the viewing scale
for the range of interest for objects. Use
DataTips and GraphTips to simplify views rather than turn on many simultaneous
layers.
Introduction
to Using TNTsdk. (printed copy
provided)
As
discussed above in detail, TNTsdk is
now available free to develop additional geospatial software for use with TNTview,
TNTedit, or TNTmips.
This brief new booklet introduces you to some of the things you should
consider, such as getting support, cross-platform issues, and how to ensure that
your program can be localized or translated for use in your language.
It gives some suggestions on how to set up your TNTsdk
programming environment and keep it updated and current. It
also discusses a sample program included with the TNTsdk.
Orthorectification
Using Rational Polynomials.
TNTmips
now provides a simple procedure to produce orthorectified images from full or
partial QuickBird and IKONOS images ordered as Rational Polynomial ortho ready
kits. This procedure requires a
good quality DEM of the area covered and several well distributed, accurate XYZ
ground control points (GCPs). This
new booklet covers the procedures available in this new process. It
outlines how to obtain and evaluate GCPs and test points of varying quality.
Significant modifications of the TNT
georeference procedures were required to enter and use these XYZ GCPs and test
points for this process and are discussed.
The various methods built into this process to measure the map accuracy
of the ortho image produced are reviewed. A sample exercise is provided using a
color IKONOS 4-meter resolution image of La Jolla Mesa, San Diego County,
California and the corresponding DEM that will
fit within the practice limits of TNTlite.
Revised
Tutorials with Major Changes.
The
following tutorial booklets have been revised since the release of RV6.9.
They were selected for update since they represent areas of significant
recent changes in the TNT products.
The added functionality of newly released features is introduced by the addition
of new pages and examples as noted. As
part of this update, their user interface illustrations, terminology, default
parameters, and sample data have also been adjusted to be current with RV7.0
of the TNT products.
Managing
Relational Databases has been updated to include shape objects and changes
to tabular view. The illustrations
were updated throughout the booklet and terminology was adjusted to reflect the
current interface and defaults. The
following new pages were added.
-
Changing Related Only to Directly Linked—how to use directly attached
tables to make related only tables into directly attached tables so a database
can be simplified;
-
Database Validate and Attachment Types—introduces database validation
and discusses the importance and implications of various attachment types;
-
Link to ODBC Data Sources—presents the Link to Data Sources feature in
Display and contrasts it with linking during import; and
-
Many Ways to Associate Tables—summarizes the many ways to associate
database information with objects in the TNT
products.
Printing
has been updated to include color management and newly supported external
formats. The following new
pages were added.
-
Color Management—color profiles (ICM and ICC) and how to proof to the
screen;
-
Printing to External Formats—converting layouts to TIFF, Adobe
Illustrator (*.ai), PDF, EPS, and SVG;
-
Options When Printing to SVG—compression and layer controls; and
-
Hints for Reliable Printing—setting printer defaults and page
orientation, do not dither twice, printing transparency efficiently.
Vector
Analysis Operations has been updated to include material on creating and
using grids with accompanying exercises. The
following new pages were added.
-
Grid Analysis—generating grids within reference objects;
-
Grids for Extraction—using generated grids to extract from raster
objects;
-
Grids and Surface Properties—getting surface properties for generated
grid polygons; and
-
Vectors and Surfaces—converting 2D vectors to 3D vectors and using 3D
view in editing.
Glossary
for Geospatial Science has many new terms added, such as “conflation,”
resulting in an increase from 64 to 72 pages.
Floating
License Setup and Management Guide has been completely updated, expanded,
and tested.
Quick
Guides.
Quick
Guides outline the operation of a small selection of TNT
features in a very concise form or provide quick reference sheets for things
like Hot Keys. They are created in
response to user input and support questions that indicate clients are unaware
or overlooking specific shortcuts or key features of the TNT
products. As a result they are not
a comprehensive collection, which would require thousands of pages in this Quick
Guide format, but only intended to address these special concerns.
All previously existing Quick Guides have been revised and updated to be
current with RV7.0.
Available
Online.
All
58 currently available Quick Guides are now installed in PDF format from your CD
with your RV7.0 TNT
product. You can access these
Guides online using Display / Quick Guides or Help / Quick Guides.
This feature is illustrated on the accompanying color plate entitled Quick
Guides Available from Menu. A
single search in Abobe Reader will now cover the contents of these Guides as
well as the tutorial booklets and the reference manual.
This
searching is also now available for the first time in the Mac OS X versions of
the TNT products.
To use this feature you will need to designate that Abobe Reader is your
default application for viewing PDF files.
Apple wishes you to stay within its own software so Apple Preview is the
default for PDF files and the Adobe search indexes are ignored.
The same color plate discusses this and how you can switch your default
application to Adobe Reader to use these TNT
searches.
New
Quick Guides.
The
following new Quick Guides are provided in printed form as part of your RV7.0
upgrade kit. Some synopsize new
features added to RV7.0 and some
cover previous features of which you may be unaware.
These and all the other upgraded Quick Guides are installed in PDF from
the CD as part of RV7.0 or can be
downloaded from www.microimages.com/documentation/QuickGuides/.
| Suggestion:
Print and assemble all the new and updated 1-page Quick Guides into a
booklet or notebook and keep them near your desktop for easy reference. |
Editor’s
Right Mouse Button Menu.
Set
up a custom right mouse button menu for quick access to a variety of frequently
used editing functions.
Database
Prompt in the Spatial Data Editor.
Choose
to be automatically prompted to enter attributes when elements are added or
divided while editing.
Designing
Database Forms.
Create
a form from a table for data entry and viewing that includes the fields and
added labels of your choice.
Cosmetic
Database Constraints & Forms.
Change
the field prefix to include spaces and symbols not allowed in field names and
add text after a field.
Operational
Database Constraints.
Place
constraints on fields to control how they are filled out during data entry
operations.
Adding
Frames to Labels.
Include
frames for use with labels and leader lines for automatic (on-the-fly) labels.
Automatic
Labels and Leader Lines. (new feature in RV7.0)
Control
label position and the use of leader lines for automatic (on-the-fly) polygon
labels.
Cross
Sections with Style. (improved feature in RV7.0)
Generate
a cross section with drawing styles that match the original vector object.
RVC
Object Validation. (new feature in RV7.0)
Check
your RVC files and objects for validity and conflicts using Project File
Maintenance.
Copying
Objects.
Copy
files and most object types to a new location using Project File Maintenance.
Zooming
to Full Resolution (1X). (new feature in RV7.0)
Choose
any raster layer in a group or layout to provide the scale for a full resolution
(1X) zoom.
Extract
and Trim DRGs.
Select
the Digital Raster Graphics (DRG) of a scanned map directly in its TIFF format
and automatically extract it to trim off the collar information.
Toggling
Map Grid Tick Mark Colors.
Toggle
between two colors for interior map grid ticks.
Using
Special Characters.
Visually
select and insert special characters from the fonts character map window without
typing the character’s code.
Main
or subsections preceded by the asterisk “*” symbol introduce significant
new processes or features in existing processes released for the first time in TNTmips
RV7.0. You will find more
sections marked in this fashion than usual in this MEMO.
This results from the incorporation into this release of the results of
several longer term background recoding and development projects—some
stretching over several years.
System
Level Changes.
Project Files.
CAD Objects.
Text
elements (in other words, strings) stored in a CAD object can now be assigned
styling and be displayed with similar appearance properties to those available
for vector objects in V6.9.
CAD text elements can now also be multi-lined.
Each text element can have distinct label frames and use one or more
leader lines. Text element
alignment can use multi-point label baselines with straight, exact, and spline
fits of the text to the baseline. A
sample application of these new features of CAD objects will be discussed in
more detail in the section below entitled Sketching.
Raster Objects.
Pyramids.
A global option is available
Support / Setup / Preferences on the Project File tabbed panel to require that
all TNT processes compute full
binary pyramids. Computing full
binary pyramids is the defaualt. You
can turn on a toggle to skip the 2 by 2 pyramid, which will decrease the raster
size by 25% and speed up its creation. However,
having the full set of pyramids will improve the detail and speed up the display
of this raster for you as your zooming approaches 1 to 1.
JPEG2000 Objects.
Raster objects can now be greater than 4 GB when compressed with
JPEG2000. This will be a common
result when mosaicking many orthophoto raster objects into a single JPEG2000
compressed raster object. However,
to use this new capability, your operating system must be new enough to permit
any file, thus a Project File containing this compressed raster object, to
exceed 4 GB and your hard drive must be formatted appropriately.
Drive formats that will permit files, thus Project Files, to exceed 4 GB
are:
-
Windows NT, 2000, XP, 2003:
NTFS;
-
Mac OS X (all versions):
HFS or HFS Extended;
-
Linux (for various flavors):
ext2, ext3, ReiserFS, XFS, and JFS; and
-
Unix:
any current format used.
JPEG Objects.
Auto-linking to directly display and use JPEG format files (*.jpg) is now
supported. If georeference
information is provided it will be used automatically from the companion files
with the same name but with the *.jgw (world file) extension.
PNG Objects.
Auto-linking to directly display and use PNG format files (*.png) is now
supported. If an ICM color profile
or gamma/chromaticity values exist, the link to the PNG file will bring it in as
an ICM color profile subobject in the TNT
link file. If an alpha channel
exists in the PNG file, an opacity mask raster object will be created in the TNT
link file. A color plate entitled Directly
Use PNG Files accompanies this MEMO to illustrate and further discuss
features provided by this new linked format.
Vector
Objects.
Validating
topology in vector objects in RV7.0
is now faster. Considerable effort
has been expended to optimize computations in the steps used on the graphical
elements in a vector object during validation. More
information on this topic can be found in the major section below entitled Validating
Vector Topology. Reconciliation of the contents of complex relational
database structures is still time consuming and will be the focus of future
optimization in the validation engine.
Georeference Subobjects.
The
georeference subobject is now updated to handle more verbose georeference
information. A new georeference
type called manifold is now supported in the georeference subobject.
The georeference subobject has been expanded to handle control point
names and IDs, whether control points are enabled or disabled, linking two
control points together to define a hard edge and linking multiple control
points to define a boundary for use in piecewise models, and support for the new
Coordinate Reference System (CRS). If
the georeference subobject does not contain any of the above features and the
CRS can be represented in the georeference subobject format of TNTmips
6.9 and earlier, the georeference subobject will be usable in earlier
versions of the TNT products.
Maintenance.
Object
Size Information.
The Object Information dialog in Project File Maintenance now reports the
amount of Project File space a geodata object uses and has a separate entry for
the total amount of Project File space for the object and all of the subobjects
of that geodata object.
Object
Warnings.
The hierarchical structure of your geodata is tested whenever a primary
object is being copied or the Project File is being packed.
Yes, it would be appropriate if every TNT
process and activity was designed to prevent violations from being created for
that object type and this is an area for continued effort.
However, violations can occur when data uses older processes, is
manipulated by you outside the TNT
products (for example, via SML or TNTsdk),
or errors occur. If a violation is
detected, a dialog will appear to inform you of the problem(s) and what the
operation being used will or will not do about it.
The
Object Information dialog in Project File Maintenance now also highlights
subobjects in its subobject list that violate the allowed hierarchy structure
for that primary geodata object type. Normally
all information in this dialog is in black text.
Text information about a subobject presented in the color Red indicates
that this subobject is not valid under the parent object for which it is listed.
Magenta text is used as a warning
that the subobject is of the same type as another subobject under the same
parent and that only one is needed and will be used.
Blue text is used as a warning to indicate that the object or subobject
has links to some other, possibly external objects or files, and that they
cannot be found. The colors are
used in a hierarchy at the file level such that if any objects or subobjects
would be shown in red, the file is shown in red but may also contain objects or
subobjects that are shown in magenta or blue.
Vector
Object Standard Properties.
The Edit Object Information dialog accessible from the Edit icon button
in Project File Maintenance for vector objects now provides another means to
optionally enable or disable the maintenance of standard attribute and element
ID tables. Remember that if you
choose to enable these properties to be continuously maintained, this will slow
down processes, such as editing a vector object, which then must continuously
correct and maintain these tables. As
an alternative at any time you can create these standard property tables by
using Process/Vector/Attributes/ Standard Attributes.
* Validating Vector Topology.
Conflation,
what is it?
The
Random House Unabridged Dictionary defines conflate as “to
fuse into one entity, to merge.” From
conflate comes the word conflation that is defined as “the
process or result of fusing items into one entity; fusion; amalgamation.”
This is probably a new word in your vocabulary, but is used by the
technologists in the GIS community in reference to maintaining topology.
Conflation
is a major objective of the TNT
vector validate process, to merge line elements that should be the same into a
single element in order to maintain correct topology.
Incorrect conflation, thus incomplete validation, yields “conflation
errors,” which means that topological errors have been created.
It is not appropriate to refer to these as validation errors in that the
validate process does many other things besides merging graphical elements.
Often conflation errors take the form of long triangles of microscopic
width that are so small as to be practically invisible and might be called “no
seeums” or invisible. This
example of a conflation error can not readily be detected or filtered out using
the TNT polygon area filter as
it’s difficult to detect and its area can not be readily computed due to
limitations in the floating point computations involved.
Conflation
errors are usually only a very few in number and if they go unresolved and
undetected, they may or may not effect some future application with the vector
object. For example, if a single,
microscopic triangle is created, it may never be a source of difficulty unless
by chance in some future merge with another object, a new line happens to bisect
it. When this happens, the error in
the process being used, such as merging vectors, is difficult to find since it
resulted from an undetected condition created somewhere else in the input vector
objects.
Conflation
errors do not necessarily originate in some vector object process within the TNT
products. The import of a
carelessly prepared or very large CAD or shapefile subsequently used to create a
vector object can create a conflation error. It is MicroImages’ responsibility
to insure that conflation errors do not occur and are detected and resolved by
the validate process when they do. Alas,
as your vector object size increases, the probability of the conditions
occurring that could create a conflation error also increases.
Since you are now using much larger, national level or locally high
detail vector objects, the probability of geometric conditions existing that
create a conflation error have increased. Thus
you must now be made aware of this concept, how it comes about, and the
considerable software effort invested in RV7.0
to insure that these errors are detected and resolved every time a vector
object is validated.
| Importing
large CAD or shapefiles for subsequent use as vector objects creates
conditions leading to conflation errors that validate must resolve. |
How
do you “catch it”?
A
common maxim is that “one person’s signal is another’s noise.”
You must pay close attention to the disposition of the small features
created by combining input objects of any type into a polygonal topology vector
object. It may be obvious that you
are combining graphical elements when you use TNT
procedures like Combine and Merge. It
may not be as obvious that this is also happening when you perform an Import,
Copy then Paste, or use the new Extract process to merge several objects of
varying types.
Probably
the most common source of conflation problems are those that occur during the
import of a very large non-topological dataset(s), particularly from ArcView
shapefiles, AutoCAD DXF, and other CAD formats.
Single shapefiles are being imported into TNTmips
that are 1 to 2 gigabytes in size. A
lot of complex data might have been overlaid into one of these files with the
intention that it would only be used for displaying it as graphics from the CAD
or shapefile. Importing these kinds
of files into a vector object with polygonal topology may cause conflation
errors to occur.
Another
way to increase the probability of encountering conflation errors is to make
duplicate versions of a vector object containing numerous polygons.
Using these identical vector objects as templates, you then subject each
separately to a variety of changes, such as editing or merging, that creates
many, many new polygons. These
result in tiny but rare changes in the vertices of the original polygons due to
round off changes in their coordinates. Later,
if these vector objects are recombined, these polygons are no longer absolutely
identical and in some geometric combinations result in microscopic conflation
errors.
Is
it a problem?
The
small topological graphical features that result from conflation when a vector
object is validated can be divided into two groups.
Artifacts: those small features that you decide are indeed
artifacts for your purposes and must subsequently be removed from the vector
object by the polygon area filter. Artifacts
can be easily seen if you zoom into your object many times (for example, 10
times, not 10X). Conflation
Errors: microscopic differences in the features that should have been
treated as identical but do not conflate and yield new error features, primarily
due to the limitations imposed by the mathematical precision of the process.
Often these microscopic features appear due to round-off errors in the
floating point computations on double precision coordinates of previously
identical vertices. They would
still occur even if greater floating point and coordinate precision were used.
They would just be even smaller as they constitute computation noise.
Eliminating or preventing the possible subsequent negative effects of
these tiny conflation errors hiding in a vector object is the responsibility of
MicroImages since we created them.
Can
it be avoided?
Many
new small triangles and polygons are almost always added when overlapping
geometric objects are combined into a new vector object.
These may be noise in your application and can be deleted from the new
vector object using a small polygon filter.
Or, they may be significant new small agricultural plots or movements in
the edges of ecotones (transition edges of ecological communities) with an area
of a few thousand square meters in a vector object covering an entire province
or nation. Another common effect of
combining objects is creation of slightly different 2 point features that might
result from meaningless displacements in duplicated survey or GPS differences.
Conversely these same small displacements can be quite important in a
study of the land subsidence or movement using repeatedly measured polygon
boundaries.
Understanding
what topology is and that it is maintained at a considerable cost in computation
time can help you use procedures that reduce the creation of artifacts and
conflation errors. For example, you
snap to a line between two nodes by any means, such as extending the line or
crossing and intersecting it. No
matter the mathematical precision used in the computation, the new 3rd
node will not be perfectly on the old line at the numbered limits.
This is no particular problem in that vector object.
However, the original line is duplicated in a second vector object.
If the 2 objects are combined the original line and the 2 new lines form
a microscopic triangle. No problem
as this is easily detected in validate. But
it gets harder to do if the original straight line is very long because the
acute angles of the triangle get smaller and smaller.
No problem here as yet either. But
this original line exists in 6 more vector objects since it started in all as a
national or provincial reference boundary.
All of these have other edit activities performed separately on them and
the same original line gets nodes snapped to it at other intermediate positions.
Still not a problem—until all 8 objects are combined at one time.
Now the geometry for this area gets very complicated with even more
microscopic triangles being formed, and in special circumstances it is difficult
to resolve the conflation error that results.
If you think through this example, you can also understand that if the
layers were combined two at a time this error would have a significantly lower
probability of occurrence. For
example combine object 1 and 2 to get object Z and validate.
Next combine object 3 and Z and validate, and so on until object 8 is
combined with the previous result. This
approach would not take any longer in computer time to do.
Furthermore, the order of combining the pairs can also be changed to
avoid errors.
Duplicating
a vector and then editing the various copies can be convenient. It is important
that polygons in all objects be bounded by the same political, project, or
physical boundaries. For example, you have provincial boundaries in a vector
object and create several duplicates of them in new vector objects to be used as
a base for the collection of other graphical features. Subsequently
combining these objects may result in an error in conflation that is not
resolved in the validation and is detected and reported.
When this happens, it is the responsibility of MicroImages to resolve
this complex geometry during validation. However,
we must have your vector objects to reproduce the complex geometry leading to
the error and thus resolve errors of that type in future combination operations.
Can
you see it?
Conflation
error features are so small that you would have to zoom in to a view scale
approaching zero to see them even if you know where to look.
This might be 20 zoom in operations beyond where a “0” scale first
appears as the TNT view scale.
A zoom scale showing as “0” means that you are asymptotically
approaching close to zero (for example, an actual scale of .01).
For example, when you have zoomed in enough to see a conflation error
triangle (perhaps a scale of .0001) and use the measurement tool to measure the
smallest side of the triangle, you might find that it is a less than a
millimeter and even approaching microns on the ground in a vector object with an
extent of 1000 kilometers.
What
is the effect of the cure?
Creating
and continuously maintaining topology is a unique property of the TNT
vector objects. It is maintained in
various processes by the TNT
validation procedure. Significant
effort has been expended in RV7.0 in
improvements in this validate procedure for testing for, detecting, and
resolving hidden conflation errors. These
low-level, “under-the-hood” changes to validate will not be directly visible
to you, but will make subsequent uses of your vector objects, such as their
combination, more reliable especially with large vector objects. Detecting
conflation errors and repairing them for large vector combination operations
does require a lot of CPU time. To
offset these new demands for CPU time, the previously routine validation
operations have many new optimizations.
Thus, you will notice that although validate is doing a lot more work in RV7.0,
it is faster than V6.9 when dealing
with common vector object operations requiring validation.
Alas,
these continuing improvements in validate and its speed are offset by your
insatiable desire to create and work with larger and larger vector objects.
Using larger vector objects comes at a price.
As their size increases, they can slow down validate in a non-linear
manner, especially when there is a requirement to reconcile very complex,
attached relational database structures. Speeding
up this activity in validate will be an improvement that you can expect in DV7.1.
Increasing size also exacerbates the situation by introducing more
conflation errors into your operations that combine vector objects.
Also importing bigger shapefiles, DXF, and similar graphical files
increases the probability that they contain pseudo-duplicated data structures
such as crisscrossing overlapping polygons, which create artifacts and
conflation errors.
Where
are the current capabilities?
Recently
you brought to our attention several problems with large vector objects that
occurred during their combination or subsequent uses.
These were eventually traced to a few conflation errors.
A single undetected conflation error creates difficulties and perhaps
halts validation in a later step. Fortunately
two clients were able to provide MicroImages with complete datasets that
exhibited these problems. These
both have provided the basis for extensive effort software development
and testing to pinpoint the errors and add code to detect them and then to fix
them. Discussing these 2 test cases
will help you become familiar with these microscopic but important topological
issues.
Large
Shapefile Import to a Vector Object.
One
test case was a large shapefile containing contours that was obtained by the
client from the Internet for import into a vector object.
Its size was ~1.4 GB and contained 61,543,650 vertices defining 1,849,392
lines connected by 1,965,573 nodes and 1 table.
Since this shapefile had no polygons, they were formed in validate and
you might assume that it had no intersections.
However, it contained retraced line segments that did initially create
microscopic conflation errors during the validation portion of its import into a
vector object.
Merging
Nation-Sized Vector Objects.
This
test case involved the combination in the merge operation of 8 vector objects
covering an entire medium-sized nation. The
makeup of these vector objects was as follows:
| OBJECT
|
TOTAL SIZE
|
NODES
|
LINES
|
POLYGONS
|
VERTICES
|
TABLES |
| Land
Use
|
744,100,827
|
105,971
|
128,522
|
88,999
|
42,433,362
|
14 |
| Land
Units |
281,452,703 |
181,842 |
269,793 |
106,708 |
10,995,635 |
13 |
| Village |
35,818,752 |
15,231 |
22,544 |
8,246 |
1,630,851 |
23 |
| District |
20,660,673 |
9,517 |
10,453 |
1,866 |
980,289 |
23 |
| Province |
9,726,216 |
4,068 |
4,146 |
1,009 |
429,896 |
23 |
| Irrigation |
3,764,791 |
1,266 |
1,289 |
1,127 |
189,388 |
10 |
| Rainfall |
3,458,113 |
1,116 |
1,140 |
941 |
172,991 |
9 |
| Temperature |
3,568,491 |
1,095
|
1,116 |
923 |
172,493 |
24 |
| MERGED |
2,909,191,917 |
905,032 |
1,661,334 |
790,413 |
57,101,680 |
59 |
The
land use vector object was interpreted from imagery and had polygons and islands
smaller than 1 hectare. The
national boundary was digitized in TNTmips
and was very detailed and complex and used as a template that occurred in all 8
vector objects. The village, district, and provincial boundaries were all three
derived from the same orginal vector object by additional digitizing.
The Land Use object was not only the most complex but was derived in such
a fashion from automated image interpretation so as to have boundaries that
nearly duplicated those of other layers such as the Land Units objects.
Using RV6.9 about 30
conflation errors of several related types were tracked down by adding tests
that report the geographic position were the geometric problem occurs.
The validate process in PV6.9
and RV7.0 was then modified to
detect, identify, and resolve these various classes of errors.
What
if I still have it?
As
part of this effort to make vector validation more robust, a variety of new
error and warning messages were added. The
most valuable are those that report the coordinates of the position of a
topological problem area. Should
such a message occur you can zoom in at that exact coordinate position in
the Spatial Data Editor and see if the complication can be manually edited.
For this reason in RV7.0 all
error messages in every process are now automatically written into the session
log (see below), this log can be sent to MicroImages, along with the vector
object to insure that any new type of conflation problem is detected,
eliminated, and does not occur again.
Remember
you may have to zoom in an excessive amount to a scale of 0 and perhaps way
beyond to even see the offending feature. In the testing documented above, it
was found to be very useful to extract new vector objects for progressively
smaller areas around the reported error position.
Eventually this means that validate runs up to the error point in seconds
or the error simply disappears, which may help you locate the problem feature
and also provides a very small vector object to use to send the problem to
MicroImages.
Tracking Process Performance.
Progress Windows.
The
progress bar in the status window in all processes now displays elapsed time for
each step in the process. From this
you can glance at a complex process and determine how long a process has been
running at a given step. At the end
of the process the progress bar displays the total elapsed time for the entire
process.
Session
Logs.
How Are They Titled?
A
session log is now automatically created for all TNT
processes. The name of the session
log is YYYYMMDD.log where YYYY is the 4-digit year, MM is the 2-digit month and
DD is the 2-digit day of the month. Thus,
the log file created if you use your TNT
product on the date on this MEMO will be named 20041117.log.
All processes you run on the date used for this file name are logged
sequentially in this same log file. The
TNT products will create up to 10
daily log files using this naming convention.
These are not consecutively dated unless you use your TNT
product for 10 consecutive days. Whenever
you start your 11th daily session of your TNT
product, the oldest dated *.log file will be automatically deleted unless you
have renamed it to keep it. A
portion of a session log is listed on an accompanying color plate entitled Session
Log Files.
Where
Are They Located?
The
location of the session log is dependent on the platform and user environment
and security settings.
Mac OS X.
Under Mac OS X various diagnostic log files and log folders such as the
DiskUtility.log and the CrashReported folder are placed automatically in your
user Library/Logs folder. The TNT
products automatically create a MicroImages folder in this Log folder and place
the TNT *.log session log files (for
example, 20041117.log) in this log folder.
The Mac OS X Console log application is used to view, analyze, and print
the contents of any *.log file in this folder.
Any of the 10 TNT session
logs can be automatically opened in this log application program by double
clicking on them.
Windows.
The default location created for these TNT
session log files for Windows XP is in a MicroImages directory automatically
created in your “My Documents” directory.
For other versions of Windows please search for files with the extension
of *.log.
Linux/Unix.
The default location created for these TNT
session log files for various Linux flavors is in userhomedirectory/.MicroImages
What Do They Contain?
The
session log file contains date/time information regarding when the process and
critical libraries were built. Also
recorded are all the messages displayed in progress windows, as well as all
displayed error messages.
Each
of the key steps matching those displayed in the status window is recorded in
the session logs. If the process
fails to complete, then the last step recorded will indicate that the process
failed in the next step. Providing
this session log to MicroImages’ support staff with your error report will
assist them in diagnosing the error condition you are experiencing.
The
cumulative time from the beginning of each step is also recorded for the step
when it is complete. The complete
elapsed time is also recorded for the process.
Of more interest is the additional entry of the incremental time to
complete each step in the process. It
will indicate where a process seems to be too slow and can be included as part
of your inquiry about this to MicroImages’ support staff.
Additional
reference information may be recorded in the session log by various processes
for diagnostic purposes, which is not displayed to you during the use of a
process. It is anticipated that
gradually more and more diagnostic information will be recorded in these session
logs to help you monitor and perfect your operational procedures and MicroImages
diagnose where processes need further optimization or to help you help us
diagnose errors.
New Coordinate
Reference System (CRS).
Background.
The
Starting Point.
MicroImages
uses Claudius Ptolemy (circa 100 to 170 AD) as an “inspirational figure"
as he is credited with inventing the idea that the curved earth could be
represented by projecting it onto a flat surface.
What he conceived of has now proliferated into a myriad of different ways
to represent and record coordinates on a “sort of bumpy spheroid” and then
ways to project them onto a flat surface. Over
the intervening 1900 years scientists, mathematicians, and even politicians have
been arguing over new approaches and which system is best.
Even something as accepted today as the location of the prime meridian
was contested for long periods between nations seeking to maintain control of it
and their maps derived from it. Today
there are almost as many ideas about which system is best as there are
geodesists defining how to do it.
Where
the Early Initiative Came From.
First
nations with empires introduced some level of standardization within their
colonies and their maps. The breakup of empires in the first half of the 20th
century halted this trend. Starting in the 1920s, oil companies took the initial
initiative to collect and collate information about these systems.
Today locating on-shore and off-shore well locations accurately worldwide
requires dealing with many different national and local map projection and datum
definitions. As a result, they had
and still have a huge economic incentive for collecting together information
about the many Coordinate Reference Systems (CRSs) in use and then using it to
accurately convert between all these CRSs.
Military applications did not provide early leadership in this area since
they simply wanted to enforce a single standard CRS, such as UTM, and only
wanted to move one way—from any external materials and information they can
acquire into their standard CRS. They
also are not willing to share information in and about their most accurate CRS
and transformations for international public uses.
Requirements
for Accuracy in Geospatial Systems Keep Increasing.
Today
striving for highly accurate global scale precision in global Coordinate
Reference Systems (CRSs) can be the basis for completely automated flight and
safe landings of a commercial aircraft or a pilotless drone.
Equally accurate requirements for precision in a local CRS can serve as a
basis for legally defining property ownership boundaries rather than the
traditional angles and lengths survey. Lincoln,
NE and Lancaster
County that it dominates now use a
special Transverse Mercator CRS to minimize local errors and increase coordinate
accuracy, and this is the trend for urban areas around the world.
These varied requirements for high
accuracy and recorded precision were not part of the university research and
early commercial applications of image processing or GIS 20 to 30 years ago.
GPS first appeared with limited
availability in the late 1980s. Even at that late date, measuring more accurate
positions of ground coordinates by any other means for the control of imagery
was tedious and prohibitively expensive. The
initial GPS public resolution of 100 meters was poor, equipment was expensive,
and thus it had little immediate impact on the precision required in computer
mapping and image processing, which could easily handle this level of precision
and its immediate potential for improvement.
Landsat satellite imagery also became
readily available in the same time framework.
Its initial coarse 80- then 30-meter ground resolution, coupled with the
limited ability to georeference and orthorectify it, fit nicely with the
available GPS accuracy and the accuracy of then prevalent computer analysis
systems.
Computer hardware of this time period,
desktop or workstation, was also limited in storage, display, and computational
capability to handle the precision and magnitude of these kinds of data sources.
Geodata was scarce and of coarse
accuracy. Composite viewing of
mixed image and map layers was minimal due to the absence of on-the-fly map
projection conversions. The idea of
georeferencing and the concept of managing scale for map and image data was not
common in image processing systems.
When map coordinates were used in GIS
systems, common map projections were used and were accurate enough to be applied
over wide areas. Accuracy requiring datum conversions was not required and
inadequate computer power was available anyway.
Gradual improvements in these areas
coupled with improved geospatial software on minicomputers and soon desktops
lead to the ideas of the 1990s. Producing
orthoimages and image maps from satellite and aerial imagery began with
accuracies in the 10s of meters. DEMs
became available for this purpose and for 3D displays.
Accurate infrastructure and property ownership data began to appear.
GIS data and digital map data (for example, U.S. Census Bureau TIGER
maps) became widely available requiring updates. Fusing
images of varying resolution began. These
and many other applications depended upon and demanded increased accuracy in the
coordinates and conversions being used.
These are some of the factors that
influenced the design of the Coordinate Reference System (CRS) structure,
service, and interface built into the 1980s ancestors of the TNT
products and the contemporary models of other current commercial geospatial
analysis products. Until the onset
of the 21st century, the evolution of these early approaches had
permitted them to be maintained and patched to keep pace with CRS accuracy and
use until quite recently. Standardization
in the exchange of CRS information between products was not of concern until
recent, standardized geodata exchange formats became popular and other technical
users began to demand it and improved accuracies (auto industry, web
applications, and so on).
Today the goal is all-electronic in-car
navigation, hand-held GPS map display position units, highly accurate survey
units, and many more. Only in
rugged field conditions does paper remain the optimal media.
Electronic uses are permitting instant changes / conversions in composite
and 3D viewing, feature position coordinate readouts, combinations of materials
in different reference systems, and so on.
MicroImages’ Previous Coordinate
System Framework.
Managing image and map materials in a
georeferenced form so that they could be merged was the very first objective and
product goal in the design of the structure of the experimental predecessors of TNTmips
in the late 1970s, well before its commercialization as TNTmips
in 1986. In that time framework,
the goal was to produce paper image maps: printed images that matched the
boundaries, scale, and content of associated printed maps.
These early 1980s experimental products were color printed maps of
Landsat imagery georeferenced, warped, and clipped to match a companion USGS
1:24,000 scale topographic map. Before
very long, paper published maps were being scanned and overlaid as transparent
images or overlaid by the available USGS Digital Line Graph digitized line
features and then printed. But PCs
were large, slow, and limited in distribution and no large capacity standard
distribution media (which means, the CD) was available to consider wide scale
electronic use of such material. During these early years, goals were
map-centric and oriented toward producing physical map products.
This early map-oriented start
subsequently meant that TNT was the
first commercial desktop product to handle map projection changes transparently,
whereas today all professional systems are expected to do this and low-cost
units convert data and inputs (for example, GPS) to a common Coordinate
Reference System (CRS). Today in the TNT
products we might start an application by mosaicking a large number of
orthoimages in one or more CRS, add many geometry feature overlay layers in
various other CRSs, and expect them to accurately fit to each other to the
meter, foot, or even less (for example, the enclosed Lincoln Property Viewer TNTatlas).
Introducing New Terminology.
Until recently the term map
projection was convenient and was applied to this objective. Today the
application of geospatial systems to produce physical maps is not their major
use. Therefore thinking of these
requirements to represent coordinates and features as using a map projection
physically bound into that map is on its way out.
We no longer think of geospatial information as something we carry around
in a physical form and, thus, in a fixed map projection.
It is data in a geospatial analysis system, database system, or other
digital form stored with a 3D Coordinate Reference System (CRS).
We expect it to be accurate and usable in that CRS or when transformed
into whatever CRS is requested or appropriate.
If it is older or in some other datum, we expect this to be transparently
converted with accuracy.
Today the concept that your image, map,
and combined geospatial data is in a map projection can be misleading as it
conjures up the idea of a physical map. Today
this information can be thought of as existing and represented in a specific
global CRS and be accurately convertible in real time to some other global or
local Coordinate Reference System. Tomorrow’s end users of geospatial data no
longer require or request map coordinates.
Today’s end user of geodata expects a pleasant voice to tell them to
turn right now at this corner for the nearest gas station, and that the road
will be there. In the next 20 years they will expect the car to do this
automatically. “Road maps and map
projections, weren’t those things that they used back in the late 1900s?”
Adapting To These New Requirements
for Standardization, Accuracy, and Speed.
Change requires change!
Capabilities of hardware and our expectations for a professional
geospatial analysis system have changed greatly in these 20 to 30 years.
That’s what keeps it interesting and challenging.
To keep pace, the early design and adjustments to managing Coordinate
Reference Systems (CRSs) in the TNT
products required a major overhaul undertaken a year ago even before the release
of V6.9.
TNT products and the
associated interface had to be modified in the way they handle all these
projected materials and adhere to accepted standards.
You might think, “but I am working only in the United States,” or “Japan,” or … In fact, the
requirements for more accurate earth surface coordinates in these nations are
some of those that require a new approach.
Higher resolution images, more precise GPS coordinates, new high
precision datums, the use of empirically derived datums, new local and city
projections, secret projections, and other evolving requirements in every nation
require changes and standardization in the way CRSs are managed.
RV7.0 introduces a completely
new subsystem for managing standard and private CRSs into the TNT
products while providing for increased accuracy and speed.
This new conceptual CRS approach is also discussed and illustrated in the
accompanying color plate entitled Spatial Referencing in TNT.
ISO
19111:2003 Standard.
Purpose.
Geodesists,
surveyors, physical geographers, and other related scientists have devised a
wide variety of map projections and Coordinate Reference Systems.
Many of these can be easily transposed to a local area to provide an
accurate local fit. Others are designed for regional or global applications.
Often their selection depends upon the size and shape of the area they will be
used in.
Recently
the Open Geospatial Consortium (OGC) took the initiative to collect and
standardize the definition of elements (not the actual values) needed to
describe as many Spatial Reference Systems as possible.
These are documented in their document OGC 03-073r1 entitled Topic 2:
Spatial Referencing by Coordinates and located at www.opengeospatial.org/specs/.
In
2003 the OGC was able to get these definitions adopted as ISO standard
19111:2003 entitled Spatial Referencing by Coordinates.
The ISO, or International Organization for Standardization, is a
network of institutions from 146 nations organizing, testing, and publishing
worldwide standards. The complete
contents of this ISO standard containing all its coordinate reference system
definitions can be purchased from www.iso.ch/iso/en/CatalogueDetailPage.CatalogueDetail?CSNUMBER=26016&ICS1=35.
Abstract of ISO 19111:2003 is as follows:
“ISO
19111:2003 defines the conceptual schema for the description of spatial
referencing by coordinates. It
describes the minimum data required to define one-, two-, and three-dimensional
coordinate reference systems. It
allows additional descriptive information to be provided.
It also describes the information required to change coordinate values
from one coordinate reference system to another.
“ISO
19111:2003 is applicable to producers and users of geographic information.
Although it is applicable to digital geographic data, its principles can
be extended to many other forms of geographic data such as maps, charts, and
text documents.”
Geospatial
analysis systems adhering to ISO 19111:2003 can identify the spatial reference
system and standard definitions of the elements used to describe the geodata
files, tables, layouts, web content, and so on created by any other system.
For this purpose, version RV7.0
of the TNT products now defines
spatial reference systems according to this standard.
| ISO
19111:2003 does not supply the values used with these definitions.
This is the task of geodesists and not a standards committee.
|
Definitions.
This
ISO standards document also provides some definitions of the standard terms used
in connection with discussing spatial reference systems. These are now the terms
that will be used to refer to these concepts and new features in the TNT
products.
Coordinate
Reference System.
A
coordinate system that is related to the real world by a datum (for geodetic and
vertical datums, it will be related to the Earth).
Coordinate
System.
Set
of mathematical rules for specifying how coordinates are to be assigned to
points.
Coordinate
Conversion.
Change
of coordinates, based on a one-to-one relationship, from one coordinate
reference system to anther based on the same datum.
Example: between geodetic and Cartesian coordinate systems or between
geodetic coordinates and projected coordinates, or changes of units as from
radians to degrees or feet to meters. (A
coordinate conversion uses parameters that have constant values.)
Coordinate
Transformation.
Change
of coordinates from one coordinate reference system to anther coordinate
reference system based on a different datum through a one-to-one relationship.
(A coordinate transformation uses parameters that are derived empirically
by a set of points with known coordinates in both coordinate reference systems.)
Datum.
Parameter
or set of parameters that serve as a reference or basis for the calculation of
other parameters. (A datum defines
the position of the origin, the scale, and the orientation of the coordinate
system.)
Map
Projection.
Coordinate
conversion from a geodetic coordinate system to a plane.
Projected
Coordinate System.
Two-dimensional
coordinate system resulting from a map projection.
Geodetic
Coordinate System and Ellipsoidal Coordinate System.
Coordinate
System in which position is specified by geodetic latitude, geodetic longitude
and (in the three dimensional case) ellipsoidal height.
EPSG
Geodetic Parameters.
From
the ISO abstract you learn that adopting 19111 standardizes how each Coordinate
Reference System (CRS) is defined and the elements needed for this to transform
it to other CRSs. It standardizes
how each CRS is to be identified (name, units of measure, datum, …) and what
geodetic parameters are needed to use it (position of origin such as central
meridian and latitude, unit of measure, scale factor, …).
It does not standardize in any way how this information and the necessary
values for these parameters are referenced or stored.
This is left up to each geospatial analysis system.
It also does not provide any values for these geodetic parameters.
Geodesists
and mathematicians derive, propose, and adopt geodetic parameters for existing
and new map projections, datums, CRSs, and transformations.
From these are derived the required numeric values for the elements
defined for the spatial reference systems by ISO 19111.
Someone then needs to decide if these derivations are useful and correct
and provide them in an organized form and readable format for use with the
definitions in ISO 19111. There
also has to be a mechanism for correcting and changing parameters to adjust
their precision and to add new ones.
Early
US petroleum exploration and drilling
activities had the vast North American continent available to them.
They had the good fortune to find coordinated multi-national mapping
programs and a coordinated strategy concurrently being put into place.
However, early European national and private petroleum companies found
that even in their own nations and neighbors they had to deal with problems of
differing, secret Coordinate Reference Systems (CRSs), datums, and levels of
cooperation. To compete with large
multinational companies, this situation gradually led them to a cooperative
spirit with regard to assembling and sharing this information.
Eventually these efforts gave rise in 1986 to the European Petroleum
Survey Group (EPSG) to collect, maintain, and provide these geodetic parameters
for thousands of CRSs. As a result,
the widely accepted standard source for the numeric values used for each ISO
standard spatial reference system is the European Petroleum Survey Group (EPSG)
database. From their website at
www.epsg.org the mission statement and objectives of the EPSG in this area are
stated as follows.
“The
European Petroleum Survey Group (EPSG) was formed in 1986. It
comprises specialist surveyors, geodesists and cartographers from Oil Companies
based in Europe
and having international operations. Meetings are held twice yearly to discuss
survey and positioning topics within those areas of oil industry business where
cooperation is generally agreed to be mutually beneficial.
“A
geodesy working group maintains a relational database of
EPSG geodetic parameters.
“The
EPSG aims to help member companies, and where relevant others, by the
dissemination of information. The information will improve oil industry survey
practices and procedures, will contribute to increased efficiency, enhanced
quality, improved safety of operations and to the protection of the environment.
“Through
its membership of specialist professionals, the EPSG is qualified to offer
collective expert advice to member companies within the fields of geodesy,
surveying, positioning and cartography where they relate to oil exploration,
development and production operations.”
“EPSG,
through its geodesy working group, maintains and publishes a data set of
parameters for coordinate reference system and coordinate transformation
description. The data is supported through formulae given in
Guidance Note number 7 (...link obsolete...). The EPSG Geodetic Parameters have been included as
reference data in the GeoTIFF data exchange specifications, in the Iris21 data
model and in Epicentre (the POSC data model). The parameters are maintained in
an MS Access relational database and may be
downloaded from this site.” (...link obsolete...)
RV7.0
of the TNT products now uses the
current EPSG V6.6 geodesy parameters released 20 October 2004
for this purpose.
Provisions for integrating their 6 month updates into your TNT
products are discussed below. Since
the ISO definitions are standard and the parameters are found in this common
source, the Coordinate Reference System, datum, map projection, and other
characteristics can be established in the TNT
products for geodata provided from geospatial analysis systems that have adopted
these same standards.
Expectations
in Using a Standard Coordinate Reference System (CRS).
Standardization
of Information.
It
is up to the developer of a geospatial software product to determine how the
standard ISO definitions and associated EPSG geodetic parameters are stored,
accessed, and used. All MicroImages’ TNT
products, Oracle’s Spatial Layers, and GeoTIFF files use these ISO definitions
and EPSG geodetic parameters. If,
as is the current trend and case in these products, each of their georeferenced
files provides access to the identity of its ISO 19111 Coordinate Reference
System (CRS), any other compliant geospatial system can use the same CRS for its
activities with that file. This
assumes of course that each system can read and interpret the data content in
that file. For example, MicroImages
autolink to, or import of, a GeoTIFF file finds and uses this standard CRS
information. It similarly includes
the proper CRS information in the proper place in an exported GeoTIFF.
If, as is also the trend, the geodetic parameters in EPSG are
incorporated in, kept up-to-date, and used within each system, then the TNT
products are using the same geodetic parameters and CRS used for coordinate
system, map projection, and related spatial activities on that file whether it
is internal, linked, imported, or returned from some server.
Identical
Results are Still Not Guaranteed.
Even
though these standards are in place and correctly used to define a particular
Coordinate Reference System (CRS), the internal accuracy of the use of this
coordinate system will vary slightly between systems. For
example, unless the CRS of a linked GeoTIFF file is identical to the desired
projection of the composite view, it may be converted as used to match the
reference CRS of the TNT view using
a fast but approximate affine transformation.
Another system may use some other transformation or approach to rapidly
adjust for differences in the CRS layers in a composite view, thus achieving
varying success in matching the geodata layers in the view.
On the other hand, coordinate readouts of a point in TNT
have a high level of precision as these values are derived by using the
geodetic-based transformation of that point for each layer.
Conversions of geodata between CRSs may be slightly different in each
system at the highest precision depending exactly on its implementation of map
projection and transformation equations in that system.
New
TNT Spatial Referencing (SR)
Service.
Implementation.
MicroImages
stores the ISO Coordinate Reference System (CRS) definitions and associated EPSG
geodetic parameters in XML in a reference file (spatref.xml).
Since this is XML, it could be used in other non-TNT
programs.
A
built in software module called the TNT
Spatial Reference (SR) service accesses and uses the contents of this reference
file in every TNT process in any TNT
product and is automatically available for use in your SML
script or your program developed with the TNTsdk.
It will also subsequently be used by the TNTserver.
Also
included in this SR service’s reference file are the additional Coordinate
Reference Systems (CRSs) and geodetic parameters accumulated by MicroImages over
the past 20 years. These earlier definitions and associated parameters are
retained from V6.9 and, along with
new CRSs from the EPSG database, make up a collection of TNT
“predefined CRSs.” These
predefined CRSs and “private CRSs” that you defined for your private use are
also used by the new Spatial Reference (SR) service. Provision has also been
made for the SR service to use new and also private CRSs not included in the
ISO/EPSG standard approach. Thus, this SR service permits you to mix and move
your geodata between these standard predefined and private CRSs.
It also provides the framework for the potential addition of other CRSs,
such as those that are geocentric and gravity-related.
For example, at the moment MicroImages is experimenting with the use of
celestial CRSs (ascension, declination, …) and their associated parameters.
| The
TNT Spatial Reference (SR) service
determines how the TNT products
get and use ISO Coordinate Reference System
(CRS) definitions and geodetic parameters or those added for you by
MicroImages.
|
Access
to Extensive New Collection of CRSs.
The
incorporation of the ISO standard and EPSG database into the TNT
products has added thousands of new CRSs. These
consist of predefined combinations of coordinate systems and datums,
combinations that you mate together, and conversions between CRSs.
As a result it is much more likely that you will find the CRS you require
already predefined and directly available to select for use in a TNT
process. If not, then you can
select the coordinate system and datum projection separately to define a CRS and
the TNT Spatial Reference service
will combine them together for all your subsequent uses of this CRS.
Accurate
Datum to Datum Transformations.
New datums are not often created.
Considerable effort and new scientific advances in measuring and
representing the shape of the earth are required for change in this area.
For example, today these geodetic measurements require new and more
precise satellite systems. Then
there is the necessity of getting worldwide acceptance of the new datum, which
means getting wide scale acknowledgement that it is needed.
So new datums are infrequently encountered except in narrow, scientific
endeavors for special purposes or for nationalist reasons.
However,
periodically new datums have been adopted because they more accurately describe
the shape of the earth. The
precision and relative accuracy of the measurements of coordinates in a CRS can
be increased if a more accurate datum is used.
For these and other reasons, you will find new geodata sources (for
example, new high resolution orthoimagery) use a newer datum than some older
geodata you need to use as well (for example, older maps).
Achieving accurate coordinates and results in your project requires that
all computational activities on your geodata refer to it using a common datum.
V6.9
of the TNT products automatically
converted coordinates from other datums to the WGS84 (World Geodetic System
1984) datum when the objects being combined were in different datums.
Then, if required, a reverse conversion was used from WGS84 to get
coordinates and the combined results using the new datum. The same procedure was
used when an object was deliberately converted between CRSs using two different
datums, neither of which was WGS84. WGS84 as a common datum has been popular
since 1984 when it was introduced for use with satellite imagery and orthophotos.
Due to its popularity, there are many coordinate transformations to and from it.
Thus, using it as a common datum for all geodata is a widely accepted
approach, especially in low-cost products where maintaining accuracy to 1 meter
or better was not needed when converting from datum to datum and had not yet
become an issue.
RV7.0
no longer necessarily uses the WGS84 datum as an intermediate step when
converting between two other datums. The
new Spatial Reference (SR) service uses the accurate transformations associated
with the respective CRSs for direct coordinate conversion between datums such as
ED50 to ETRS89, Tokyo
to JGD2000, and AGD66 to GDA94.
Provision has also been made in the standard CRS structure for adding
more direct conversion transformations as the EPSG and other geodesists define
them. This direct datum to datum
conversion of coordinate systems not only increases the accuracy, but is faster
since the two previous transformations (one into WGS84 and one out of WGS84) are
replaced by one direct transformation if it has been defined. Geodesists and/or
mathematicians can also disagree on the best transformation between datums and
then publish and promote alternatives. As
a result the new SR service lets you choose which to use if one or more
coordinate transformation is available for the pair of CRSs.
If the needed datum transformation(s) are not available, then WGS84 is
used as an intermediate as in V6.9.
Maintains
Native Measurement Units.
A
Coordinate Reference System
(CRS) definition specifies the measurement units used for its coordinate axes
and associated computations. The
new Spatial Reference (SR) service now imports or creates geodata objects in the
native measurement units defined by its CRS.
Coordinates of georeference points are no longer automatically converted
to meters when stored with the object as was the case in V6.9.
RV7.0 uses the native
coordinates matching the CRS.
6
Month Updates.
Every
6 months EPSG issues Microsoft Access tables to update their geodetic parameters
to refine their precision and to define new Coordinate Reference Systems (CRSs),
associated datums, and transformations. MicroImages
will acquire this EPSG database and integrate its additions into the spatref.xml
resource file. Every weekly patch
issued for the TNT products includes
the latest spatref.xml resource file to update the CRSs available to the Spatial
Reference (SR) service. In this
manner, any new EPSG additions and changes and the new CRSs you request
MicroImages to add will be immediately available in the weekly patch for the
current version of the TNT product.
These
EPSG updates and new Coordinate
Reference System (CRS) additions will not be incorporated into the spatref.xml
file and patches for earlier versions of the TNT
products (for example, no changes to the spatref.xml file for PV7.0
after RV7.1 is officially released).
The easiest way to keep up with the changes in the CRSs used by
MicroImages and other systems using the ISO/EPSG standard is to maintain a
current subscription and use the current TNT
products.
New
Interface.
Coordinate
Reference System Window.
All TNT
RV7.0 processes use the new TNT
Spatial Reference (SR) service for object to object, screen to object, linking,
import, export, and any other geodata changes requiring a Coordinate Reference
System (CRS), coordinate conversion and transformation, and map projection
operations. As a result all
processes now use this new tabbed interface for selection / setup to control
these operations. This new
uniformity coupled with these thousands of new choices and combinations require
a new user interface. This
interface must also permit you to define, name, and save private Coordinate
Reference Systems (CRSs) and selected datum transformations.
For this purpose a new Coordinate
Reference System window with tabbed panels replaces the existing Map Projection
/ Coordinate System window. This
window is illustrated and its tabbed panels described in the accompanying color
plate entitled Coordinate Reference System Window.
The material covered in this and the 3 following color plates on
this topic will be assembled and expanded into a new tutorial reference booklet
on Coordinate Reference Systems since the current tutorial booklet on Map
Projections is temporarily out-of-date.
All
these new capabilities and options for TNT
Coordinate Reference Systems come at a price. You
will have to learn to use this new and unfamiliar user interface to select and
control these new operations. At
first this window and its operation will appear more complicated as by necessity
it has to be designed to deal with many new options to control the new TNT
Spatial Reference (SR) service. Its
use will take some patience and getting used to.
MicroImages is interested in hearing your suggestions for its improvement
and simplification of this activity keeping in mind that it must still cover all
these many objectives.
Predefined
Tabbed Panel.
The
first and default tabbed panel in this window is labeled Predefined.
It provides a hierarchical tree structure that you can use to navigate to
any one of the thousands of predefined Coordinate Reference Systems (CRSs).
The main categories of this structure are Recent, Global and Regional,
and National and Local. The Recent
grouping will contain the last 10 CRSs you have used with the most recent at the
top. If you constantly use the same
CRS, you will only need to reselect it each time from this list.
If you are looking for another CRS, you will need to traverse into this
geographically structured hierarchy until you can find and select it.
This and additional options for setting up other CRSs using this tabbed
panel are explained and illustrated on the accompanying color plate entitled Predefined
Coordinate Reference Systems.
Datum
Tabbed Panel.
When you select a complete predefined
Coordinate Reference System (CRS) from the first tabbed panel, it has a datum
already associated with it. However,
you may wish to change to some other datum.
In addition, the Predefined list also includes global and regional
Coordinate Systems (such as UTM zones or latitude / longitude coordinates) that
can be used with any datum and thus require you to select the datum you wish to
use to create your CRS. The datum
tabbed panel presents a scrolling list of the available datums.
The datum automatically associated with the CRS or that you previously
selected for this CRS is automatically highlighted in this list.
Use this list to select any datum you wish to use in the CRS.
If the datum you have selected has direct
transformations to other datums available, you will be asked to select one from
a new list shown in this same panel. If
the new target datum is not on the list, the transformation will not be direct
and will be a two step operation using the WGS84 datum as an intermediary.
These datum selection operations are illustrated in the accompanying
color plate entitled Predefined Coordinate Systems Requiring Datum Selection.
Create
a Private Coordinate
Reference System.
Encountering new datums is infrequent,
but just the opposite is true for Coordinate Reference Systems (CRSs) and/or
their definitions. You could easily
create a new CRS for your site, especially if it’s large, such as a major
hydroelectric project or even a city-wide high precision GPS vehicle tracking
network. You could do this by
choosing a CRS and altering the geodetic parameters to center it on your site.
Frequently you will find that someone for some reason has already done
this and you must deal with geodata that cannot be selected from the thousands
of combinations presented by the new TNT
Spatial Reference (SR) service. The
accompanying color plate entitled Custom Coordinate Reference System Setup
illustrates how this is done using the new CRS interface.
(Note, it was decided to call these Private, not Custom CRSs after this
color plate was printed so private = custom.)
You can also deal with these situations by getting your CRS added to the TNT
SR service via the next weekly patch discussed above.
Published
Additions.
Some of the 93 counties in Nebraska have a locally centered Transverse Mercator Coordinate Reference System (CRS).
City/county officials and the surveyors who work in these counties may
use it routinely, especially if they have major urban areas such as Lincoln City
and Lancaster County combinations. Rural
Nebraska counties may not need that local accuracy and use the generic large UTM zone or
each state’s state-wide CRS system called the State Plane CRS.
If you encounter these kinds of local conditions, it is best to get their
CRS incorporated directly into the TNT
product. This is also the best
approach if this new CRS will be widely used in your geographical area. Adding
a new CRS to the definitions used by the TNT
products is easy via the patch procedure if you provide the required parameters
in sufficient accuracy. You should
also provide some sample data points with paired coordinates for testing our
implementation of any new CRS. These
are used to test the implementation (parameters and coding) by using them with
the new CRS in the TNT Map
Calculator since it uses the common TNT
Spatial Reference (SR) service.
Private
Additions.
The second alternative is to create,
name, and save your own private Coordinate Reference System (CRS).
You might choose this route because no one but you would be interested in
using this CRS. Or, you might
choose this method because the organization you are working for or with does not
want this CRS to be publicly available. Once
you have set up and named a private CRS, it will appear for selection in a new
major category named Saved on the Predefined tabbed panel.
The steps in adding private Coordinate Reference Systems are illustrated
in the accompanying color plate entitled Custom Coordinate Reference System
Setup. Private CRSs that you
set up this way are defined and saved in a separate XML reference file (savedcrs.xml)
that is not changed or overwritten when you patch or update your TNT
product.
Adding
a private Coordinate
Reference System (CRS) and corresponding parameters for use in the TNT
Spatial Reference (SR) service does not violate the concept of adhering to ISO
standardization. You still need
these projections to deal with your local and special situations within the TNT
products.
Backward
Incompatibility of New Coordinate Reference Systems.
Minor inconvenience of backward
incompatibility is not new.
To avoid producing an irresolvable error
in the operation of V6.9, Project
Files are marked by RV7.0 as
unusable and backward incompatible if they contain an object using a new feature
unknown to V6.9.
This same procedure has been used in previous releases. For
example a Project File created in V6.9
in a TNTatlas was marked as unusable
in some earlier versions if you specified in the TNTatlas
wizard that only the Software Access Key used to create it could gain access to
objects in that Project File. If
you attempt to use such a Project File or one containing such an object in an
earlier incompatible TNT version, it
is then not recognized as a Project File and can not be selected in that older
version. In the past this has
seldom been a problem since it was obvious to you that you were using a new
feature and that the object would not be backward compatible with earlier TNT
releases. You simply kept that
object in its own separate Project File from any other objects, restricted its
use to the current version, or did not use the feature.
But
temporarily of more significance.
RV7.0
provides 3 new features that if used with an object will make that Project File
unusable in any earlier version: using label frames and leader lines in a CAD
object; georeferencing a manifold object; and selecting a previously undefined
Coordinate Reference System (CRS) for any object.
The first 2 pose no special problem as it is obvious that these are not
usable in an earlier version of the TNT
products, are new and special features, and they are easily isolated to their
own Project File if you intend to move any associated objects back and forth to
an earlier version. However, the
CRS is used for every geodata object in the TNT
products. This, coupled with the
many new CRSs added in RV7.0,
creates circumstances in which this backward incompatibility is more likely to
occur and, thus, mark that Project File as backward incompatible.
This might occur because you are using both V6.9
and RV7.0 on the same machine, have
several TNT licenses at different
versions, or supply a Project File to someone else with an earlier license.
All the Coordinate Reference Systems
(CRSs) used in objects in V6.9 are
recognized and usable in RV7.0.
Correspondingly all the CRSs available in V6.9
are still available in RV7.0 and, if
selected for an object in RV7.0, it
and its Project File can still be used in V6.9.
However, no provisions were made in
V6.9 or earlier versions of the TNT
products to even recognize that an unknown new CRS available in RV7.0
has been used in an object. As a
result, V6.9 and earlier can not
even inform you that a new CRS has been detected and the Project File can
not be selected.
| Caution:
Picking a completely new and previously undefined Coordinate Reference
System (CRS) in RV7.0 will create
a Project File that can not be used in V6.9
or earlier. |
At the bottom of the Coordinate Reference
System Window to help you avoid this situation you are presented with a means to
tell the TNT Spatial Reference (SR)
service how to deal with this condition every time the SR service is used in any
process. It permits you to select this global “Compatibility with TNT version
6.9 and earlier” from 3 options.
Warn
if not usable.
This is the initial default and every time you choose a Coordinate
Reference System unknown to V6.9 you
will be warned that the new object and Project File it is in will not be usable
in V6.9 or earlier.
If you are working primarily in RV7.0
and seldom use Project Files in earlier versions, then this may be your best
choice.
Required.
This setting will prevent you from selecting any new Coordinate Reference
System that is not available for use in V6.9
and earlier. If you are frequently
moving Projects Files between RV7.0
and earlier versions for some reason, you should use this setting.
Not
checked.
Use this setting if you do not have any earlier version of your TNT
product installed and do not intend to do so.
Will become insignificant again in
future releases.
About this point you are asking, if only
one object in a Project File uses a new feature, such as an unknown new
Coordinate Reference System, why does this make the entire file backward
incompatible? Previously this never
posed an issue for you or MicroImages with earlier versions for the reasons
already noted. In part this was
also due to the fact that before the current efficient TNT
patching system and your access to it by a broadband connection, you were less
inclined to maintain and use two versions of your TNT
products (for example, The Tried and True and Something New).
Thus, no provision was incorporated in any earlier version of the TNT
product to record with the object the minimal version that is needed to use the
object.
Recording the version of the TNT
product that created or modified a geodata object has been added to RV7.0
for future use. For example, if DV7.1
or RV7.1 adds a new feature to an
object making it unusable in V7.0 or
earlier, this restriction will be understood and applied by V7.0
at the object level, and not the Project File level.
Thus, adding an object with new features restricting it for use in the
current or new versions, would mark only that object in the file as incompatible
for the earlier versions. V7.0,
and future versions, can then recognize this, deny access to that object only,
and tell you that the object’s use is not permitted in the older version you
are running due to new features. However,
it will not be able to tell you what new feature you have used to create this
condition since they are unknown at the time that the earlier version of the TNT
product was created. But, V6.9
exists and has no ability to recognize this object level version tracking system
added to RV7.0.
Altering V6.9 for this
purpose via a patch would be complicated and risky.
After a couple of additional new releases, this will no longer be a
problem at the Project File level and any new Coordinate Reference System can be
used without these complications.
And
forward compatibility is ensured.
As you have come to expect, great effort
is expended in ensuring forward compatibility of your TNT
object and Project Files to protect your investment in data creation and its
analysis. As in the past, RV7.0
of the TNT products maintains
forward compatibility for all your existing Project Files created with earlier
versions. As new procedures and
features are added to the TNT
products, the associated processes continue to recognize and use older Project
Files and objects created earlier. Modifying
these earlier objects in a new version may automatically update them to support
their use with improved performance in newer versions unless you deliberately
prevent this from happening for backward compatibility.
For example, pyramid layers are added to raster objects and optimization
applied to vector objects automatically to improve these objects performance for
both display and analysis.
Miscellaneous.
At
the request of various clients, the following new projection methods are
available:
-
General Oblique Mercator for various locations,
-
Krovak Oblique Conic Conformal for the
Czech Republic and Slovakia,
-
Lambert Conformal Conic single standard parallel for
SE Asia,
-
Transverse Mercator South oriented for
South Africa,
-
Bonne, and others.
A
high-accuracy grid method has been added for converting between Tokyo
and JDG2000 datums.
Shape Objects.
The
concept of the use of a shape object in a TNT
Project File was first introduced in RV6.9
as a work in progress that continues in RV7.0.
The design of a shape object is database-centric, that is, it has the easy
maintenance of a complex database structure as its principal goal.
Primitive graphical data elements (points, lines, arcs, …) are treated
as fields in the tables. The
relationship and information about how these primitive elements are assembled
into features is maintained in the database structure.
Why
Not Use a Vector Object?
A
vector object must maintain very rigorous topological relationships to enable
advanced spatial analysis. It can
be thought of as designed to be area- or topology-centric.
Maintaining attributes for these features in an external linked database
can be difficult especially when that database must be secure and/or controlled
by others. This is easier to
accomplish if the attributes and other database structures are in TNT’s
internal relational database format, but this may not meet your project’s
requirements.
Why
Not Use a CAD Object?
CAD
objects, usually imported from external CAD files or captured as sketches, have
no topological features and can be very complex in graphical content with many
lines and polygons constantly crisscrossing and in very close proximity.
The CAD object has been designed to be graphics-centric.
CAD files and, thus, CAD objects maintain no concept of area in a
geographic sense. Very complex relationships between elements can also occur in
an external CAD file and any associated database.
These can be difficult to preserve when converted into a vector object as
they create complex topology due to the many overlapping features and rendered
blocks, which in turn create cumbersome relational database structures.
A CAD object is closer to a shape object than a vector object but is
designed to optimize its graphical structure, geometry, and contents and not its
relational database structure.
Why
Use a Shape Object?
When
fully implemented and supported, this database-centric design of a shape object
is most effective for use with geodata layers whose extensive attribute data is
being maintained in external databases (for example, Oracle, DB2, MySQL, and
others). In these cases, the
graphical elements can be maintained in the shape object without topology while
the tabular material can remain in the external database or is imported into the
shape object for use in the TNT
internal relational database structure. Alternatively,
all the original tabular and associated graphical elements can be retained in
their original external structure and a link, or wrapper, automatically created
when they are selected for use as a layer in a TNT
view or as input to an analysis process. This
is the initial use of the shape object to support the efficient and direct use
of database-centric geodata structures of other systems such as Oracle Spatial
Layers, ESRI shapefiles, MapInfo
TAB files, and others.
Linking
to a shapefile in V6.9 treated it as
a CAD object and had to take the time to set up all the database associations
between the elements and the records. The
shell of a shape object was introduced in RV6.9
to provide for the direct link and use of Oracle Spatial Layers.
RV7.0 uses this same shape
object concept to provide a faster and more flexible link to a shapfile. This
new link file contains a description of how the shapefile is to be interpreted
to make it respond as a shape object to the TNT
processes. It also provides the
basis for storing information to enhance the use of the shapefile to provide
features not originally supported by the shapefile. Several of these are
provided by the new, fast link to shapefiles and are discussed in the section
just below entitled Direct Display of ESRI Shapefiles.
2D
Display.
Direct Display of ESRI Shapefiles.
Linked Via Shape Objects.
Shapefiles are now widely used as a
public means to transfer graphical geodata and associated attributes especially
on the Internet. As a result, many
software products of varying quality are creating them.
More and more shapefiles are being encountered that do not conform to the
published ESRI specifications but may work in an ESRI product due to
undocumented flexibility, features, or adjustments.
Changes to the TNT products
to detect and accommodate these non-standard features in shapefiles are made as
they are encountered, and these adjustments become available to you through the
weekly patches to the TNT products.
However, shapefiles are now being encountered that can not be used in the
appropriate ESRI product. Solutions
to these cases are not guaranteed and they may need to be returned to their
source for improvement.
RV6.9
permitted the selection of shapefiles as layers for use in displays or importing
including their area, line, and point styling.
As noted in the section above entitled Shape Objects, the direct
display capability for shapefiles is now handled via a link through a TNT
shape object rather than a CAD object. This
and associated changes have enabled several new and useful features to be
supported for linked shapefiles. These
features are all enabled via the link file and the original shapefile is not
altered and can be used with its original characteristics and limitations in an
ESRI or other product. Shapefiles
can still be imported and converted to vector objects with topology or CAD
objects. As yet they can not be
imported to an internal shape object since the use of this new object type in
other processes is not yet fully supported.
The shape object Project File created for
this link is merely a shell. It
contains the equivalent TNT styles,
font identities or substitutions, additional tables, table indexes, and other
reference information to make this external shapefile or an Oracle Spatial Layer
appear to all TNT processes as if it
was an internal shape object in a Project File.
(For a more detailed discussion of the use of the shape object as a link
to Oracle Spatial layers see the MicroImages MEMO entitled Release of RV6.9
of the TNT Products.) This is
the same approach used in the transparent linking to and direct display of
images in JPEG, JPEG2000, MrSID, and other raster formats.
Just as for shape objects, these links make the external raster appear to
the TNT processes as if it were
actually an internal raster object.
Faster Links.
The
most significant benefits of linking to shapefiles via a shape object is that it
is much faster as it does not import or change any of the contents of the
shapefile. The previous linking in V6.9
via a CAD object was slow as it had to reconcile element and attribute
associations. In RV7.0
selecting a shapefile as a layer for a complex view will now create its link
sufficiently fast so as to make it unnoticeable that a link is actually being
built. And, with the addition of
the new legend for the shape elements and the standard TNT
features such as map projection conversion, the direct use of shapefiles is
quite transparent! Shapefiles can
still be converted to vector or CAD objects by importing them.
Coordinate Reference System.
Shapefiles
may, or may not be accompanied by the ESRI projection file (*.prj).
This is the problem with having many component files for your project.
If this file is not present, then the shapefile may be in latitude and
longitude coordinates or may not have any projection.
When a *.prj file is available, it is used to establish the Coordinate
Reference System (CRS) in the shape link file.
If no *.prj is present, then it is assumed that the shapefile is in
latitude and longitude coordinates as long as its coordinates are in the range
of latitude and longitude (which means, +/-90 and +/-360, respectively).
If no *.prj is provided and the coordinates exceed these limits, then the
shapefile is assumed to be in an engineering or arbitrary CRS.
It can be displayed alone or with other layers that are present, which
probably are in the same engineering CRS. However,
if other layers are added to such a view that are using a projection, then a
warning about mixing arbitrary or nongeoreferenced layers with georeferenced
layers will appear.
Legend Entries.
An important addition created by linking
to shapefiles via a shape object is gaining access to the styles used in the AVL
style file (*.avl) associated with the shapefile. The styles accompanying the
shapefile in its *.avl file were first used in V6.9
to style its elements and have been expanded to support their use in the
LegendView especially via network linked files.
Now these styles are used to create legend entries in the LegendView,
which appear and behave just the same as those for an internal vector object.
Linked shapefiles also now use the
built-in advanced TNT styling
procedures and these enhance the appearance and usefulness of the AVL legend
entries for that layer. A single
AVL style can be subdivided into new style entries, such as a population range.
Or, 25 colors might be assigned as styles in the AVL file to 200 national
boundary polygons creating 200 legend entries with the duplicate colors
repeated. The LegendView process
can detect this, make 25 color entries, and place multiple country names next to
each color. Both of these and other
related improvements applied via a linked shapefile and its associated ArcView
legend are illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Direct
Display of Shapefiles/Legends/Styles.
Alas, the needed AVL style file may
be missing when the shapefile has been created particularly outside the ESRI
Products and where the third party product is using the shapefile merely as a
convenient format in which to deliver graphical data.
If the shapefile is provided without its AVL styles, then TNT
styles can be assigned to the elements.
| Note:
Many shapefiles are being created to hold graphical geodata and associated
attributes but are not provided with associated styles in an AVL style file. |
DataTips and Multiple Tables.
Shapefiles have only a one-to-one linkage
between the elements and the attributes. A
TNT shape object has an implied
one-to-one linkage permitting an element to derive information directly from
more than one attached table. The
shape object link to a shapefile is used to define and contain any modifications
of this type, such as creating additional tables for the shapefile elements.
This permits the advanced features used for database attributes in TNTmips
to be used with these layers without altering the original shapefile.
These include adding additional tables, creating virtual tables, creating
single and multiple line DataTips, and other unique TNT
features for this linked shape layer as illustrated in the accompanying color
plate entitled Direct Display of
Shapefiles/Legends/Styles.
Now, when a shapefile is linked to and used in a TNTmips
view, it can be set up to provide the kinds of features you expect to have
available.
Unit Conversion.
If a numeric value is needed in multiple
units in a shapefile, it has one field for each converted unit.
TNTmips provides more than 50
units and their conversion. Identifying
the units of a single field in a shapefile permits a DataTip or multi-line
DataTip to display these values in any other units for features in the layer
even using virtual fields.
Frame Color.
The default color for the background for
your DataTips can be set using Support / Setup / Preferences.
Select a color to make them more visible for their associated view layer.
No more pale yellow DataTips on yellow or faded white map backgrounds!
Raster Display.
Automatically use the binary “null
mask” subobject if it exists. This
subobject is created by raster mosaic, reprojection, and extraction when a
single null value is not specified or is ambiguous due to inputs having multiple
or no null values.
Vector Display.
When adding a vector layer, a “density
check” is now performed to determine if it may be inadvisable to display the
vector at full view. If the vector
is determined to be too dense, a verification window is displayed with options
to not add the layer, add as normal, set maximum visible scale, and initially
hide the layer. The default maximum
visible scale is set automatically based on the density.
This setting helps avoid displaying the vector when the time required may
be long or the features may not be visually separated.
This new feature helps you avoid long delays and its use is illustated in
the accompanying color plate entitled Managing Display of Large Vectors.
* CAD Object Display.
Layer Controls.
The CAD Layer Controls window for the
display of CAD objects has been redesigned to use tabbed panels to support the
many new options for rendering CAD elements.
This window is now modeless, meaning that all you need to do at any time
to see these changes in the view is to press the “Apply” button in the lower
right corner and/or click on the Redraw icon in the view window without closing
the CAD Layer Controls. The window
has three tabs: Object, Elements, and Label.
Object Panel.
The Object panel contains the object,
style, and georeference selection controls, but adds the “Warp to Model” and
“Scale Range Visible” controls that were available in the V6.9
Vector Layer Controls.
Elements Panel.
The Elements panel consists of the
“Select” and “Style” controls and now provides the DataTip controls for
easier access. In V6.9
the DataTip settings were made via a Tools icon menu selection.
Label Panel.
Options.
The Label panel contains all the new controls for new CAD text styling
and rendering capabilities added in RV7.0.
The new option to “Clip Elements to Label Boundaries” operates in the
same way as the vector control of the same name available in V6.9
and causes the clipping out of a section of all the CAD elements around each
label. For example, lines are
clipped around, and do not run through labels.
The “Show Label Baselines” option will show the CAD text element
baselines used to position every label for rendering.
Frames and Leaders.
In RV7.0 the Frame Style
button brings up a tabbed window to enter label frame and leader line
parameters. This is the same panel
as provided in V6.9 for designing
vector labels and is also illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Enhanced
Sketch Annotation. Using the
Frame tabbed panel, the labels’ frame shape and margins; border style, color,
and width; and fill style, color, pattern and transparency can be designed.
Using the Leader Lines panel the labels’ leader style can be set as a
line with a width and color or as a triangular leader whose properties (for
example, line style, background color, and transparency) match those of the
frame it will extend out from.
During import or from some other TNT
activity, each CAD text element could have its own individual label frame style
assigned. Thus if “Style By
Element” is selected, the label frame styles set up using this control will
not be used in favor of the individual element frame styles.
GeoToolbox.
The cross section generation tool now
optionally generates a manifold object for the cross section drawn on a vector
object. This is discussed in detail
in the section below entitled Manifolds.
Annotating a Sketch Layer.
All the TNT
products including the FREE TNTatlas
and except TNTsim3D permit you to
create a sketch layer in a view that can be saved as a CAD object.
You can create attribute records in a table as you add features to the
sketch. You can set up this table
before or when you decide to draw a new element and create new records to go
with the elements. A sketch layer
is a quick way to sketch in data over an image in a field setting using a FREE TNTatlas
or to create a graphical annotation layer to add to the group for the current
view, perhaps for use in a layout.
Labels are added to your sketch layer
using text tools provided in the GeoToolbox.
RV7.0 permits you to improve
the appearance of labels used for annotation purposes by adding frames, frame
background color, and leader lines to labels.
These labels can have all the cosmetic properties previously introduced
for labels, such as rounded frame corners, transparent backgrounds, and
triangular leader lines. A single
label can also have multiple leader lines to point to several common features.
The accompanying color plate entitled Enhanced Sketch Annotation
illustrates the use of these new sketch features for annotating an image.
Profile View Tool Updates.
A new mode was introduced in the Profile
View tool. For a given set of
points it reads values from a mutiple raster set (hyperspectral set, time
series, and so on) and generates a profile where the x axis is the raster ID
number and the y axis presents the values from the raster cells.
This new profile is illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Graph
Values from Multiple Rasters by Cell Location.
Styling DataTips.
Background.
DataTips continue to be a powerful
feature that is relatively unique to the TNT
products and are easy to set up while producing more attractive results.
Conceptually DataTips provide value and/or text metadata about a specific
feature without cluttering up the geographical features in the view.
In V6.9 the standard
background, border, and text colors of DataTips and ToolTips can be uniformly
defined for all pop-in features via Support / Setup / Preferences / Interface
and use the ToolTip Colors button (now the ToolTip and DataTip Colors button) to
open the Color Editor window for this purpose.
Remember that after changing any of these from the default and selecting
OK, you must exit and restart any open process for the changes to take effect.
Styling Text and Values.
RV7.0
permits the DataTip contents to be much more attractive in form by the addition
of the use of text formatting control codes.
The text strings and value or virtual value of each line in the DataTip
can now be styled by including the TNT
text style codes in these lines. All
the {~} TNT text formatting control
codes can now be used to attractively structure the appearance of the DataTip.
These include defining the text style and font, color, tabs, and many
others.
Dynamic Frame Backgrounds.
A special text code has been added to
permit you to set and dynamically change the color of the background in the
DataTip frame. Use {~BG=red} or
{~BG=90,10,10} to set the background color of the text string for the DataTip to
the color “red” or to R=90%, G=10%, and B=10%.
This format code can be stored with or derived and added to a DataTip via
a virtual (computed) field or added to the prefix for the DataTip in the Layer
Controls. Thus several {~BG} codes
might be inserted in a DataTip string from various real and virtual sources and
unlike text format codes, only one background color can be applied to all of the
DataTip. The first {~BG} code
encountered is the one that will be used. The
accompanying color plate entitled Setting DataTip Background Color
illustrates this added feature.
As noted above, a color background can be
set up for all the DataTips using the Support menu.
Subsequently a virtual field can insert a new {~BG} code to override and
change this default background color. The
first layer with a background color specified for the nearest element determines
the background color of the DataTip, so the background color may change
depending on which layers are included in the DataTip for the current cursor
location.
To support this expanded use of the
DataTip text string for format codes, the prefix for each DataTip has been
expanded from 31 to an unlimited number of characters.
The application of these codes is illustrated on the accompanying color
plate entitled Add Styling to DataTips.
All the current available text formatting control codes (except ~BG,
which was added after this plate was printed) are documented on the reverse of
this color plate.
Use with CAD Layers.
| Important:
CAD layers can now have DataTips with all the current features available for
use with vector layers! |
The new CAD Layer Controls window via the
Elements tabbed panel now presents the same DataTip setup controls as the Vector
Layer Controls window. Now CAD
layers can also have the new GraphTip and Display Control Script features
discussed below.
HelpTips.
Remember that DataTips can be set up in a
special form referred to as HelpTips. These
are multiple line instructions that are spatially sensitive and pop in depending
upon where the cursor is stopped for a moment on the view.
This is an automatic transient pop-in effect.
HelpTips were introduced in V6.0
of the TNT products and can be seen
in the color plate entitled Data Logger APPLIDAT and now located at
www.microimages.com.
HelpTips are made up by attaching a table
with a long string field containing these instructions.
The vector is used to control the action of the cursor.
When the cursor is moved around the view and hovers, the instruction of
what to do next are a popin HelpTip, which is simply a text only, time delayed
DataTip. For example, the HelpTip
might pop in to instruct the user to “depress the left mouse button to select
…” while elsewhere in the same view it may present other instructions.
With the new format codes and enhancements, these HelpTips can now be
more attractively structured and presented.
GraphTips.
RV7.0
adds new, unique capabilities in the TNT
products to provide for interaction with the view, hidden layers in the view, or
with objects not in the view at all but that match some area of the view in
extent. The user selectable methods
of using Tool Scripts, Macro Scripts, Display Control Scripts, and others make
up one group of scripts all of which are implemented using the TNT
internal geospatial scripting language (SML).
The second group contains information that is set up in advance to occur
interactively. DataTips and
HelpTips were members of this group in V6.9.
RV7.0 adds new and powerful
capabilities of this type with the additional implementation of Enhanced
DataTips, GraphTips, and Display Control Scripts.
The editorial section above reviews how these features have evolved in TNTmips
by our joint efforts with you.
These new capabilities also grade into
each other and the terms DataTip and GraphTip are loosely applied to convey the
appearance of what these methods look like to the end user when they pop into
the view. The underlying code and
procedures for establishing these results is the earlier DataTip procedure that
has been extended to accommodate formatting codes and other new extensions.
Now the new Display Control Script is the basis for the pop-in display of
a GraphTip and more complex spatially determined GraphTip applications.
The Display Control Script is saved with the TNT
layout or group and a simple extension of the display process detects it and
runs the script to monitor the cursor movement and position.
If you add this layout with an associated Display Control Script to your TNTatlas,
it will be automatically run in that atlas. To assist you in reviewing some of
the properties of DataTips, GraphTips, and Tools (Tool Scripts) a color plate
entitled Use a
DataTip, GraphTip, or Tool? accompanies this MEMO.
Few alterations were required to RV7.0
to enable these various new powerful features. To get things working together
and tested, implementing a series of examples was needed.
The ability to explain these interactive samples in text is limited.
They are better illustrated by a series of sample applications.
The sample CD atlas of Afghanistan was prepared to permit you to try 4 of these concepts.
The sample DVD Property Viewer atlas for Lincoln, NE also illustrates Enhanced DataTips based on extensive property ownership
records.
Sample Display Control Scripts.
Each of the following sample Display
Control Scripts (DCS) can be downloaded from the TNT
script library at www.microimages.com/sml/.
Depending upon their size, all or a unique part of these sample Display
Control Scripts is printed on the reverse of the color plate that illustrates
it. These printed versions are
annotated to help you understand the script’s structure and procedures.
Local Time Zones.
This sample Display Control Script (DCS)
displays the current local time as a clock for any pause position of the cursor
on the view of the outline map of the world.
The color of the clock indicates if it is an acceptable time to call into
that time zone based upon a test of whether the current time there is within or
outside the programmed definition of local calling hours.
This sample script uses only a display of
the global political boundaries layer from the DVD entitled Global Reference
Geodata distributed with V6.9,
polygons of time zones from a hidden vector layer, and the time set on your
computer. You could dress up this
map by adding the world image layer to this display from this same DVD.
This GraphTip resulting from this DCS is illustrated in the accompanying
color plate entitled Local Time Zones.
Pie Chart and Bar Graph.
These sample Display Control Scripts (DCSs)
show two simple examples of how data relationships can be better illustrated in
a GraphTip than using text in a DataTip. One
presents a pie chart GraphTip of the family structure of the households in Nebraska
counties using TNTlite tutorial
geodata supplemented with population information.
This GraphTip is further enhanced by providing both the identification of
the sectors and the actual values of the sectors in matching colors.
The DCS simply draws what appears to be a text only DataTip below the pie
chart. The results of this DCS and
a discussion of its structure are presented in the accompanying color plate
entitled Pie Chart and Bar Graph. This
DCS in a slightly modified form can be interactively tested using the TNTatlas
of Afghanistan shipped with this RV7.0
of your TNT product.
Its operation in this TNTatlas
is also illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled GraphTips in the
Afghanistan Atlas.
The bar graph GraphTip illustrates how a
DCS can provide another method to present interrelated data.
This bar graph GraphTip presents the age groups in Nebraska counties using TNTlite tutorial
sample datasets. Most of this DCS
is devoted to drawing these features. It
can serve as a model for your GraphTips that are oriented toward presenting
histograms. The results of this DCS
and a discussion of its structure are presented in the accompanying color plate
entitled Pie Chart and Bar Graph.
Enhanced DataTips and
GraphTips.
Similar results can be automatically
displayed quite differently in a DataTip versus a GraphTip depending upon your
objective. The accompanying color
plate entitled Enhanced DataTips and GraphTips illustrates this by
presenting the same information in both forms.
The DataTip is easily set up and formatted.
It presents slope and aspect numeric values in an attractive format for
the current cursor position on the color-infrared image in the view.
Both of these values are virtual fields computed from the cell’s center
at the cursor position. This
presentation is more than adequate for a forester studying the vegetation
distribution.
The corresponding GraphTip example uses a
DCS to compute and graphically present these same values as gadgets.
In this example, the cursor is being moved about on a geologic map
enhanced by the addition of shaded relief and a contour map. Making
these same slope and aspect computations in the DCS and presenting them in this
GraphTip form is oriented toward the way in which a geologist measures and
evaluates them. Also note that the
reference orientation for each of these computed properties is obvious in these
gadgets (which means, the baseline for the slope and the reference direction for
aspect). This information is
not obvious in the DataTip version but is easily deduced by the forester from
the image. This DCS in a slightly
modified form can be interactively tested using the TNTatlas of Afghanistan
shipped with this RV7.0 of your TNT
product. Its operation in this TNTatlas
is also illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled GraphTips in the
Afghanistan Atlas.
Profile of Nearest Line.
For
any position in a view, a geospatial script can detect the nearest point, line,
or polygon within a specified radius. This
has been available for use in Tool Scripts and other SML
processes to find the closest element to the cursor position at which the mouse
is clicked. Now this can also be
used in a Display Control Script (DCS) to automatically detect the nearest
element of the designated type and layer. Thus
a DCS can automatically detect, access, and process the nearest element within
the specified radius when the cursor pauses.
The
accompanying color plate entitled Profile of Nearest Line illustrates
this and also that a GraphTip can actually be a graph.
This example is for a drainage network used as a vector object overlaid
on the display of a DEM raster object. Whenever
the cursor pauses near a drainage line, it is detected and highlighted by the
DCS. The script then traces the
profile of the drainage line along the DEM.
It then presents a GraphTip that is the elevation profile of the
highlighted drainage segment. The
elevation of the drainage at the nearest point on it to the cursor position is
also indicated.
In
a second example, the drainage overlays a color orthophoto but the GraphTip is
still its elevation profile. In
this case the DCS points to and uses a DEM, which is a hidden layer in the view
or it can be simply a raster object in a known path location.
One of the “under-the-hood” features of this and other geospatial
script applications is that it can automatically take advantage of the powerful
transparent spatial data management aspects of the TNT
products. For example, an off-line
DEM raster object (in other words, its path only is specified by the script) not
added to the view can be of any map projection, cell size, and extent as long as
it covers the requested drainage segment or part of it.
The script will still be able to automatically trace the drainage across
it and present the profile. In fact
some other program or action could substitute a new off-line object of the same
name and geodata type and the GraphTip would still be presented.
Even with all these various automatic geospatial conversions, the
GraphTip still pops in within a fraction of a second.
This DCS in a slightly modified form can
be interactively tested using the TNTatlas of Afghanistan shipped with
this RV7.0 of your TNT
product. In this atlas the nearest
road segment is detected, and the GraphTip is the elevation profile of the road.
This would be a particularly useful means of quickly choosing a route for
rapid movement in this mountainous terrain. Its operation in this TNTatlas
is also illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled GraphTips in the
Afghanistan Atlas.
Display Control Script Approach Versus
Tool Script.
To present a GraphTip, a Display Control
Script is automatically run for each pause of the cursor in the view.
A Tool Script is a tool selected by an icon from a number of tools/icons
on the icon toolbar of a TNT view.
Some of these tools/icons are connected to preprogrammed, built-in TNT
features (in other words, Zoom In, Select, View-in-View…).
However, if they are connected to a Tool Script, they run the associated
script. A common Tool Script
procedure in such a script is to await a mouse click in the view and then act on
that position in the view. Once a
pause is detected in a DCS or a click in a Tool Script, quite similar results
can be achieved since both then have access to and use the extensive
capabilities of the TNT geospatial
scripting language. However, the
DCS is automatic and pushes information at you, while the Tool Script requires
interaction and is used to pull information to you.
As a result, while these scripts can have results, they are different in
some aspects of their structures as illustrated by the following sample scripts,
which could produce an identical visual result.
Spyglass View Display Control Script.
This example illustrates that a Display
Control Script (DCS) can present GraphTips that display portions of any TNT
raster or geometric object. When
the cursor is paused in a view, this DCS detects the position of the cursor and
inserts a circular view of a specified TNT
layer or TNT object into that
circlular area. This GraphTip
closes when the cursor is moved and reappears at the next pause position.
It acts something like an automatic View-in-View.
The contents of the interior can match in
scale and features at the edge of the circle (as in these examples), be zoomed,
or whatever you define in the script. The
contents can be from a raster, vector, shape, or CAD layer or directly from an
object not used in the current view. When
an object is used, it does not have to be in the same Coordinate Reference
System, datum, cell size, scale, element size or length, and so on.
All these possible conversions are handled automatically in a geospatial
scripting language, such as SML.
The accompanying color plate entitled Spyglass
View illustrates a DCS that fetches a matching circular area from a color
image raster object and displays it in a view of a topographic map.
A second illustration on this plate shows a circular view fetched from a
soil map vector object. This
GraphTip contains the soil polygons matching the map scale and filled with
transparent colors so as to not obscure the underlying topographic map features.
Note also that each time this GraphTip moves, it may have a different
subset of the soil types within it. Thus,
the LegendView is also updated to identify only those soil types currently
exposed in the circular view.
Clearly a lot of activity is being
conducted by this kind of DCS and yet it is interactively able to push these
GraphTips into the view in a second from large objects.
This is because years of work have gone into the TNT
processes (pyramiding rasters, optimizing vectors, indexing tables, …) and,
thus, SML toward seeking speed in
accessing small areas from what can be potentially very large geodata objects.
Any shape and size of an area that can be defined or computed in this DCS
or the Tool Script that follows can be used instead of a circle.
Some examples would be to compute a region(s), a viewshed, a route,
buffer zone, and so on. A
geospatial scripting language is ideal for such purposes.
However, complex scripts may take seconds to complete and would be more
suitable for running only on demand in a Tool Script.
Pop-In View Tool Script.
A Display Control Script can present
dialogs but often does not as its purpose is to automatically present or push
information to you. Thus, a DCS is
usually designed around your setup of known layers and objects in known positions
such as in a TNTatlas.
A Tool Script runs on demand from an icon.
As a result the geodata, control parameters, and other inputs it uses can
be obtained at the time of its use by including XML defined dialogs in the
script. As a result Tool Scripts
can be designed to provide a widely used and reused tool since the location and
type of geodata each uses can be requested from any user.
Their operation can also be modified by the user, such as setting the
radius or picking a shape for the GraphTip in this example.
They can also be used to present forms, populate tables, and start other
programs, such as a browser with a URL containing the cursor’s position.
The accompanying color plated entitled Pop-In
View illustrates a Tool Script that also fetches and inserts matching
circular views from a raster object and from a vector object that are not part
of the current view. However, this
tool differs because when its icon is clicked, it requests the type, location,
and name of the object to insert into this circular area.
Once you have provided this input, the circular view of that object is
inserted at any position of the cursor when the mouse is clicked.
It remains in the view until a new position is clicked, another tool is
selected, or the view is refreshed. Since
this is a Tool Script and requests all its needed inputs, it can be added to the
icon tool bar and reused with any TNT
desktop product.
The color plate illustrates two results.
In one the object selected for the interior of the Pop-In View is a
raster object that contains a combination of a vector object of a geologic map
overlaying a shaded relief raster object. The
image in the view is a color orthophoto. The
second example uses the 1-foot color orthophoto raster in the Lincoln Property
Viewer TNTatlas in the view.
The Tool Script then inserts a circular view of the vector object for the
floodplain polygons from the floodplains vector object in this same atlas.
These polygons are found, clipped, and inserted into the circular area
with transparent colors so that the image features show through. As
noted above, you can download this Tool Script from www.microimages.com/downloads/scripts.htm
and add it to your icon tool bar using the instructions on page 47 of the
tutorial entitled Writing Scripts with SML.
You will also find in this tutorial 14 pages of information about other
Tool Scipts, Tool Script templates, and how you can create you own tools.
Miscellaneous.
The default mode for DataTip viewing is
set to “all layers” if you have not previously set it to something else.
An
option has been added to not draw labels until other layers in the group have
been drawn.
When
the scale range for viewing a layer has been set, it is added to the DataTip
that pops in when you hover over the layer name in the LegendView.
You can now set which raster is to be
used when a 1X zoom is requested. This
is set on the Options panel of the Raster Layer Controls.
It can be used to control which raster to use in situations where rasters
of significantly different cell sizes are mixed.
A new zoom mode icon (red magnifier with
a “+” sign) is now provided by default on the icon bar of the view window.
Selecting this icon puts the cursor in the mode to continually zoom in 2X
at the feature you point to when you click the mouse. If
you click the numeric keys 1 thru 4 in this mode the zoom will be at the cursor
and have the same result as if you were in any other mode.
For example, if you type “1” the zoom will be to full resolution and
centered on the cursor.
You can now highlight and show an element
from a hidden layer.
When a view has any hidden layers/groups
then by default these are hidden in the View-in-View tool.
* 3D Display.
Surface
Rendering Modes.
The
rewrite of the TNT 3D rendering
engine and previously available features is complete in RV7.0.
Dense Ray Casting, Variable Triangulation, and Sparse Triangulation
surface rendering options have been fully implemented.
These rendering modes (selected from the Surface Layer Controls dialog)
determine the elevation accuracy and speed of rendering of the 3D surface model
on which your other geospatial layers are draped.
The two original surface rendering methods of Ray Casting and
Triangulation have been removed from RV7.0
TNT products as their older code and
further application serve no useful purpose.
Now all their special features such as pedestals, stereo viewing, …
have been implemented and improved for the 3 new surface rendering options.
The
accompanying color plate entitled 3D Surface Rendering Modes compares
these 3 modes and discusses their speed versus quality differences.
The conceptual design of these surface rendering modes was introduced in
this same section in the Release MEMO for V6.8.
All three surface rendering options also can be used in combination with
any of the advanced texture filters described in the Release MEMO for V6.8.
Now that surface-rendering and texture-filtering options have been
revamped, effort will be directed toward speeding up these rendering methods to
enable more interaction between concurrent 2D and 3D views. Another possible
area of improvement in this new rendering engine would be to preserve more of
the vector nature and attributes for overlaying geometric objects.
Displaying
non-horizontal, planar or curvilinear structures called manifolds has been added
and is discussed in detail in the section below entitled Manifolds. Since
the display of manifolds is in a TNT
3D view, it does not use DirectX or OpenGL, but internal MicroImages code.
This means that manifold viewing is cross-platform and automatically
incorporates many important 3D view features, such as the ability to render a
high resolution version of the current view into a file for printing, extension
via SML, direct integration and
geographic correlations with the 2D views, and so on.
Faster Wireframes.
Moving
wireframes around is significantly faster because it now uses the appropriate
terrain pyramid tier to generate the wireframe.
Wireframe manipulation is commonly used for quick preview of this
skeletal form of the terrain to make adjustments to the viewpoint.
V6.9 always used the full
surface raster layer for this purpose requiring more data to be read in a
situation where it was not needed.
Faster Flat Surfaces.
Rendering
of multiple texture layers on a flat surface (which means, without a terrain
surface) is much faster. This is
actually how a vertically-oriented stereo view is rendered, as discussed and
illustrated in the Stereo section below.
In a stereo view parallax is introduced into the textures from the
terrain layer, but their time consuming depth rendering is now bypassed.
Transparent Layers.
The
transparency properties set for individual texture layers are now applied in all
surface rendering modes. When
multiple texture layers overlap in any given perspective view, their
transparency effects combine in the order in which the layers are rendered,
which is from the bottom of the layer stack (first layer added) to the top (last
layer added). This statement
applies to multiple texture layers assigned to a single terrain surface as well
as to overlapping textures from different vertically-separated terrain surfaces.
This
kind of transparency, called layer order transparency, was available in V6.9
only with the old Ray Casting surface rendering mode.
Now you have this capability available for use with all of the
high-quality surface rendering modes in your 3D views, both on-screen and in
printed layouts for data areas of any size.
For example, you can set a different transparency for each vector polygon
fill style and it is used when this layer is draped over an image.
Or, you can set the transparency level directly in the 3D controls for an
entire raster object, such as a scan of a geologic map, to visually merge the
map with an underlying opaque relief shading or panchromatic image layer.
Examples of the use of layer transparency are illustrated in the
accompanying color plate entitled Transparency and Relief Shading in 3D Views.
Remember that these transparencies are cumulatively applied bottom to top
as you view the layers in the current perspective.
Any opaque layer that is encountered will obscure the view of earlier
layers for that screen pixel.
Relief Shading.
Relief
shading can now be requested and manipulated directly while using any of the new
3D surface rendering methods. (In V6.9
relief shading in 3D only worked with certain of the older surface rendering
modes.) You can vary the sun
elevation and azimuth, as well as its intensity, via the vertical scaling of the
terrain layer. The relief-shaded
layer can then be used as a base texture layer and partially exposed by making
the 2nd and subsequent added texture layers, such as an image or map, partially
transparent. Adding this shaded
relief base enhances the visual clues in a 3D view and creates the illusion of a
sun position for all views. Of
course if the image texture layer has obvious feature shadows, this will dictate
the best angular position of your sun settings.
The accompanying color plate entitled Transparency and Relief Shading
in 3D Views illustrates various uses of relief shading.
Pedestals.
Adding
cosmetic pedestals to your 3D rendering has been improved and is available for
all 3 new surface rendering methods. A
pedestal for a texture layer is drawn vertically down from the outermost edge of
real data values in the texture or its underlying terrain.
A curving real data boundary, therefore, produces a pedestal with curving
walls. Pedestals now also provide
other advanced features not previously available, such as smoothed color, color
shading, and transparency.
Height.
A
pedestal is drawn vertically downward from the real data edge to the base
elevation specified for it in the Raster Layer Controls dialog.
This pedestal base elevation is a value you select relative to mean sea
level.
Color and Transparency.
The
color of the pedestal is selected from any color using the same dialog as above.
This color is automatically shaded according to the current position of
the sun, which can be set using the 3D Viewpoint Controls dialog.
You are even able to set a transparency level for the pedestal color.
The use of this feature is particularly effective for upward pedestals
called fences discussed below. However,
pedestals with a high transparency setting might also be used to put a frame
around a 3D view with multiple, but offset, terrain layers.
Irregular Terrain Boundaries.
Almost
all published illustrations of 3D views with pedestals show views that have an
outer boundary in the shape of a parallelogram or trapezoid because the
rendering process shows the full rectangular extents of the geodata.
In the TNT products, your
single 3D view can be irregularly bounded and use stacked or edge matched
terrains that are irregular in shape. If
your terrain and/or texture edge is irregular, then the pedestal follows that
shape. This is illustrated in the
accompanying color plate entitled Pedestal and Fence in 3D Views.
You are no longer restricted, as previously and in many competitive
products, to using a pedestal only around a rectangular data area.
If your terrain(s) or texure(s) have holes in them, then appropriate
pedestal sections can be viewed through these holes as a function of the view
angle.
When
pedestals are curved, they are attractively shaded as illustrated in this same
color plate. Pedestal shading
requires a complex process of smoothing the edge of the data area that generates
the pedestal shape, since this actual edge is always defined by raster cell
boundaries and so is not inherently smooth but saw-toothed.
There is also the issue of deciding when an inflection in the curved edge
of the data is a real abrupt inflection in edge that should be observed and
appropriately shaded versus being only meaningless spatial noise along what
should be interpreted as a smooth edge. These
subtle but important considerations are why irregular pedestal boundaries are
not supported in other products. However,
if not overworked, TNT produces very
attractive shaded pedestals for your irregular area.
You can mask out marginal surface areas that have distracting or ugly
features, such as an existing development, and these areas are then not rendered
in the view. The pedestal
surrounding the remaining real data area focuses attention on the site of
specific interest.
Fences.
This
new 3D view embellishment is simply a pedestal drawn upward.
Since a pedestal and fence can be applied simultaneously to the same
texture in the view, these features have their own independent sets of identical
controls for height above base, color, and transparency.
The meaning and operation of these controls is discussed above.
An
effective use of a fence is illustrated in the color plate entitled Pedestal
and Fence in 3D Views. In the
illustration, the pedestal is rendered downward and opaque to provide a base and
frame for the rendering. It also
emphasizes the 3D depth with its irregular terrain intersection with the texture
along the front edge. However, even
in this small print it can be seen that the upward highly transparent pale blue
fence adds a subtle corner effect further creating the illusion of depth.
Fences with high transparency can create this corner effect or with low
transparency build a sandbox effect around the terrain.
Stereo.
Rendering
a 3D perspective view as a stereo pair is now supported for all 3 new surface
rendering methods. Once a suitable
3D perspective view has been created, it can now be viewed in high quality
stereo using a stereo viewing device such as a 3D monitor or a mirror
stereoscope. Simply select one of
the 4 available stereo display modes. You
can include any of the new 3D viewing features in your stereo view including the
new manifold surfaces, advanced mipmap texture filtering, and all the other
features introduced incrementally in the previous TNT
releases of this 3D viewing process. If
you wish to create a straight down view in stereo, simply adjust the viewpoint
controls to place the viewer above the terrain with a 90-degree pitch.
The
TNT products can render the stereo
view in any of 4 stereo modes to match your choice of stereo viewing device.
To select the stereo mode, open the Stereo Viewing Options dialog by
choosing Stereo Setup from the Perspective View window's Options menu.
These various rendering methods are illustrated in the accompanying color
plate entitled Stereo Viewing Modes.
Almost every common stereo viewing device available uses one of these 4
display methods. Recommended
viewing hardware for use with these methods is discussed below.
| Note:
2D and 3D views can be switched into stereo mode in the FREE TNTatlas
and TNTlite, the new low-cost TNTview,
and TNTedit and TNTmips.
|
Separate Frames.
The
Separate Frames mode is new to the TNT
products with RV7.0 and displays
separate side-by-side images with parallax added.
This is the mode that provides very stable stereo viewing specifically
for use with a mirror stereoscope. Dual
high quality images can be displayed side by side on a 21" or a larger flat
monitor or a pair of flat monitors and a stereoscope set up over them.
To adjust the placement of the side-by-side views to fit your
stereoscope, measure the distance between its optical axes and enter this value
in the Stereo Viewing Options dialog. Since
the use of dual monitors introduces a bezel area between the 2 views, the width
of this obstruction also can be entered in this dialog to further adjust the
frame separation.
Interlaced Columns.
Interlaced
Columns mode creates images with appropriate parallax in a single view.
One image is displayed in the odd-numbered columns and the other in the
even-numbered columns. This mode,
depending upon the viewing device, reduces the horizontal resolution by a factor
of 2. This mode is used by
direct-view stereo monitors (no glasses, shutters, …) that use a special
screen surface to optically deflect the odd-numbered columns to one eye and the
evens to the other.
Interlaced Lines.
Interlaced
Lines mode creates two images that are spliced in the opposite direction from
column-interlaced mode. Image
lines from one image are displayed in odd-numbered screen lines and from the
other in even-numbered lines. Parallax
is introduced by slightly offsetting the starting positions of the interlaced
lines. On older interlaced display
systems, shuttered eyeglasses are synced with the display to force each eye to
separately view each of these images. Another
approach uses a shuttered screen and polarized glasses to create stereo.
Both of these methods, even in their latest incarnations, can quickly
introduce eye strain.
Anaglyph.
Anaglyph
support is included because of its simplicity and the ease with which the
viewing device can be acquired. Its
biggest advantage is that stereo images can be cheaply printed and distributed
in any quantity with a free pair of glasses.
There are no special settings required in using this option.
In the Stereo Viewing Options dialog, it’s simply a choose it and use
it option. A color plate entitled Anaglyph
Stereo Viewing accompanies this MEMO to compare this method of viewing with
those that follow and require special equipment.
Stereo Equipment Recommendations.
Stereo
viewing on a monitor has been an entertainment gimmick except when required for
special purposes such as soft photogrammetry. If good quality stereo
viewing was available, we would all be using it for TV, for games, and our
geospatial visualization. Low-cost
viewing devices produce flicker and quickly give you a headache. Better quality
devices have cost too much for general purpose use. For these reasons,
minimal previous effort has been expended in this aspect of visualization in the
TNT products.
However, now some approaches do produce acceptable results. Hardware
devices are becoming available that make it possible to view stereo for longer
periods without flicker and at acceptable additional cost.
This hardware and corresponding stereo modes in 3D views may now make
stereo viewing of increased interest to you.
Suggestions for more photo-like TNT
stereo stations are discussed and illustrated below.
For more information on stereo add-on devices and monitors please see
www.stereo3d.com.
Stereoscopes.
The
analog, tube monitors of the past were commonly multisync/multiresolution with a
continuous phosphor coating and had a tendency to jitter at the pixel level.
They were also large and bulky adding to the difficulty of using them in
pairs with a stereoscope. Now,
digital flat panel monitors display images at a single resolution to specific
discrete cells. This pixel
stability enhances their use to present a pair of photo-like stereo images for
viewing with a mirror stereoscope. A
single, large monitor can be used or a pair of smaller units. The
stereoscope has been around almost 100 years as a low-cost means of viewing
pairs of images in stereo with minimum eye fatigue.
Using these devices can produce near photo quality stereo, which can be
viewed longer than other approaches with a minimum of eye fatigue.
Inexpensive Mirror Stereo Station.
The accompanying color plate entitled Inexpensive Stereoscope Viewing
shows the lowest cost mirror stereoscope design.
It uses twin 15" or 17" flat panels, 1024 by 768 pixel monitors
you may already be using for your TNT
products. These can be positioned side by side laying flat or on an angle with
their bezels in contact in the middle. The
plastic mirror stereoscope (called a GeoScope™) can be positioned across them
and the stereo view mode selected in 3D display.
As noted above, the separation of the stereo frames can be set by
entering the distance between the optical axes of your stereoscope, and can be
automatically adjusted for the dual-monitor setup by entering the width of the 2
monitor bezels. These values need
to be set only once for this setup. Since
you are already using dual monitors with your TNT
product this is a US$200 approach.
Mirror Stereo Station.
The accompanying color plate entitled Stereoscope Viewing shows
more expensive, higher quality mirror stereoscope design.
It uses a single, 23" pan-wide flat panel monitor of 1920 x 1200
pixels yielding 960 by 1200 pixels for your stereo view.
It is available from Apple, Sony, and HP in an identical form factor and
price and is also an excellent choice for the general operation of your TNT
products if you like to use only 1 monitor.
A popular high quality mirror stereoscope with first surface mirrors and
quality lens fits almost perfectly across this single monitor over your
photo-like stereo images. You only
need to set the optical axes default separation.
This kind of monitor is US$2000 and getting cheaper while the stereoscope
is less than US$800.
Direct View Monitors.
Flat panel monitors are now available
that directly display stereo images without any glasses or other secondary
media. These monitors display dual
images that are column interleaved. These
alternating columns of pixels are then deflected odd-numbered columns to the
left and even-numbered columns to the right by a special surface on the screen.
Each of your eyes then sees only one of these color images.
With a high frame rate the two parallax-shifted images merge into a 3D
image projecting out from the monitor’s surface.
Using alternating images for stereo cuts in half the horizontal
resolution of this monitor. However,
at any time you can physically shift these monitors from this stereo behavior to
flat mode and use them just like any other monitor for 2D work at full
resolution. At this time, none of
MicroImages’ staff have first hand direct experience with the quality of the
stereo produced on these monitors.
Sharp Direct View 15" 3D
Monitor.
In 2003 Sharp released a portable (model
Actius RD3D) with a 15" flat panel with column interleaved stereo using
their parallax barrier technology for direct viewing at about US$3000.
Late this year they began shipping a stand alone 15" flat panel
monitor (model LL-151-3D) using their direct view stereo technology for US$1500.
This is a 1024 by 768 resolution monitor that can be switched between
normal 2D and 3D display modes in software or with a physical button. The
3D mode repeats the columns in the view for each eye.
This halves the resolution from 1024 to 512 by 768.
This monitor is only now becoming readily available.
MicroImages clients who have used it for viewing TNT
manifolds and surfaces in 3D report it is very good.
MicroImages has taken delivery on this
monitor and the unaided stereo viewing is very sharp and clear.
If the monitor is switched out of stereo to full resolution 2D viewing,
you can not detect that this is a stereo monitor.
The only drawback is that the viewing position is very narrow. However,
you can move your head closer or father from the screen and maintain stereo as
long as your head remains in this narrow viewing angle.
This is particularly important to those of you who wear glasses, and
especially those with bifocals and trifocals.
Holding the head still for playing games on it would be difficult.
For professional applications where the view or simulation is going to be
studied, this is more of an annoyance when its crystal clear stereo quality is
compared to any other stereo viewing device. For
example, everyone is familiar with viewing images with a stereoscope that
requires a very specific position for your head!
More information about this monitor can be found at www.sharp3d.com and
it has many reviews on the Internet.
Larger
Direct View 3D Monitors from SeeReal.
TNT
stereo views of manifolds, surfaces, and other 3D results were recently
demonstrated at a show to geologists using the larger but much more expensive
SeeReal monitors manufactured in Germany. These monitors use a
different
technology to route the images to each eye than Sharp’s monitor but use the
same TNT column interlaced mode.
They have several products in this line and their top model is the C-nt
at about US$10,000 (current prices are not posted anywhere on the Internet).
It is a 20-inch flat panel with a 1600 by 1200 pixel resolution.
Again, in stereo the horizontal is halved to 800 by 1200.
More information about these direct view stereo monitors can be found at
www.seereal.com/EN/products_cnt.en.htm.
Non-Topographic Stereo Applications.
Since the costs and quality of stereo are
now in an acceptable range (US$200 to US$3000), your potential uses of stereo
should not be limited to obvious conventional applications such as viewing
images, geologic and topographic maps, and manifolds, all of which require a
DEM. There are more exotic forms of
stereo and 3D viewing in the TNT
products that do not require a DEM or vertical manifold georeferencing. The
following are some sample ideas. Consider
how you can extend these suggestions for non-DEM related stereo applications to
the interpretation of your project’s research materials and objectives.
It is also important to realize that stereo applications are not
restricted to georeferenced geodata. Your
rasters and graphical datasets need only be internally registered, such as
derived from the same source rasters, or in the same engineering or Cartesian
coordinate framework to be used in stereo in the TNT
products as outlined below.
Vegetation Stereo.
A common stereo application is to compute
the green canopy biomass raster object from a color infrared airphoto or
satellite image using a vegetation index equation (for example, NDVI and many
others). This new raster will
register exactly with the original multispectral images.
It can then be chosen as a pseudo-DEM and the natural color or color
infrared renditions of the original images draped over it in 3D and stereo.
If the imagery is a color infrared airphoto or 1-meter synthetic
satellite image of a crop field, the variations in its canopy biomass within
each crop field will be dramatic. If
the color image is derived from a 15-meter Landsat, then the variations in
forest canopy density and conifer (needle) versus deciduous (broad leaf) species
will be enhanced in stereo and perspective.
Image Ratios.
Geologists frequently interpret
multispectral images by using special color band ratios selected to enhance the
surface distribution of a group of geologically related materials. From these, a
rough map is sketched of the distribution of materials in that enhancement.
Then another enhancement and its grouping of materials is mapped and so
on. As this procedure moves along,
the inter-relationships between these groups is worked out by going back and
forth between the ratio images and overlaying the current composite surface map
and its subsurface extrapolations.
Many image processing steps may be used
to enhance these ratio or other image presentations to aid in this
interpretation such as vegetation removal, corrections for terrain induced
radiance and atmospheric effects, some level of auto interpretation,
orthorectification, and so on. However,
in the end it will be the expert geologist that interprets these rasters and
builds the electronic or physical map of the geology of the area.
Geologic interpretation and its
refinement gets an obvious improvement when a DEM is used to present these
enhanced image products in stereo and perspective, along with subsurface
profiles as manifolds, and their current interpretations as overlays.
The initial sketching, revision, and mapping activities can then be
carried on concurrently in a separate 2D map view.
However, these geologic interpretations can also be improved if stereo
and 3D perspective viewing are used to enhance the geologic characteristics of
the area rather than the topographic relationships. The following is an example
of how stereo can be used by deliberately omitting the DEM and using stereo with
just the enhanced imagery to improve the interpretation of the
inter-relationships between groups of geologically associated surface materials.
A color enhanced ratio raster that has
been optimized to help map a group of related surface materials (class A) can be
displayed in stereo and 3D using as a “pseudo-DEM” a second ratio raster
optimized for another group of surface materials (class B).
Relationships between these groups will now be enhanced in stereo and
interpretations made taking these stereo effects into account (for example,
class A can be here but that means class B can not be).
In TNTmips it is then easy to
toggle a third or new ratio raster in as the “pseudo DEM” and compare in
stereo a new combination of surface groupings (class A over C) to refine the
interpretation of the location of the group of surface materials in the color
raster (ratio class A) before drawing any lines.
These procedures are easily applied to images from multispectral image
sources such as Landsat or ASTER. Viewing
combinations of more advanced automatic interpretations derived from
hyperspectral images in this way can create many possibilities of this type
where final material identification can not be completed or trusted entirely to
the automated processing, such as in a military decision.
Water Quality.
Subtle variations in water features, such
as the boundaries between algae concentrations and pollution levels, are often
hard to quantify. Often this is
improved by enhancement of multispectral images or the addition of thermal
images. If visual interpretation
and mapping are used, these kinds of enhancements can be combined in stereo as
above to improve their interpretation.
Stereo Plans.
Tentative plans include adding manifolds
to TNTsim3D since DirectX and OpenGL
can be readily used to introduce stereo viewing into this real time simulation.
Stereo support can then be easily added to use this in TNTsim3D.
This combination will permit you to move the viewpoint of a stereo view
around in real time to help you understand the spatial relationships in a
simulation using 3D terrain surfaces and/or manifolds.
Communicate what you need next in stereo visualization to get it on the
development list.
* Manifolds.
Background.
TNT
products and some other advanced commercial geospatial analysis systems are
often referred to as 2.5 dimensional (2.5D).
The Z axis for features created, used, and visualized in these systems is
measured in a vertical axis orthogonal to the 2D projection of these features
onto a map plane. Often this plane
is defined at or referenced to mean sea level.
Generally, the available 3D data such as DEMs, bore hole profiles,
seismic profiles, and 3D coordinates for maps fall into this category.
All these 2.5D systems store and use only minimal information about
relationships that occur in the 3rd dimension.
For example, 3D topology is not maintained, in other words the topology
is only 2D and refers only to the projected surface.
While vertical overlapping area features can be defined in a CAD or shape
object, true 3D relationships (for example, caves, concavities, and the general
idea of volumes) are lost in a polygonal topology vector or single raster
object.
The few 3D and 4D geospatial systems that
do exist are specialized, expensive, and/or developmental in nature and focus on
geologic, air-space and atmospheric, oceanic, and outer space related special
applications. Upon careful
consideration you will find that geodata with Z coordinates that are not
measured orthogonally from the projected map plane and/or preserve volumetric
relationships is very hard to collect and, as a result, is very expensive and
sparsely available. Thus, it is
natural that commercially oriented geospatial analysis systems focus upon the
plentiful 2D geodata and on 2.5D when DEMs are available.
Desktop commercial geospatial analysis products, such as TNTmips
and its competitors, are not viable unless they are based upon, and work with,
widely available geodata.
Fortunately there are still many new and
useful 2.5D applications of geospatial analysis similar to the introduction in RV7.0
of the use of manifold surfaces and stereo viewing.
Other recent MicroImages 2.5D introductions included the free TNTsim3D
program for publishing your simulations and the continuing improvements for
higher quality, faster 3D perspective viewing.
Future 2.5D opportunities might include editing 2.5D geodata in stereo;
editing using several geolocked orthogonal views; or sketching in 2D, 3D, and or
stereo views with the results simultaneously added to each. These past, present,
and future developments can exploit the sources of Z-coordinate geodata just
becoming widely available for use with your 2D geodata.
These include more widely available and accurate DEMs ranging from the
global SRTMs to local laser-derived DEMs to collecting accurate elevations with
a GPS unit.
Some applications of 2.5D geodata are
obvious and are the basis for the myriad of
products that create a realistic 3D perspective view or real time
simulation of a 3D surface. These
products strive for speed and realism in games and some use real geodata for
applications like flight simulation or guiding the driver of a car.
However, in many site specific professional geospatial applications, the
level of the integration of these 3D visualization subsystems into the total
system is of even more importance than realism.
For example, can they use the same geodata layers and scripting tools?
Are the 2.5D capabilities and 3D capabilities tightly integrated with 2D
capabilities for visualization, interpretation, and editing, such as in TNTmips
and TNTedit?
Are high quality 3D and acceptable quality stereo created with or without
a DEM to help visualize complex surfaces to create 2.5D geodata relationships,
such as manifolds in 2D views?
Only now in wealthy nations are we
getting into position with our data collection and analysis systems to keep our
geodata systems updated rather than creating static, one-time geodata sets and
their interpretations. And this is
generating a monstrous amount of digital data much of which may never be used.
Obviously these nations have a tremendous amount of effort at hand just
organizing and using these 2D and 2.5D geodata.
Recently a senior project manager for one
of the largest intelligence and homeland security contractors to the U.S. government was overheard to say that it will take 25 to 50 years to actually
integrate the local, state, and national geodata into a comprehensive and
maintained 2.5D geospatial system. It’s
not just a technical issue—spend the money and get it done.
A myriad of local and other laws, institutional barriers, and political
issues must be resolved. Funding
must be available, channeled to the working levels in local, state, and federal
government, and standards truly adopted. There
will have to be unpopular sacrifices of and safeguards for personal freedoms
within our basic democratic framework. For
example, even the limited amount of geospatial data available is already used to
gerrymander election results.
We have plenty of work cut out for us
worldwide just coping with our 2.5D geospatial future. True 3D and 4D systems
are truly long range goals that can be worked toward only if and when sources of
appropriate 3D geodata become available. The
first step will be to move toward 3D geocentric and geodetic coordinate systems
to properly record positions in a geodetic or geocentric system.
MicroImages and other developers are
adding more of these 2.5D applications as demand, time, and most importantly the
availability of 2.5D datasets allow. However,
as is characteristic of the MicroImages TNT
products, working with new 2.5D applications as they are introduced will not
require that you assemble the needed software from several pieces that are
available only on a specific platform, OS, or use one graphics engine, such as
DirectX or OpenGL. As a result you
will not become entangled in a variety of prices, release cycles, data formats,
user interfaces, and so on. All those details end up controlling the ease of use
and integration of your 2.5D geospatial applications. This may mean that other
specialized products reach selected 2.5D goals faster in some cases, but a truly
professional 2.5D geospatial analysis system requires careful integration.
Manifold Surfaces.
Definitions.
The word
“manifold” has numerous and quite different meanings in English and in
the Random House Unabridged Dictionary, for example, a manifold is a part of an
automobile engine or a pipe network. Alas,
manifold is the word already accepted
elsewhere in earth resources to refer to a curved surface in space. It
is this dictionary’s 12th definition that is most appropriate: “a
topological space that is connected and locally Euclidean.”
Note that this definition says nothing about how the manifold surface
will appear in space.
This term can be extended to cover its
use in the TNT products.
A TNT
manifold object is a raster, vector, shape, or CAD object (internal or linked)
that has been georeferenced in 3D to define its functional surface in 3D space.
Furthermore, its content must be appropriate to be viewed as a texture
projected onto the TIN or manifold surface defined by these georeference points.
From this basic definition even
more new terms have to be introduced and defined so that this new capability of
the TNT products can be
unambiguously explained here, and in future discussions of these types of TNT
geodata and shapes.
Manifold Object.
A manifold
object is a raster, vector, CAD, or shape object that has 3D
georeferencing. When a manifold
object is selected in a 3D view, including in the Spatial Data Editor, a TIN
will be formed from its 3D georeference points and the contents of the
associated raster, vector, shape, or CAD object projected onto that surface as
its texture. Georeferencing is now
both a 2D and a 3D process and is used to enter and edit the 3D control points
needed to define a manifold object. The
GeoToolbox in Display and the Spatial Data Editor can directly create a vertical
cross section manifold object. Since
a manifold object is georeferenced in 3D, it can be represented and visualized
anywhere in a 3D space, and it may or may not intersect a terrain surface.
The surface of the manifold object can be planar, curved, or creased and
folded.
Obviously the raster, vector, shape, and
CAD objects can be combined or merged in various ways before the 3D
georeferencing is added to them to define a single manifold object.
However, they can also be kept as separate manifold objects and projected
and viewed in order onto the same manifold surface.
For this purpose the 3D georeferencing of a manifold object can be
conveniently transferred from one raster object to another or between vector
objects as long as they have matching extents, just as with the georeferencing
of 2D objects. For example, you
create a raster manifold object, a matching vector overlay manifold object to
delimit boundaries, and a CAD manifold object containing annotations.
Manifold Surface.
A manifold
surface is the TIN surface formed in 3D space each time the manifold
object is used in a 3D view. The
shape of this TIN remains the same for every new viewpoint of it.
Its shape can only be changed in the Georeference process using the new
tools provided for this purpose.
Manifold Texture Object.
A manifold
texture object, or a manifold
texture, is the special name that refers to the raster, vector, shape, or
CAD object with the 3D georeferencing needed to use it as a manifold object.
The texture object is projected (called draping) onto the manifold’s
TIN surface every time the 3D view is created, refreshed, or the viewpoint is
moved.
Manifold Layer.
A manifold
layer refers to the current view of a manifold texture object draped
onto the manifold surface in a 3D view. The
3D view can have other manifold and topographic layers in it.
Terrain Surface.
You are already familiar with the use of
a terrain
surface, which is the TIN formed in a 3D view using one or more
elevation rasters. Depending upon
which of the 3D models is used, the shape of this TIN can change slightly to
refine it for each new viewpoint.
Topographic Texture Object.
You are already familiar with the use of
a topographic
texture object, or a topographic
texture, which is the 2D raster, vector, shape, or CAD object you select for
projection (called draping) onto the terrain surface every time the 3D view is
created, refreshed, or the viewpoint is moved.
Topographic Layer.
A topographic
layer refers to the current view of a topographic texture object draped
onto a terrain surface in a 3D view. The
3D view can have other manifold and topographic layers in it.
Sample Applications.
Most software products used to build and
view manifold layers and other volumes from geodata and visualize them in 3D are
highly specialized and expensive. A
popular current application is to use them to build the walls in a
seismic/geology immersion room used in oil exploration and costing hundreds of
thousands even up to a million dollars. A
picture taken inside one of these rooms can be found in the article entitled The
End of Cheap Oil by Tim Appenzeller in the National Geographic Magazine of
June 2004. In these specially built
facilities, something like a very early holodeck, experts manipulate seismic
profiles projected onto all the walls of the room as manifold layers.
Now in RV7.0 you and your
standard TNT products can begin to
explore the possibility of using these kinds of 2.5D manifold layers in your
applications.
The uses of manifold layers range from
simple graphical representations in publications to complex 3D visualizations.
Their use is common in geology; geophysics; mineral and petroleum
exploration; mining; archaeology; monitoring groundwater pollution and other
subsurface environmental properties; geotechnical, road building, and excavation
engineering; and others. To
introduce you to the appearance of these layers in a 3D TNT
view, several different kinds of manifold and associated topographic layers are
illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Manifolds in 3D Views.
Most of the geodata available to
MicroImages and suitable for constructing manifold objects is geological in
nature. Crisscrossing or “egg
crate” like intersecting subsurface profile manifold layers are common in
geology and are called fence diagrams. Geologic
cross sections are available on printed geologic maps and in their digital
equivalent. Any cross section can
be created from a geologic map by a trained geologist.
Seismic data is widely used but quite proprietary in nature.
As a result, the orientation of the rest of the color plates used to
describe this manifold process in this MEMO use these kinds of data sets
starting with the general illustrations in the accompanying color plate entitled
Visualize 3D Geology Using Manifolds.
Another accompanying color plate entitled 3D Subsurface Model Using
Manifolds illustrates the distribution of an ore body determined from
drilling, mine shafts, and expert interpretation.
It is hoped that you can make the extrapolation from these examples to
creating and using manifold objects from your geodata.
3D Visualization.
A raster, vector, shape, or CAD object
with the necessary 3D georeferencing is a manifold object and can be selected
for display in 3D as a manifold layer. Since
this uses the same TNT 3D
visualization models as rendering topographic layers, multiple manifold and
topographic layers can be rendered in the same 3D or stereo view. This
is a unique way of visualizing the relationships between topographic layers or
other horizontal reference layers in proper geospatial relationship to manifold
layers representing subsurface or above-surface profiles, transects, and layers
with other content and orientations.
Depending upon the viewpoint, adding
several topographic and manifold layers means that they can obscure each other.
The ordering of their 3D rendering is back (farthest away) to front
(nearest). Transparency can be used
to help you see the underlying layers in a rendering, but can create confusion
over which layer is actually being viewed.
Faster reorientation of a composite 3D, better means of temporarily
unmasking obscured layers, adding the use of manifold surfaces in TNTsim3D,
and stereo viewing are all areas of future development needed to provide more
means of visualizing the 3D relationships manifested in these potentially
complex multilayer views.
As you begin to more fully understand
this new capability, you will also find that even the 2.5D geodata needed for
this application is not widely available. However,
it can be put together from various sources starting directly within the TNT
products (for example, your geologic interpretations of 2D geodata such as bore
hole profiles and geologic maps). Unlike
all the 2D geodata already available or that you assemble, subsurface,
oceanographic, atmospheric, and other such specialized data can be hard to find,
often incomplete, and recorded in unusual units (for example, seismic
propagation times). Getting these
external 2.5D sets organized into TNT
manifold objects will require effort and potentially the use of the TNT
geospatial scripting language (SML)
for data conversion, formation, and importing into a manifold texture object
with its 3D georeferencing.
Create a Manifold Cross Section.
You can use a new tool option in the
GeoToolbox in a 2D view to quickly and easily create a simple vertical manifold
object. This is illustrated in the
accompanying color plate entitled Create Cross-Section Manifold Objects.
This procedure uses a 2D vector object overlaying an elevation raster
object in a 2D view. You use the GeoToolbox to draw any kind of connected line
representing the desired cross section on this view in 2D.
The line does not have to be straight, but must be continuous.
When you are finished drawing and editing the line, use the Generate
Cross Section icon in the GeoToolbox window to create your new manifold object.
This manifold texture object you are
creating hangs down or projects vertically upward from the trace of the
cross-section line on the terrain surface.
Thus you are prompted to enter the base level elevation of this vertical
cross-section manifold texture object in the Cross Section Options window.
This elevation value is measured relative to the base elevation of the
elevation raster object, typically mean sea level.
The value you enter will be used to position and create the edge of the
manifold texture opposite the topographic profile formed by the trace of the
cross-section line on the terrain surface.
Since you can enter any value for this elevation that is greater or less
than that of the values in the elevation raster object, this manifold object can
go up, down, or intersect the terrain surface.
The polygon boundaries in this new
manifold texture object are the map polygon boundary lines that the
cross-section line intersects in the 2D view, projected vertically down or up to
the horizontal edge you defined by the base-level elevation.
Wherever the cross section line intersects a 2D polygon edge, a vertical
polygon boundary is created. Thus,
all the polygons in this manifold’s texture object have vertical edges that
are parallel in 3D and intersect the cross-section edge at the same points as
the 2D polygons. These polygons in
the manifold texture object are all automatically assigned the same styles and
other attributes as their corresponding 2D polygons as they must match along
their intersection of the 2D vector object and the manifold texture object.
The vector object created as the manifold texture object has polygonal
topology.
The georeference control points created
automatically for this manifold object define the TIN used to shape the manifold
surface upon which the vector texture object is draped.
These control points define a vertical surface that starts at the terrain
surface. One set of points traces
out a cross-section edge that conforms to the terrain surface.
These points vary in XYZ. A
corresponding set of paired points traces out the opposite edge as the vertical
projection of these terrain surface points up or down to the plane of the
elevation you entered. These points
all lie in the same X-Y plane and, thus, have the same Z value.
Since this manifold surface is vertical everywhere, no additional
georeference points are needed to define its position in space, just these
matching pairs of top and bottom points.
Editing a Cross Section Manifold.
The simple polygon shapes in the initial
cross-section manifold texture object can be edited and shaped to meet the
below/above ground conditions on this vertical manifold surface.
Load this manifold object in the Spatial Data Editor; it automatically
displays in a 2D view and as a manifold layer for reference in a 3D view.
It will be stretched out and flattened in the 2D view by using the z
coordinate on the y axis of the 2D view. Proceed
as usual to use the Spatial Data Editor to create the revised representation of
the below ground polygons. This
editing to create a representation of this manifold texture object with the
subsurface volume features is illustrated in the accompanying color plate
entitled Edit Manifold Objects.
Any time you refresh your 2D edit view,
you see how your current changes appear when projected as a texture onto the
manifold surface in the 3D view. As
usual you can add any other manifold or topographic layers into this same 3D
view for reference purposes. For
example, if you have already designed a manifold object that would intersect
this new manifold object, you would want to view both layers in the 3D view.
If you are building a fence diagram, all polygons must match at the
intersections of the manifold surface as illustrated in several color plates.
If you have a stereo viewing device set up on a second monitor, your 3D
manifold layers and corresponding topographic layers can be rotated and viewed
in stereo as you edit their polygon shapes in the 2D view.
This cross section creation and editing
procedure duplicates the way in which most vertical cross sections are created
by drawing them. It quickly
provides an initial vector manifold texture object and its vertically-oriented
manifold surface for your use as a starting point. It creates a basic manifold
object as a starting canvas for your more complex 3D interpretations of a
geologic, archaeological, geotechnical, or any other manifold layer.
For example, this replicates the way geologic sections are inferred and
sketched and resketched by hand. But
instead of sketching them by hand, they are created as vector objects.
This provides that opportunity to view these scenarios and intermediate
results in 3D as they are created. This
is especially important when multiple manifold layers are being created that
will be interrelated in 3D.
Georeferencing a Manifold Surface.
Creating a complex manifold surface for a
manifold texture uses a collection of XYZ points in a geospatial or a Cartesian
coordinate reference system to define its surface.
These XYZ control points must be obtained by some method.
For example, they might represent the coordinates measured to various
layers in a bore hole, from towed sensor arrays, or computed from transects.
These 3D control points become the vertices of the triangles that define
the shape of a TIN onto which the manifold texture object is draped when viewed
in 3D. Using triangles to define a
manifold surface could render a faceted surface.
However, modeling a surface in this manner is very common and used in
many games, 3D viewers, and other 3D computer simulation products.
Whether or not the surface appears curved, folded, faceted, and so on
depends upon factors such as the density of these points, the designation of
edges as fold lines or some other special edge, distance to the triangle,
surface texture projection and shading technique, and so on.
In RV7.0 these 3D
georeference points and special triangle edge effects they define are added to a
raster, vector, and/or CAD object to create a manifold object using a new
procedure in the georeference process, which has been significantly expanded for
this purpose.
Choosing the new 3D Piecewise Affine
model from the menu in the Georeference window permits you to enter XYZ
coordinates for any position you select on the raster, vector, shape, or CAD
object in the 2D view. For example,
suppose the raster object represents a single, flat vertical seismic slice. To
define this vertical plane, you will only need to select the position of 4
points near the corners of the raster and enter their XYZ coordinates in the
control point table in the Georeference window. Since
these 4 points lie on a plane, the manifold surface will be defined by a TIN
with 2 coplanar triangles. If the 4
points are not coplanar, the TIN will have 2 triangles that are not coplanar and
the common edge will be a fold edge in the manifold surface.
If you want the top of the manifold surface to conform to the terrain,
then more control points are needed along the top.
If you want to curve the manifold, then you begin to enter XY values for
points that do not define a plane.
The accompanying color plate entitled Georeferencing
Manifold Surfaces illustrates the positioning of these 3D georeference
points and their tabular entries. In
this example, as is usually the case, the positions of known XYZ coordinates on
the manifold texture object are not at the corners of the object.
If no georeference points are provided at the corners and along the
edges, the TIN created would be smaller than the area of the manifold texture
object. The edge areas of the
manifold texture object would have no manifold surface to project onto and would
simply be clipped off and lost in a 3D view of this manifold object.
To preserve all the surface area
represented in a rectangular manifold object you may want to extrapolate from
the measured and known georeference points to add additional control points at
the corners of the manifold texture object.
This can be done automatically using a built-in procedure.
It extends the plane of the edge triangles defined by your georeference
points. It uses these planes to
interpolate coordinates for the corners of the manifold texture object and adds
them to the control point list. This
is also illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Georeferencing
Manifold Surfaces. Adding new
control points adds new triangles around the edge of the TIN to increase its
area. However, these triangles are
coplanar extensions of the edge triangles created by the 3D georeference points
you entered. You can edit the XYZ
coordinates of these added control points in the table in the georeference
window to modify the orientation of these added edge triangles.
Once you have entered four 3D
georeference points for your manifold texture object, as near to the corners as
possible, you can now open a 3D view in the Georeference process.
It will show you how your manifold surface or object is shaped and
positioned in space from any viewpoint using a wireframe view of the current TIN
or with the manifold texture object projected onto it.
Since this is a standard 3D view, any other manifold and topographic
layers can be added to it for reference purposes.
Views with multiple manifold layers are common and are illustrated on the
color plates. You can then proceed
using the 3D view as reference to edit the positions of the four 3D georeference
points or add more, add 3D interior points to shape the manifold surface,
extrapolate from the interior points to the corners, add exterior points to
expand the surface, and edit the edges of the TIN using procedures discussed in
the following section.
Editing a Manifold Surface.
Sparse Known Control.
The number of 3D georeference points you
have to enter to define the manifold surface can be few in number; a minimum of
4 are required. However,
georeference points that are known in 3D position and can be located on the
corresponding manifold texture object (the raster, vector, and/or CAD objects)
are difficult and expensive to obtain for manifold objects extending above and
below the earth’s terrain surface. The
new 3D Georeference process permits you to use your understanding of the shape
of the manifold surface represented by the manifold texture object to add in
additional XYZ control points. These
points can be used to modify the shape and edges of the TIN that will define the
manifold surface.
Expanding the Control.
You can insert control points into
the list of georeference points for the manifold surface without knowing their
XYZ coordinates or locating their positions on the manifold texture layer. In
positioning and editing these control points to improve the shape the surface
you can use anything you have available:
-
the
current 3D view of the manifold layer and various topographic layers, such as a
drape of a surface geologic map, or natural color or enhanced image overlay,
such as image ratios;
-
boreholes,
radiosond or other atmospheric observations, towed sensor arrays;
-
all
other available non-digital map, image, historical data, and lore about the area
and its volumetric relationships; and
-
most importantly, your personal expertise and skills in 3D inference.
This new feature in the Georeference
process also permits you to edit the triangles of the TIN formed from these
control points to extend and shape the outer edge of the TIN to conform to the
rectangular or irregular edge of the contents of the manifold texture object.
Matching Texture and Surface Objects.
The manifold texture object will be
larger than the coordinate area covered by the TIN connecting the 3D control
points unless there are points at each corner of the object. Conversely you may
have a manifold texture object that has null area representing irregular edges
and holes. Holes present no problem
as they automatically become transparent holes even though the manifold surface
is defined for them. Irregular or
null edges can create irregularities when this manifold layer is viewed with a
topographic layer and other manifold layers. You
may want to use a single manifold texture object that does not curve around in
space but has definite folds. You
may want to add 3D points to your TIN to better shape it in 3D space and in the
view. These special considerations
and conditions require that you edit the TIN you are creating in the
georeference process. You edit the
TIN defining the manifold surface in a 2D view.
However you can monitor the results by opening a 3D view of the manifold
object in the Georeference process. If
you have a stereo viewing device set up on a second monitor, your 3D manifold
layer and its corresponding terrain surface can be rotated and viewed in stereo
as you edit the shape of the manifold surface in the 2D view.
Available Tools.
Choosing the Georeference process opens
the table for entering 3D coordinates and a 2D view of the current TIN and
manifold texture object in flattened 2D form in the Object Georeferencing
window. Choosing the 3D Piecewise
Affine model opens a new Piecewise Control window to provide tools to specify
the special connectivity properties to use when the lines are generated in the
TIN to connect all the control points. This
new window and its use and the effects of using these edit tools are all
illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Editing Manifold Surface
Triangulation.
Adding Hard Edges.
You can use this tool to select any edge
in the TIN and designate the connection between these two control points is to
be a hard, or fold, edge. This hard
edge will be preserved through any activities applied to the TIN built from
these control points. Hard edges
are drawn in the TIN in a different color to differentiate them from soft edges.
Removing Hard Edges.
This tool is used to select a previously
designated hard edge and remove this special connectivity property from the pair
of control points. Thus, the
designation of this edge as hard is deleted and the points may be connected by a
soft edge in the TIN.
Remove Edges.
This tool selects an exterior
triangle’s exterior edge, thus designating that 2 control points at its end
should never be connected in the TIN. This
removes the area of this edge triangle from the TIN usually because it is null
and not covered in the irregular area of the manifold texture object or because
it obscures some other layers when viewed with this manifold layer.
Add Control Point.
This tool inserts a control point into or
outside a triangle without requiring that its coordinates be manually entered.
If the position of the point is inside any triangle, its XYZ values are
interpolated from the surface of that triangle.
It then becomes a valid control point and all the surrounding points
connected to it with soft edges. If
the point is selected outside the area of any current triangle, its XYZ position
is extrapolated by extending the plane of the nearest triangle.
New triangles are formed to redefine the edge.
In either case, once these points that have been inserted into the list
and TIN by this tool, or any other, their XYZ values can be manually edited in
this list in the Georeference window to move them from their initial
interpolated/extrapolated positions. In
this manner, the added interpolated control points can be used to shape the
interior of the TIN or the extrapolated edges.
When used together with the Remove Edges tool, you can shape the outer
edge of the TIN to match the irregular edge of the manifold texture object or
match a terrain layer.
Remove Triangles.
When a triangle is selected that has an
outer edge not shared with any other triangle in the TIN, the outer edge is
removed and its area is no longer included in the TIN.
While this tool has the same result as the Remove Edges tool, it is
sometimes easier in a complex TIN to select a triangle using its interior rather
than directly selecting its outer edge.
Extrapolate Boundary Control
Points.
This tool insures that the TIN is a
parallelogram onto which all the rectangular manifold texture layer can be
projected. This tool has been
discussed above in the section on Georeferencing Manifold Surfaces as it
is often used immediately in connection with entering the known 3D georeference
points and viewing the initial manifold surface in a 3D view. Its use is
illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Georeferencing Manifold
Surfaces.
Recover Deleted Elements.
This icon will undo all previous control
point editing back to the last save of the georeference object.
Using this tool with periodic saves will untangle your editing results
when the triangulation gets too complicated.
As previously discussed above in more
detail, all this edit activity with these tools is performed on the current
representation of the TIN formed from all the current control points and their
connectivity relationships. However,
while you appear to be adding and removing triangle edges, you are actually
merely establishing new relationships between pairs of points in the 3D
georeference subobject for the manifold texture object(s).
Create a Manifold Object Using a Script.
Both a manifold texture object and its
manifold georeference subobject can be created using new classes and functions
added for this purpose to the TNT
geospatial scripting language (SML).
Using these tools, you can build a complete manifold object in geospace
or in some arbitrary Cartesian coordinate space.
The manifold texture object can be imported or computed from equations
using SML.
Similarly the control points to define a manifold shape can be imported
or computed from equations The
simplest application would be to convert a large tabular collection of XYZ
points, too numerous to enter by hand, into a large georeference table. The
introduction of these new classes and functions along with more suggestions for
their uses occur in the section below entitled Geospatial Scripting Language
(SML).
Backward Incompatibilities.
If any object is georeferenced with 3D
points only in RV7.0 for use as a
manifold object, that object and the Project File that contains it can not be
used in any V6.9 or earlier TNT
product. The reasons for this are
identical to those explained above in detail in the section entitled Coordinate
Reference Systems / Backward Incompatibilities.
To avoid this limitation, it is suggested that any objects you intend to
georeference in 3D for use as manifold objects be kept in a separate Project
File if you are also still using V6.9
of your TNT product.
Cartoscripts.
MicroImages’ Reseller in Italy has made their collection of geologic line styling Cartoscripts available for
you to download and use at www.spaziogis.it/index.php?
option=com_docman&Itemid=71. While
these represent lines accepted for use in Italian geologic maps, you can use
them as starting points and modify the scripts for your own nation’s map
conventions.
Georeferencing.
There have been major changes in this
process and these are discussed in detail in the section above entitled Manifolds.
Some of these changes, such as the ability to name your control points,
will effect you if if you are not using any manifold operations in this process.
Raster Resampling
Using Georeference.
This
interface has been redesigned to use a window with tabbed panels.
The Rasters tabbed panel shows the list of selected rasters along with
properties, including dimensions, georeference extent, and Coordinate Reference
System. The Settings tabbed panel
shows all available settings so there is no longer a need to browse each of the
menus to see what the various options are set to.
When resampling to match a reference
raster in cell size and orientation, the output raster cells will now exactly
align with the reference raster cells regardless of the Extents setting.
This is useful when there is only a partial overlap with the designated
reference raster.
When resampling to geographic
(latitude-longitude) coordinates, the cell size is now specified in
degrees/minutes/seconds. As usual,
values may be entered in decimal degrees, though they will be shown for the
cells in degrees/minutes/seconds.
Options are now available for choosing
the pyramid computation method. Available
choices are None, Average, Sample, and Automatic.
The default Automatic choice will use sampling when the resample method
is nearest-neighbor and averaging when bilinear or cubic convolution is used.
The reference raster and related settings
are automatically reset when a new set of input rasters is chosen.
A null mask subobject is no longer
created for the output raster if the input raster does not have a null value
defined and set.
Raster Mosaic.
The
TNT products are superior to any
other in displaying and managing massive images.
Integrating all the pieces of your images (for example, DOQQs or
orthoimages) into a single, large layer can be very convenient for your further
analysis, for use in a TNTatlas, TNTsim3D,
TNTserver, and so on.
This is even the best procedure if your ultimate objective is to break up
the image into new, smaller geographic units after your analysis.
A common example is to assemble orthoimages into a single, large image
with a common coordinate system, work with this mosaic, and then divide it into
new pieces and the map projection required in some other system.
Your use of the mosaic process to create
these massive but convenient images has been discussed briefly in the Editorial
section above. Additional detailed
information about the creation of compressed massive images was discussed in
detail in the MEMO entitled Release of RV6.9 of the TNT products and
dated 31 December 2003
in the section entitled JPEG2000 Compression.
RV7.0 of the mosaic process
has no dramatic change in its interface or many features.
However, considerable attention has been addressed to increasing its
robustness and optimizing its performance for these large tasks.
Null Mask.
Mosaic now automatically generates a null
mask layer and its pyramids to define non-data areas and null cells in the
output raster. It, and any other
process that displays this output raster, will automatically use this null mask
as will other processes converted to do so.
This also significantly improves the mosaic’s handling of input rasters
that have no null value or different null values.
First Raster Overlap.
An overlap mode of First Raster has been
added whereby cells from the first raster in the list covering each output cell
will be used. The mode of Last
Raster was available in RV6.9 and
earlier, but now you do not need to reorder your selections to use the first
raster.
* Output to JPEG2000.
RV6.9
of the TNT products required that
you mosaic your raster and then use the Extract process to apply JPEG2000
compression to it. The mosaic
process in RV7.0 permits you to
apply lossless or lossy JPEG2000 compression to your mosaicked output raster
object. The many objects you select
for input to mosaic can be any of a mixture of uncompressed or objects
compressed with JPEG, JPEG2000, or in any mixed coordinate reference system
(CRS). Note that DPCM, or
Differential Pulse Code Modulation, is now called Standard Lossless compression
in TNT dialogs.
Also selected and mixed in can be linked external rasters with or without
compression such as GeoTIFFs, MrSID, ECW, TIFF, and others as long as they are
georeferenced and their CRS identified internally or via an auxiliary file.
To permit this flexibility, the Mosaic process still requires that it be
provided with adequate drive space to create the entire mosaicked raster object
in its final uncompressed and also compressed form if compression is specified.
Also, as discussed earlier in this MEMO, using tiles during the
compression procedure to avoid creating temporary storage for the full
uncompressed raster then compressing it, can have detrimental effects at the
tile edges and legal ramifications. The
accompanying color plate entitled Mosaic Directly into JPEG2000 provides
sample results from mosaicking 100 GeoTIFF images directly into a single
JPEG2000 raster object.
Temporary Storage Requirements.
In RV7.0
each input raster object is uncompressed as needed and resampled into this large
raster object using your desired CRS, sampling method, overlap method, and so
on. The size of this uncompressed
temporary mosaic can be closely estimated in advance from the extents of your
input objects, compressed or not, and your setting for the mosaicking process.
However, if you are requesting that your mosaic produce a compressed
output raster object (for example, a lossless JPEG2000 result), this temporary
raster must coexist in your storage system at the same time as the uncompressed
result. However, the exact size of
a compressed raster may not be accurately estimated.
It can be closely estimated for a JPEG2000 compression (for example a
request of 10:1 lossy compression). However, the size of a mosaic object using
JPEG compression or JPEG2000 Best Quality is not so easy (for example, a request
for a 75% JPEG lossy result). If
you target a compressed raster output, then at the onset the mosaic process will
liberally estimate this additional storage requirement and warn you if the
temporary and total drive space available would likely be insufficient to
complete the final compressed or uncompressed mosaicked object.
Sample Applications.
The following kinds of test applications
have been used to challenge and confirm the robustness of the Mosaic process
especially for producing a JPEG2000 compressed raster object.
Lossy JPEGs into Lossless JPEG2000.
Lossy compression should never be applied
to images to save storage space when those images will be used for some form of
computer image analysis. However,
using lossless JPEG2000 or standard lossless compression (formerly called DPCM)
can be specified for a mosaic result intended for additional analysis. Keep
in mind that Mosaicking images, depending upon your settings, may alter them by
resampling, by feathering the edges, and so on.
However, many orthoimages, especially those collected by digital cameras
from the air, are being distributed as JPEGs or as lossy compressed TIFFs.
To avoid excessive additional changes in these already lossy compressed
images, you might want to link to and select them as input for your mosaic and
choose lossless JPEG2000 as the compression method for your mosaicked
raster object.
Over 6000 units of color Digital Ortho
Quarter Quads (DOQQs of 3.75' by 3.75' ground areas) are available from the site
of the Nebraska Department of Natural Resources.
http://www.dnr.state.ne.us/databank/fsa03.html.
These DOQQs were acquired using an airborne digital imaging system and
are in 24-bit color with 1-meter resolution.
They are provided for downloading in both UTM and Nebraska State Plane
CRSs using JPEG compression. Remember,
JPEG is always lossy compression! Although
the JPEG compression is about 20 to 1, no JPEG artifacts are evident and image
quality color balance between units is good.
These JPEG DOQQs (*.jpg) files are each provided with a georeference via
a companion world file (*.jgw) file of the same name.
It is a simple matter to select hundreds of them in mosaic, which will
autolink to them. Mosaic can then
assemble them into a single JPEG2000 lossless output raster object representing
a county or some other project unit. Since
the input objects were heavily compressed JPEG files, the lossless JPEG2000
mosaic is also of a significantly reduced size.
A future development in mosaic would be to permit it to use a region
defining the irregular boundary of a county or project to control the portion of
the input objects to mosaic and even to automatically select the objects needed
from a common directory(s).
Lossy MrSID into Lossy JPEG2000.
Landsat 24-bit color orthoimages of
15-meter resolution can be downloaded for almost all the earth except for the
poles for circa 1990 and circa 2000. These
NASA sponsored orthoimages are in 6 by 6 degree units and are compressed about
30 to 1 into MrSID files. These
MrSID images (*.sid) can be downloaded with their georeference provided in a
companion world file (*.sdw). Mosaic
can then link to these files and convert them into a single province- or
country-covering raster object and apply lossy or lossless JPEG2000 compression.
Now you can prepare and substitute a 15-meter color image coverage of
your nation in place of the 1-kilometer MODIS images distributed with RV6.9
on the Global Reference Geodata DVD. Using
reasonable compression for your JPEG2000 results will permit you to use these
large coverage images in your projects including their free distribution with TNTatlas,
TNTsim3D, and via TNTserver.
Predefined Raster
Combinations.
Statistics for corresponding cells in a
set of rasters can be computed using the Statistics operation under the
Algebraic combination category. This
procedure computes two output raster objects, one containing the cell-by-cell
mean and the other the cell-by-cell standard deviation for the selected input
raster objects. This operation
might be used, for example, to compute cell-by-cell statistics for a time-series
of vegetation index rasters (or rasters containing any other measured or
computed numerical value).
An Exclusive Union (XOR) logical
operation can be performed on a set of binary raster objects.
Like the previously-available logical AND and logical OR operations, the
XOR operation produces a binary raster object.
When performed on a pair of input rasters, XOR produces a cell value of 1
if either input has value 1, but not both.
Thus the result is 1 if the two corresponding input cells have different
values (0 and 1) but 0 if the two input cells have the same value (1 and 1 or 0
and 0). When you select more than
two input objects, the operation is performed sequentially: input 1 XOR input 2,
result 1 XOR input 3, result 2 XOR input 4, and so on.
In general, the cell result will be 1 where the number of input 1's is
odd and 0 where the number of input 1's is even.
Raster to Vector
Boundary.
This process will now warn you if you are
requesting it to convert a highly variable input raster into a vector object.
Since this is a somewhat qualitative appraisal by the program, you can
override this warning and attempt to proceed.
Converting a raster object to a vector
object is generally applied to categorical or theme rasters or to the results of
automated image processing which categorizes the image into a few classes
grouped into clusters of cells of equal value.
It is not usually meaningful or useful to convert a highly variable
raster object such as an unprocessed image to a vector object.
Representing a cell as a vector polygon with topology will inflate the
storage for that cell by about 100 times. This
is not due to the vertices for the polygon but the overhead associated with the
definition of a polygon. This
overhead is not increased appreciably when the polygon bounds a meaningful area
of uniform cells, but is prohibitive when each cell or a small number of cells
make up each polygon. It is also
very time-consuming to make this large number of conversions.
Thus, this inappropriate kind of conversion will either take so much time
to complete that you would conclude that it was not working or produce a huge
object. Another result would be
that it would run out of storage space since the storage can not be estimated
before the vector object is complete—it could easily grow to 100 times the
count of the cells in an image.
Import/Export.
Vector Import.
CARIS ASCII graphical data files can now
imported. CARIS is a vendor of
GIS-oriented products focused upon hydrographic and coastal applications.
MapInfo MIF files now import with
improved support for text fonts, color, and styles.
Vector Export.
Geography Markup Language (GML) files
conforming to version 2.x can be exported from vector or CAD objects.
GML (*.gml) is the OpenGIS’s XML encoding for the transport and storage
of geographic information, including both the geometry and properties of
geographic features. Specifications
for GML can be found at www.opengis.org/ specs/?page=specs.
ESRI shapefile export can now export
vector or CAD label elements as shapefile point elements with the label string
as the database record entry for the point.
Raster Import / Linking.
ESRI ArcGrid files can now be imported in
all forms including even when they are compressed.
Images in the Robinson projection can now
be imported from the ArcGrid format.
PNG (*.png) import will now recognize the
ICM color profile tag in the PNG file and import the ICM color profile as a
subobject of the raster object. If
the ICM color profile does not exist but the gamma and chromaticity values do,
then an ICM color profile object is created under the raster to contain the
gamma and chromaticity values.
MrSID files (*.sid) can now be imported
or autolinked on all supported platforms (Mac OS X, Linux/Unix, and Windows).
In V6.9 this capability could
only be used on Windows-based platforms.
Now MrSID files can also be used interchangeably on all TNT
supported platforms.
TIFF import and auto-link
will now convert the metadata in the TIFF directory to a metadata
subobject in the Project File.
Sun Raster (*.ras) import will look for
the companion world file (*.snw) of the same name and transfer its georeference
into the corresponding raster object.
Raster Export.
When export georeference to
“descriptive text” all Coordinate Reference System (CRS) details are
included.
PNG
export process now exports the opacity mask for the file as the alpha channel.
The export will also export the ICM color profile if one exists under the
raster object.
TIFF export now optionally provides
“pack bits” compression for 8-bit rasters and uses it by default
instead of LZW compression.
GeoTIFF export now optionally creates a
conamed companion world file (*.tfw) containing its georeference data.
Some other products read a GeoTIFF as a TIFF and expect the georeference
information to be available in this world file.
The scale factor for the Lambert Conformal Conic projection is now also
included in the GeoTIFF.
Font Management.
Previous issues of this MEMO have
discussed in detail the issues of font management that plague this industry due
to font copyrights, varied font rendering methods, and other similar issues some
of which must date all the way back to Gutenberg.
Your problems arise when you move projects and results between various
computers and are even more likely when the move is between platforms with
different operating systems. This
even occurs when your cross platform activities (for example, Windows to Mac)
are totally within the TNT products.
The new location or operating system may not have the same fonts
available and you may have used one that can not be moved due to a copyright,
can not be rendered well on the device (paper versus monitor), and so on.
At that point the software at the destination has no choice but to make
font substitutions with or without your input.
Font substitution is likely to occur in
published results such as the TNTatlas,
SVG layouts, and PDF documents that can be designed to run across all platforms.
To minimize the impact of this, MicroImages has continued to improve how
font substitutions are made within the TNT
products and your project results. Two
forms of font substitution are now used in RV7.0:
“considerate automated substitution” or in the order of your preprogrammed
list of “designer specified substitution.”
Considerate Automatic Substitution.
TNT
font substitution is automatically used when you have specified only one font
and it is not available. It is
“considerate” because it does not make arbitrary substitution, which is
common, but matches up fonts that have similar appearance, for example sans
serif fonts are replaced by other public domain sans serif fonts.
These TNT substitutions are
preprogrammed for various font styles. The
substitutions are listed in a table on the accompanying color plate entitled Font
Substitution in the TNT Products.
Designer Font Substitution.
When you choose a font name or family
during the design of your project, you are attaching that font name to that text
string (for example, {~FArial-Bold.ttf}), which would render the character
string with this format code in Arial Bold.
However, you can define your preferred substitution using the form
{~Farialbd.ttf,Helvetica.dfont;2,Arial-Bold.ttf}.
This will be interpreted by TNT
processes to mean use the Microsoft version of Arial bold if it is available, if
not try for Helvetica, then try for the Sun version of Arial bold.
If none of these fonts can be found, then automated substitutions will be
made. The superior results of using
designer or considerate automatic font substitution for a DataTip created with
Arial fonts in Windows and then moved to a Mac to find and use Helvetica is
illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Font Substitution in the
TNT Products.
Map Calculator.
The map calculator use and operation
remains about the same as RV6.9.
However, it now takes complete advantage of the new Coordinate Reference
System (CRS) introduced in RV7.0.
See the above major section entitled New Coordinate Reference System
for details on these many new, possible conversions.
* Advanced
Geometric Object Conversion.
Diverging
Objectives.
CAD
software has a very large user base; why doesn’t this software dominate the
GIS application area? Vector
topology provides the basis for many useful area oriented operations; why is it
not maintained in GIS systems? Geo-oriented
games have the largest installed user base of all and have their own graphical
storage structures. IT managers are
in charge in large, centralized enterprises that build their business
infrastructure on databases software including any geographical data.
Web servers have their own preferred graphics formats, which they try to
adapt to fit their geographic requirements.
All
of these important spatial endeavors are built up on graphical data structures.
However, all these various structures are quite different since their
primary application, while it may be spatial in nature, is quite different.
All of you have experienced this in attempting to convert CAD data to GIS
data and vice versa in some software package.
It can be done, but the results can be unusable.
Converting a CAD drawing with many blocks and individual lines with their
own part description into a vector object can produce a very bloated vector
object with complex topology. Converting
a vector object to a CAD object can also produce complex results as everything
can be in pieces and no concept of organized subparts, such as blocks, will be
represented. In fact, shape type data storage structures evolved into existence
to better fill the gulf in the middle of the CAD, vector, and database
structures.
Resulting
Complications.
Alas,
if you are truly engaged in geospatial analysis, not just isolated in GIS,
engineering, database management, … you will quickly learn the value of these
different structures. You also
quickly learn that the geospatial analyst has to deal with each and all of them
with facility. A typical simple
urban project will have property information in CAD form, ownership records in
some database structure, historical data such as deeds in paper form or as
scanned PDFs; requirements to upgrade it all with MrSID, JP2, or JPEG images;
images of buildings in JPEG; a desire to go online to serve its internal needs
(intranet) or public access (Internet); and so on.
And this simple problem is repeated over and over worldwide with varying
degrees of existing data preparation and quality.
Major nations do not even have a documented cadastre or records of where
things are on or in the ground. These
kinds of issues get much more complicated when the source materials that do
exist are not only in these different formats, which are “optimal” for their
current use, but also jealously guarded in that format for compartmentalized
business or military turf or other compartmentalized reasons.
Integrating
Disparate Strategies.
All
of this is already clear to many of you who, by buying your TNTmips,
understood the need to deal with using each of these project components in its
optimal form. You also realize that
at some point in a geospatial analysis process, you will need to move geodata
between these formats with as much facility as possible or use them together
such as in a TNTatlas.
Perhaps this is merely a requirement to link to that data structure and
add it as a display layer. Perhaps
you need to edit that data structure. Eventually
you will need to move from one structure to another.
As
an encompassing geospatial system, not a GIS, CAD, database … system, TNTmips
and its associated products are focused upon meeting all these diverse
requirements. RV7.0
makes significant gains in improving the integrated use of these common, but
marketed different data structures that you will encounter and use.
This is an evolutionary process and never will be truly easy.
Gradually TNTmips is
supporting the direct use of these data structures as layers, without import,
directly from their various native formats.
Shapefiles can now be used in this manner.
JPEG and PNG rasters have also been added to this list.
Geometric
Conversion Engine.
Improved
Integration.
RV7.0
introduces into several key processes a new Geometric Conversion Engine, which
consolidates the fragmented code used in the processes to convert between
vector, shape, CAD, TIN, and region data structures.
This immediately made it possible to create and plan for many new
features in those TNT processes that
previously only extracted and/or copied geodata within a specific object type.
Using this new engine, Copy and Paste and the processes to Extract and
Merge can now automatically convert data between these geometric data types (for
example, CAD to vector). This
powerful new engine also incorporates all the “transparency” properties you
expect in a TNT process.
For example, the Coordinate Reference System (for example, projection) of
the source data (which means, the copied area) may be different from that of the
destination (which means, the paste layer) and will be converted as it is
inserted.
Expanded
Capabilities.
In
these reincarnated processes, you can use any of the TNT
selection procedures to determine what source elements to use in the conversion
process. This inherent TNT
capability also takes advantage of the new and greatly expanded Coordinate
Reference System released in RV7.0
and discussed elsewhere in this MEMO. You
can now also elect to use a complex region boundary to define the area to be
converted in these processes in addition to how the edge effects should be
handled (which means, partially inside, completely inside, …).
And bigger objects being converted to vector form use the faster and more
powerful validation engine and its new abilities to resolve conflation problems
when the source and destination objects have many complex overlapping features
as discussed in detail elsewhere in this MEMO.
With these powerful new capabilities now in place in RV7.0,
you can expect more capabilities along these lines to appear in the TNT
products to further define what a geospatial analysis system should be capable
of. The current new conversion
capabilities are summarized in the following subsections and a sample is
illustrated in the accompanying color plate entitled Geometric Object
Conversion.
Faster
Operation.
Merge, Combine, Extract, and copy/paste
operations to a vector object is now faster due to improvements in the
topological validation step. While
this step is faster in RV7.0 its
result is greatly improved as it is checking for and resolving conflation
problems in the output vector object.
*
Geometric Object Conversions.
Using
the new integrated common code Geometric Conversion Engine “Vector to CAD,”
“CAD to Vector,” “Region to Vector,” and “TIN to Vector” processes
have been replaced by a new set of processes called “Geometric to Vector,”
“Geometric to CAD,” and “Geometric to Region.”
The term “Geometric” refers to any spatial object that is not a
raster, raster set, or hyperspectral object.
The current geometric set includes vector, CAD, TIN, shape, and region
objects. Therefore, the new
“Geometric to Vector” process will allow selection of CAD, TIN, shape, and
region objects to convert to vector objects. “Geometric
to CAD” will allow the selection of the vector, TIN, shape, and region objects
to convert to CAD objects. “Geometric
to Region” will allow the selection of vector, CAD, and shape objects to
convert to region objects. All of
the “Geometric to…” processes now support selection of multiple files.
The
Geometric Conversion Engine that is used in the conversion processes can accept
subsets of the source objects using the options “By Script,” “By
Attribute,” and “By Element” to generate which elements to convert.
“By Script” is used to select elements via query, “By Attribute”
is selecting elements via record attachment, and “By Element” uses the
elements selected via the user interface. These
all work in conjunction with the region selection capability.
For example, you can choose a CAD object, select some of its elements via
a script and limit the area using a region to convert or merge to a vector
object.
In the Geometric to CAD process if a
vector object is selected, a line is created in the destination CAD object if
the vector line has an attachment to a record in a user defined table, even if
the vector line is part of a polygon that was transferred to the CAD object as
well.
*
Merging Objects.
Process
/ CAD / Merge… and Process / Vector / Merge… now allow selection of other
geometric objects to be merged into the destination vector or CAD object.
These geometric objects include vector, CAD, TIN, shape, and region
objects.
The
Geometric Conversion Engine that is used in the Merge processes can accept
subsets of the source objects using the options “By Script,” “By
Attribute,” and “By Element” to generate which elements to convert.
“By Script” is used to select elements via query, “By Attribute”
is selecting elements via record attachment, and “By Element” uses the
elements selected via the user interface. These
all work in conjunction with the region selection capability.
For example, you can select a CAD object, select some of its elements via
a script and limit the area using a region to convert or merge to a vector
object.
The vector Merge process now allows the
selection of the topology type (polygonal, planar, and network) for the
resulting vector object or the merge process will automatically determine the
best topology level given the source objects.
* Vector and CAD
Extraction.
These Extract processes are now
integrated into the Geometric Object Conversion process discussed above.
They can still be accessed on the menu under this older entry to avoid
confusion.
CAD Object
Warping.
CAD object warping now supports
densification of the elements.
Spatial Data
Editor.
* Copy.
The Copy / Paste operation now has
significantly expanded capabilities using the new Geometric Object Conversion
engine discussed above. You can now
copy from a vector, CAD, TIN, region, or linked shape object (which means,
shapefile) including linked objects. During
the copy operation, you can select the irregular area to copy from any using a
region object. This copy area
selected from a vector, linked shape, CAD, or TIN layer can be optionally
controlled as appropriate to the source object type to be Partially Inside,
Completely Inside, Clip Inside, Partially Outside, Completely Outside, and Clip
Outside the source object. An
example of the application of this feature is illustrated in the accompanying
color plate entitled Copy/Paste between Geometric Objects.
* Paste.
Regardless of the type of geometric
object selected for the copy operation, the subarea can be pasted into a CAD
object or into a vector object and their relational database structures will be
reconciled. The topology will also
be validated if the target is a vector object.
Future capabilities will permit other geometric objects as the generic
paste destination (for example, a shape object).
This strategy is another big step forward in permitting your TNT
application to understand, interchange, integrate, and take advantage of the
unique and useful properties of each of these widely, but usually separately
used geometric data structures.
Toggle Through Mixed Elements.
Right Mouse Button operations will now
allow you to toggle through nearby elements (not just vector element types as in
previous TNTedit versions) for
vector and CAD editable objects. For
example, two or three vector labels lie on top of each other as a result of
label auto generation. Pressing the
right mouse button will select one of the labels, then pressing the tab key will
toggle through the other labels and any lines, polygons, nodes, and points that
are nearby, allowing the selection of the label you want to move.
For CAD elements, holding the right mouse button and pressing the tab key
will toggle through all of the CAD elements it found within its search distance
allowing you to edit elements that are hard to select.
These time saving actions are illustrated in the accompanying color plate
entitled Step through Elements with Tab Key.
Manifolds.
Creation and / or editing of a spatial
object with a manifold georeference is now supported.
When opening a reference or editable spatial object with a manifold
georeference, the editor will generate a set of dialogs for a separate 3D view.
This 3D view will contain a layer referring to the manifold georeferenced
object in the Editor’s View window. Any
other reference layers can be viewed in the 3D view window.
Creating a new object over the reference manifold georeference object
will copy the manifold georeference to the new object.
All reference and editable layers in the Editor’s View window must have
the equivalent manifold georeference. When
all of the layers that have a manifold georeference are removed from the edit
view, the associated dialogs are closed.
Undo.
Changes made in the Numeric Edit tool can
now be reversed using the “Undo” button.
Database Features.
Table Setup.
Background.
A single graphical element can have many
attributes accompanying it in the fields and records in a relational database
structure. Some projects require
that you think out very carefully the required tables and then design their
internal record structure including records, fields, and value data type.
You should also carefully structure these tables so that their relational
structure simplifies them and their subsequent use.
A single flat database table can quickly grow huge to have hundreds or
thousands of different fields and millions of records with a poor design and
extensive duplication. A relational
structure has small compact tables with linkages to minimize this record and
table duplication. An intelligently
designed structure can make your geospatial analysis much easier.
If you were trained and/or experienced with database systems, you knew
all about this. If you are a
geospatial analyst, you need to learn this skill quickly.
As soon as you begin combining geometric layers, you will quickly see the
impact of your skill level in this area and improve it.
TNT provides the tools you
need to create your tables and structure, monitor their hierarchy, and to
simplify, revise, and restructure it.
Wizard.
A simple wizard approach is now used when
you set up a new table in the Spatial Data Editor or any other process and its
steps are illustrated in the dialogs in the accompanying 2-sided color plate
entitled Database Table Creation Wizard.
After you designate the new table’s name and description you are
prompted in a dialog to select from the 6 attachment types you can use for the
records in this table (for example, one element per record, one record per
element, …). If you choose any
except the first option on this list, you are creating a directly related table
and are next presented the Table Definition dialog to set up its contents.
If you select the first attachment type, “Relate to another table
through a key field,” the next wizard dialog will prompt you to select the
field and table that the new table you are creating will use as a relational
link to your graphical elements. If
you have chosen a primary key in the old table as the link field for your new
table, you will now be taken to the Table Definition dialog so you can continue
on to design the contents of your new table.
If you choose any other field in the old table to link to, then the
wizard will ask which table should contain the primary key field for their
linkage. When this selection has
been made, you are given the Table Definition dialog to design the internal
structure of your new table.
Virtual Tables.
Virtual fields are those whose value is
defined at the time of their use, such as when they are presented in a DataTip.
Virtual fields are computed or string expressions that can be selected in
the Table Definition dialog from the “Field Type” button.
Once a virtual field is set up, it is used and managed just as if it were
a real field. Virtual fields can be
used to compute a DataTip’s contents (using an equation or a script) and to
format the result (using string expressions and format codes).
Virtual fields can be used for many other geospatial applications, such
as computing a spatially varying URL link and then starting a browser with it.
For example, selecting a zip code polygon can insert its real field zip
code value into a virtual field that already contains the rest of the string
expression needed to start a browser and retrieve the weather page for that zip
code.
A virtual table contains only virtual
fields. This is analogous to
setting up a “View” if you are familiar with relational database products.
When using virtual fields, it can be convenient, even necessary, to create
virtual tables in your relational table structure to contain them and support
the special features they provide. A
table you set up using the wizard will automatically be virtual if it does not
have any real fields and you use the Table Design dialog to create one or more
virtual fields in it. Once
established in your relational structure, a virtual table looks and operates as
if it were a real table. It can be
seen in your database hierarchal tree view, transferred, reused, altered, and so
on. An example using a virtual
table and the sample scripts defining its virtual fields is in the accompanying
2-sided color plate entitled Database Wizard and Virtual Tables.
Database Management.
Deleting duplicate records now detects if
the table attachment type would prevent a record from becoming attached to
multiple elements and, if so, gives you the opportunity to change the attachment
type to something less restrictive.
Current
attachments are retained when changing the table attachment type from “implied
one-to-one” to another direct attachment method.
Text Editor.
Tabs
can now be set in text blocks using the tab key.
This is especially useful in creating vertical alignment of your text,
especially in DataTips as illustrated in the multi-line DataTip on the
accompanying color plate entitled Property Viewer Atlas for
Lincoln,
NE.
Fonts
can now be specified by their family name (“Times New Roman”) as well as by
font file name (times.ttf) when using text formatting codes.
When
specifying the font for a character string in a text block using {~} codes, you
can now specify multiple fonts in case the preferred font can not be found.
The order in which the font names are entered will determine the order of
your preference for their use.
Double-clicking on a word now selects the
word instead of the whole line. Triple
clicking now selects the whole line.
Keyboard shortcuts for Cut/Copy/Paste
have been changed at your request to ctrl+x, crtl+c, crtl+v to conform to common
use in most other software.
A keyboard shortcut (ctrl+s) is available
for Save.
Style Editor.
Styles
are now sorted alphabetically.
Map
Layouts.
Antialiased and Thin Line Width Hinting
settings are now being controlled on an individual layer by layer basis (this
effects vector, CAD, TIN, map grid, shape, and region objects).
This means layouts will render consistently from machine to machine. In
V6.9 these setting were made in user
preferences and globally controlled both antialiasing and thin line width
hinting. Antialiasing and thin line
width settings are now also used in 3D renderings.
Render to SVG.
Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) is the
graphics format developed and promoted by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)
based on XML. The optional features
added to control the rendering of a
TNT map layout into SVG continues to
expand: partially because SVG is an excellent layout structure for use in web
applications, especially for interactive maps, and partially because it is a
format for communicating graphics information between a TNTserver
and the TNTclients.
You continue to expand your use of this format and request these kinds of
optional control features.
A new SVG class in the geospatial
scripting language (SML) permits
scripts to render objects or views into SVG.
All the SVG output rendering options are available.
It is best to refer to SVG as a layout
since it can carry with it linked fonts, linked style sheets and styles, linked
rasters in several formats, and other files.
The graphics and their use of these the components are in a file but
these other items need not be.
SVG Control Window.
Rendering a layout to SVG is about 2
times faster in RV7.0.
The Render to SVG window has been redesigned to present the RV6.9
and many new options via tabbed panels. These
are summarized on the accompanying color plate entitled Render Complex
Layouts to SVG. More will be
added as needed, particularly to control the operation of additional JavaScripts,
which you can append to the SVG file. The
accompanying color plate illustrates this window and summarizes the options it
provides.
The Render to SVG window initially has
two active panels: Options and
Raster Controls and the rest are inactive.
It also has toggle buttons that can be used to indicate which special
feature JavaScripts to append to your SVG.
Adding these will enable the SVG viewer or other application to
automatically use DataTips, Measurement tools, Layer Controls, and Coordinate
Display features in your SVG. When
any of these optional tool toggles is selected, the corresponding tabbed panel
is activated and can be optionally selected to change the default settings
controlling how that feature will function by altering the JavaScript that is
added. The JavaScript for
Coordinate Display has no options and, thus, no corresponding tabbed panel.
The reverse side of the accompanying color plate entitled Render
Complex Layouts to SVG reviews the functions of these JavaScripts and their
optional operations.
Options Panel.
Resolution.
The final use of your SVG can vary widely
from its use as a conveyance for a subset of graphics for a limited area of a
screen view, to a complete, high resolution map in a portable format.
For example, a thin network client (minimal local capability) responding
to a minimum bandwidth requirement might request the SVG scale controlled
coverage (thus, the portion of a vector or CAD object) that covers the current
view.
A thick client designed to do a lot of
local work with the server’s data and using a broadband connection might
simply get all the map layout’s contents (vectors, database, …) in an SVG
layout and work with them locally off line.
In the thick client example, the precision of the coordinates and the
resolution of the rasters need not exceed that for the current view.
The client will come back and request a new SVG to revise the view.
Since this is the same engine that renders to SVG in TNTserver,
the options panel accepts a resolution value to control the graphics and raster
precision for your targeted SVG application.
Using the value of 100 will produce an SVG layout that is minimal in size
and only matches the precision of your conversion to the current view.
A value larger than 100 will increase the detail transferred from the
objects in the TNT layout into the
SVG layout. This value applies to
all layers and if set very high will transfer all the detail available but no
more.
Toggles are available to control the
following, some are new and some are not:
-
render
the full layout including hidden and layers currently turned off for the view
scale;
-
clip
output to the current view;
-
link
to style sheets to share them and avoid duplication versus using inline or
embedded style sheets to insure they are available;
-
inline,
or embedded, styles to insure they are available rather than linking to them for
sharing with other SVG files without duplication;
-
apply
gzip compression to the XML file and replace extension *.svg with *.svgz (the
accepted convention denoting this compression);
-
use
XML entities for strings if you plan to edit the XML of the SVG layout;
-
embed
the SVG file into an HTML framework (for use in Internet explorer only);
-
embed
TrueType fonts to insure they are available (for use with Adobe or Batik
viewers); and
-
optimize
for use with Adobe Illustrator to avoid issues with scale controlled views.
Raster Controls Panel.
Toggles are available to control the
following:
-
embed
images in the SVG file to insure they are always available rather than simply
linking to them so that they can be shared with other processes;
-
use
only PNGs, which use lossless compression, because it may be better suited to
your image data;
-
set
a preference to use JPEG lossy compressed rasters; and
-
change the JPEG compression from
approximately 35% to some other desired level.
DataTip Panel.
It is important to keep in mind that
DataTips in the TNT products can
make extensive use of virtual fields, which are evaluated at the time they are
exposed. For example, DataTips
presenting material from several layers could change if the tables/records/field
values being evaluated are changing in the tables.
This capability is not supported in SVG DataTips.
When you choose to include TNT
DataTips using virtual fields in your SVG, they are all evaluated and converted
to real fields as part of the rendering process. The reverse of the accompanying
color plate entitled Render Complex Layouts to SVG illustrates how a
multi-line DataTip defined in TNT
using a virtual field is converted into SVG and then pops in using the Adobe SVG
plugin for Internet Explorer.
As discussed above in the section on
GraphTips, a TNT Display Control
Script provides for complex mouseover events.
A simple application is to detect that the cursor is over a small symbol
or label and automatically balloon it up so it can be read.
By modifying this DataTip JavaScript, this same effect can be added for
your labels and pinmapped symbols showing in your SVG.
When your cursor is over one of these elements, they will automatically
zoom up according to the Symbol Enlargement Ratio you set on this panel, which
defaults to 2X. Note that
these are labels and symbols that are already showing in the SVG view and this
effect is separate from the TNT
pop-in action associated with any DataTips you have included.
The accompanying color plate entitled Render Complex Layouts to SVG
shows that positioning the cursor over a symbol can enlarge it by this factor
and also pop in an associated DataTip for the same feature.
This panel also programs this JavaScript
to change the transparency of the frame from the default of 50%.
It also toggles the highlight for the element used for the DataTips from
the default, which is your selected highlight color for the TNT
products, to complementary highlighting and can be set to blink the highlight
selected to draw attention to it.
Measure Panel.
At this time this panel has only one
option, which determines the drawing paradigm: click and drag (toggle on) or
click for each vertex (toggle off) to add the JavaScript for the chosen
paradigm. An illustration of the
use of the measurement tool is illustrated on the reverse of the color plate
entitled Render Complex Layouts to SVG.
Layer Controls.
At this time this panel has two options,
which are to add the Adobe Menu JavaScript for layer control in the SVG or a
layer control panel. You can choose
either, neither, or both. The Adobe
Menu JavaScript will present Adobe’s layer controls via the right mouse button
and only in the Adobe SVG viewer. This
Layer Control Pane now has a toggle icon and a “close” button to allow users
the option of making its usage visible or hidden. The
layer controls added by TNT and
Adobe JavaScripts are both illustrated on the reverse side of the accompanying
color plate entitled Render Complex Layouts to
SVG.
Rendering to PDF.
Print
to PDF / Illustrator now renders the PDF based on the layout settings rather
than requiring adjustments in the print dialog (essentially they needed to
match). This makes it easier to
switch back and forth from rendering to one print destination to another by
allowing you to use the same layout for printing to a printer and subsequently
rendering to a PDF. In RV6.9
you would nearly always need to make a different layout for targeting a local
printer for hardcopy and for quality control and then rendering to a PDF.
Color Matching.
The
release MEMO for V6.9 entitled Release
of the RV6.9 Products and dated 31 December 2003 discussed color matching in
detail. It noted that ICM profiles
are not provided for all large format HP color printers, especially older
models. It was subsequently found
that you can download these ICM profiles for your large HP color printers from
Pantone at www.pantone.com/support/support.asp?.idArticle=72.
Geospatial
Scripting Language (SML).
Introduction.
The
TNT scripting language used
throughout the TNT products
(formerly the Spatial Manipulation Language) is now referred to as the
geospatial scripting language since this better reflects its current utility.
It may also be referred to as SML,
geospatial scripting, TNT scripts,
or simply scripts or scripting when the context is clear.
Considerable
programming effort has continued to be invested in SML
to provide a clean, documented, powerful scripting language aimed at those who
have special geospatially oriented objectives.
SML continues new uses such
as in the new Display Control Scripts and startup script applications added in RV7.0.
TNTmips
is a broad-based geospatial analysis system designed to complete as many
industry-common projects as possible using widely available geodata and to do
them fast and efficiently. However,
it is not reasonable to expect that any such system can solve specific unique
project needs and research activities. What
TNT scripting provides is a means to
add, extend, supplement, prepare data, … to resolve these special but needed
steps or activities.
When
a complex task is at hand, especially if it is to be repeated, time spent to
automate its steps with SML can be
very productive. In the paper cited
below by Wada and Ohira, its authors credit use of easily created scripts using SML
macro-like geospatial functions and classes combined with the TNT
processes to reduce the time to implement their complex research analysis to 10%
of what was previously accomplished with some other competing product.
Yokio
Wada and Wataru Ohira. 2004.
Reconstructing Cloud Free SPOT/Vegetation Using Harmonic Analysis with
Local Maximum Fitting. 25th
Asian Remote Sensing Conference, Bangkok,
Thailand. 5 pages.
This
study was completed using TNTmips 6.9
and DV7.0 and SML
scripts written by the authors. It
used 36 SPOT/VEGETATION images collected 1 January to 21 December 2002.
The PC was a Zeon 1.7 GHz with 2 GB of RAM.
This paper is not copyrighted and is published at www.microimages.com/papers/ACRS25.pdf
and the authors can be contacted at yukio@jafta.or.jp.
Abstract.
“The satellite data of low resolution
such as SPOT/VEGETATION, NOAA/AVHRR and TERRA/MODIS etc. are very effective in
vegetation analysis on global scale. Especially,
the satellite data that are observed everyday is suitable for time series
analysis such as illegal logging, forest fire, seasonal vegetation change and
forest change. But, in these
satellite data noises due to influence of cloud and mosaic are included, and
disturb due analysis. The result is
always an image with data gaps. This
study aims to reconstruct time-series data without cloud, noise and gap.
Basic ideas used for the reconstruction are Harmonic Analysis and Local
Maximum Fitting (LMF) algorithm. We
tried to reconstruct smooth and gapless data.
This Harmonic Reconstruction (HR) process was applied to 36-image series
of SPOT/VEGETATION S10 product NDVI data of 1 year covering most Asian region.
S10 product is 10 days synthesis by Maximum NDVI method.
First, Local Maximum Fitting was conducted to exclude abnormal data.
Next, amplitude strength and phase parameter classified by period were
calculated by Harmonic Analysis. By
fitting these in cosine equation, the data were reconstructed.
As a result, it could reproduce smooth data with which influence of cloud
and noise is little. In addition,
it should be noted that specification of the used PC and the remote sensing
software are not more than standard ones. It
could also save the processing time by 90% or more in comparison with the ones
by other similar model fitting process. For
user’s convenience difficult programming is not necessary and this process is
simple to handle.”
SML
and now TNTsdk are available for
this purpose and will both automatically extend your results across all
supported platforms and in your language. There
are many strategies in the TNT
products for using scripts: batch run scripts, scripts for queries, Tool
Scripts, Macro Scripts, Display Control Scripts for GraphTips, and other
automatic activities. Scripts can be used in TNTsim3D
for controlling or extending simulations. Scripts
can create display layers. Scripts can make forms, add constraints, start and
communicate with other non-TNT
programs in VB, C++, or Java.
Writing
scripts may seem to be daunting at first for non-programmers, but MicroImages is
now providing lots of good support help in this area. If you do not want to
learn to script for yourself, there is always a student around who wants to earn
some extra money. Those with some
programming experience will find geospatial scripting interesting because it can
accomplish visually interesting results with a single page of script as shown by
many of the sample scripts. A good
introductory tutorial is available entitled Writing Scripts with SML.
Hundreds of professionally written sample scripts are available at www.microimages.com/downloads/scripts.htm to be used as examples, models, and
sources of code snippets for your scripts.
Sample
Scripts.
Using
Crystal Reports.
Periodically
MicroImages is asked how to communicate with other non-geospatial commercial
products such as Access, Excel, and so on.
Previous MEMOs and associated SML
scripts and color plates have addressed the topic of how to communicate with
these other programs. These scripts have illustrated how SML
can be used to start another Visual Basic, C++, or Java program and transfer
data to it. That program in turn
can use the API of other commercial products to start and use these results.
The reverse has also been demonstrated where other product’s results,
such as updates to external database table(s), can use an SML
or a custom program to update a table view or a pinmap in a TNT
view.
The
accompanying color plate entitled Create Crystal Reports with SML
illustrates the results and lists the content of a very short sample script for
displaying TNT results using this
commercial product. The table used
to generate this report is a simple flat table attached to a vector object.
However, much more complex results could be prepared using TNT
processes and/or this script. For
example, a TNT query could be
composed and interactively tuned to select the features of interest and an SML
Macro Script from the TNT menu to
assemble their attributes from relational tables to create this kind of report.
Computing
Terrain Curvature.
This
is a sample script showing how to set up and compute special raster properties
yielding new raster objects. This
script computes geomorphological curvature properties of terrain.
The accompanying color plate entitled Terrain Curvature
illustrates the results and lists this script, which computes profile curvature
and plan curvature raster objects from an elevation raster.
Everyone has different ideas about how these kinds of properties should
be computed—kernel sizes and shapes, coefficients, surface fit, and so on.
This script provides a template that can be modified to handle these
different objectives and as the basis for computing other special terrain and
raster properties.
Identifying
Coastal Mosquito Habitat.
This
Tool Script was created in close collaboration, including a visit from a long
term MicroImages client, to accomplish a similar task in a TNT
script as that in an ESRI Avenue
script.
Its objective is to permit this expert to statistically examine the
correlations of occurrence with habitat of a specific species of mosquito
restricted to coastal areas. It
uses climatic and geomorphological rasters to characterize the habitat, vector
buffer zones to set test positions, relational databases of mosquito trapping
results, a Tool Script approach to identify the test positions, and CartoScripts
to illustrate the statistical results. The
accompanying color plate entitled Mosquito Habitat Statistics (U-Test)
illustrates and explains the tool in more detail.
This
Tool Script is representative of the very specialized tools that can be created
to explore the spatial relationships between spatial features and massive
databases. It is typical of a
design used by experts in geological, biological, and other complex analyses
whose “expertise” can not be “coded.”
It is not designed to be a blind data-in and data-out geospatial analysis
because there is no definitive answer. What
is required is to keep the expert’s unique knowledge of the subject tightly
and interactively integrated into the tool so that generalities can be drawn to
serve as the basis for the next hypotheses.
What is also required is a geospatial framework that maintains tight
integration and access to all the types of geodata available, not a GIS, image
processing, or CAD system.
Profiling
Pipes in an Urban Infrastructure.
This
Tool Script shows a sample use of interactive feature selection in a 2D view to
present graphical results in an attractive custom window and is illustrated in
the accompanying color plate entitled Infrastructure Graphical Profile.
The input for this sample script is a network vector object of pipelines
overlaying an elevation raster. The
cursor can be used to interactively select a sequence of lines in a 2D view.
You can use it to select or deselect lines that connect to either end of
the line selection you are extending in the 2D view.
Your connected line selections are highlighted in color in the 2D view.
Use this section of this script to select and connect multiple end-to-end
lines in your scripts before using the line in subsequent steps.
At
any time a connected line has been selected, a right click of the mouse draws a
profile of the line in the profile window created by this script. This
part of this script illustrates how to draw complex graphical results in a
window. The surface of the ground
is drawn from the trace of the line on the elevation raster.
The pipes are drawn at their depths below the ground profile.
Each pipe can be styled to reflect its material type and its diameter.
General
Features.
Hash
variables can now be used like arrays but you don’t need to specify a size in
advance and the subscripts can be numeric or strings.
A
“switch” statement can be used and has a syntax identical to that used in
“C.”
Function
“prototypes” can be used just like in “C.”
The
exclusive or (XOR) operator is available.
The
SML Editor now uses syntax
highlighting.
Creating
Manifold Objects.
New
classes are available so that a script can create the 3D georeference to define
a manifold surface and combine it with another object to create a manifold
object. Use these to create a
script to read and use 3D control points from an external database that could
change dynamically to change the surface shape when viewed in 3D.
Many data mining results are presented and viewed in this fashion.
Even more dynamic results can be achieved when manifold objects can be
used in a TNTsim3D and are shaped
and changed in shape from an external database.
Googling
SML.
All
the SML sample scripts, script
names, brief descriptions, and related materials have been incorporated into the
MicroImages website in such a fashion that it is now being indexed by Google.
Thus, you have one more way to find that function or script of interest.
Simply choose the Search Site tab on the MicroImages home page and let
Google present you with the links to these materials using your key words.
New
Functions.
Database
functions. (8)
DatabaseCreate(
)
Create
a “standalone”
database object.
TableCopy(
)
Copy
a database table from one object’s database to another.
TableDelete(
)
Drops
a table from its database.
TableGetRecordElementList(
)
Get
list of elements with a given record attached or related.
TableGetRecordListElementList(
)
Get
list of elements to which a given list of records are attached or related.
TableRemoveDuplicateRecords(
)
Deletes
duplicate records from the table.
TableRemoveUnattachedRecords(
)
Deletes
unattached records from the table.
CloseDatabase(
)
Close
an open database instance.
Raster
Functions. (5)
ComputeMeanRaster(
)
The
output raster contains the mean value (at each cell) of all the inputs.
ComputeStdDevRaster(
)
The
standard deviation (at each cell) of all the inputs is assigned to the output
raster.
RasterCompress(
)
Copy
compressed source raster to the destination raster.
GetMaxPossibleValue
( )
Get
the maximum possible data value in the raster.
GetMinPossibleValue
( )
Get
the minimum possible data value in the raster.
Vector
Functions. (3)
Vector
Copy Elements( )
Returns
Vector with elements from source that meet the query selection criteria.
VectorIsEquivalent(
)
Determine
if two Vector objects are equivalent.
VectorWarp(
)
Warp
the source vector from the transparm’s source to destination
projection.
Object
Functions. (4)
FindInvalidObjects(
)
Search
the Project File (*.rvc) for invalid objects.
PackRVC(
)
Eliminates
unused space from the Project File (*.rvc).
RecoverProjectFile(
)
Recover
Project File copying to new file.
SetObjectName(
)
Change
the object name of an existing object.
System
Functions. (1)
GetLastError(
)
Get
the last error encountered in the script to test if a function succeeded.
String
Functions. (1)
StrToDeg(
)
Convert
string in degrees, minutes, seconds format to decimal degrees.
Georeference
Functions. (2)
CreateSimpleGeoref(
)
Create
simple raster georeference.
GeorefSetCoordRefSys(
)
Set
the coordinate reference system for a georeference object.
Style
Functions. (1)
StyleReadHatchPattern(
)
Read
a hatch pattern from a style object into memory.
CAD
Functions. (2)
CADReadPolyLine(
)
Read
a CAD element into the polyline.
CADWritePolyLine(
)
Write
a CAD element from a given polyline.
TIN
Functions. (2)
CreateTIN(
)
Create
a new TIN object without prompting user to select file.
OpenTIN(
)
Open
a TIN object without prompting user to select input file.
Resource
File Functions. (1)
ResourceAugment(
)
Add
user-defined text resources to allow localization of dialogs created in SML.
Geodata
Display View Functions. (1)
ViewRedrawLayer(
)
Redraw
the specified layer in the view.
Object
Conversion Functions. (4)
ConvertCADToVector(
)
Convert
CAD object to vector object.
ConvertTINToVector(
)
Convert
a TIN object to a vector object.
RasterToTINIterative2(
)
Converts
elevation raster to TIN object as contour lines.
RasterToVectorContour2(
)
Converts
elevation raster to vector onject as contour lines.
Raster
Global Functions. (3)
GlobalMedian(
)
The
median cell value in the raster object.
GlobalMode(
)
The
cell value occuring most often in the raster object.
GlobalMost(
)
The
number of times the GlobalMode value occurs in the raster.
Vector
Toolkit Functions. (2)
VectorAddPolyLine(
)
Add
a vector line/polygon from the given polyline.
VectorChangeNode(
)
Changes
the location of an existing node in a vector object.
New
Classes.
RVC_GEOREFERENCE
Completes
all georefrence object manipulations including those for manifolds.
TRIANGUALTOR
Handles
triangulation of points with break edges and clipping regions.
BOUNDARYLIST
A
list of boundary node arrays.
EDGEINFO
Information
about edges in a TRIANGULATION.
TRIANGLEEDGES
Structure
to hold the edge numbers of a triangle.
TRIANGLEINFO
Information
about triangles in a TRIANGULATION.
TRIANGLENODES
Strucuture
to hold the node numbers of a triangle.
TRIANGLETRIANGLES
Structure
to hold the triangle numbers of neighboring triangles.
SVG
For
writing SVG layouts.
MieARCE00RASTER
For
import/export parameters.
HASH
Similar
to an array (Perl programming).
ELEMENTREF
Container
for spatial element specifying type and number.
GRE_LABELS
Class
controlling labels and their placement.
GRE_LAYERDC
Layer
drawing context containing information needed to actually draw layer on a
particular view.
HATCHPATTERN
Containter
class to hold hatch pattern information.
LABELATTACHMENT
Class
for attaching lables to their elements.
LABELPLACE
Class
for keeping track of where a label is on the screen.
LABELSTYLE
Structure
for holding style information for a label.
MieCARIS
CARIS
format import/export parameters.
REGION2D
An
in-memory region representation.
SR_COORDOPDEF
Spatial
reference coordinate operation definition.
SR_COORDOPPARM
Spatial
reference coordinate operation parameter.
SR_COORDREFSYS
Coordinate
Reference System.
SR_COORDSYS
Coordinate
System specification.
SR_DATUM
Spatial
reference coordinate datum specification.
SR_ELLIPSOID
Spatial
reference ellipsoid specification.
SR_PRIMEMERIDIAN
Spatial
reference prime meridian specification.
UNIT
UNIT
specification for units of measure.
Upgrading
TNTmips.
If you did not purchase RV7.0
of TNTmips in advance and wish to do
so now, please contact MicroImages by FAX, phone, or email to arrange to
purchase this version. When you have completed your purchase, you will be
provided with an authorization code by FAX.
Entering this authorization code while running the installation process
lets you to complete the installation of TNTmips
7.0.
The prices for upgrading from earlier
versions of TNTmips are outlined
below. Please remember that
new features have been added to TNTmips
with each new release. Thus, the
older your version of TNTmips
relative to RV7.0, the higher your
upgrade cost will be.
Within
the NAFTA point-of-use area (Canada, U.S, and Mexico) and with shipping by UPS ground. (+150/each
means US$150 for each additional upgrade increment.)
| TNTmips
Product |
Price to upgrade from TNTmips:
|
V6.4
|
|
V6.9 |
V6.8 |
V6.7 |
V6.6 |
V6.5 |
and earlier
|
| Windows/Mac/LINUX
|
US$500
|
750
|
950
|
1100
|
1250
|
+150/each
|
|
for 1-user floating
|
US$600
|
900
|
1140
|
1320
|
1500
|
+180/each
|
| UNIX
for 1-fixed license
|
US$800
|
1250
|
1650
|
2000
|
2250
|
+200/each
|
|
for 1-user floating
|
US$960
|
1500
|
1980
|
2400
|
2700
|
+240/each
|
For
a point-of-use in all other nations with shipping by air express.
(+150/each means US$150 for each additional upgrade increment.)
| TNTmips
Product
|
Price to upgrade from TNTmips:
|
V6.4
|
|
V6.9
|
V6.8
|
V6.7
|
V6.6
|
V6.5
|
and earlier
|
| Windows/Mac/LINUX
|
US$600
|
900
|
1150
|
1400
|
1600
|
+150/each
|
|
for 1-user floating
|
US$720
|
1080
|
1380
|
1680
|
1920
|
+180/each
|
| UNIX
for 1-fixed license
|
US$900
|
1400
|
1850
|
2200
|
2500
|
+200/each
|
|
for 1-user floating
|
US$1080
|
1680
|
2220
|
2640
|
3000
|
+240/each
|
Localization
Editor.
Translating the help messages is an
optional requirement. A toggle has
been added to exclude these help messages if they are not to be translated.
The following 5 new Resellers were
authorized to sell MicroImages’ products since RV6.9
shipped.
AUSTRALIA.
|
Melbourne |
|
Geo-Ed
Consulting
|
|
|
|
|
David S. Gamble
|
voice:
|
(6139)482-7753
|
|
|
24 Mark Street |
FAX:
|
(6139)429-2044
|
|
|
North Fitzroy, VIC 3068 |
email: |
dgamble1@bigpond.net.au |
|
|
Australia |
|
|
BOLIVIA.
|
Santa Cruz |
|
Industrial
Consulting Services Ltd. (ICS)
|
|
|
Rafael Arias
|
voice:
|
(5913)339-1000
|
|
|
Av. Busch #520
|
FAX:
|
(5913)339-1000
|
|
|
Edificio Equanta, Piso 2
|
email:
|
arias.ics@scbbs.net
|
|
|
Santa Cruz de la Sierra
|
|
|
|
|
Bolivia |
|
|
INDIA
.
|
Calcutta |
|
OPSIS
System
|
|
|
|
|
Balen Basu
|
voice:
|
(9133)2631-8058
|
|
|
Keota Shibtala
|
FAX:
|
(9133)2355-9712
|
|
|
PO Sahagani
|
email:
|
opsiset@yahoo.com
|
|
|
Hooghly District, West Bengal |
|
|
|
|
India |
|
|
SOUTH AFRICA.
|
Cape Town |
|
Umvoto
Africa
|
|
|
Andiswa Mlisa
|
voice:
|
(2721)788-8031
|
|
|
No. 5 Hillcrest Road |
FAX:
|
(2721)788-6742
|
|
|
Muizenberg
|
email:
|
andiswa@umvoto.com
|
|
|
South Africa |
web:
|
www.umvoto.com
|
CHINA.
|
Beijing |
|
Beijing
Digital View Technology Co., Ltd.
|
|
|
Keming Wu
|
voice:
|
(8610)8489-5822
|
|
|
8th Floor,
Jin
Meng
Building |
FAX:
|
(8610)8489-5819
|
|
|
17 Xiaoying Road |
email:
|
tntmips@tom.com
|
|
|
Chaoyang District,
Beijing |
web:
|
www.dview.com.cn
|
|
|
China 100101
|
|
|
The following resellers are no longer
authorized to sell MicroImages’ products. This list is longer than usual as
some of these locations were omitted from previous MEMOs.
Please do not contact these former resellers regarding support, service,
or information. Please contact
MicroImages directly or one of the other MicroImages Authorized Resellers.
MicroImages is pleased to provide new
resellers the opportunity to use, learn, and resell the TNT
products. However, professional
geospatial analysis is a complex undertaking.
MicroImages discontinues resellers for various reasons. Foremost
among these is that it is not in our interest, your interest, or the interest of
prospective new clients to be put in contact with a reseller who makes little or
no effort to use and understand the TNT
products. As a result, they can not
help design or participate in projects, contribute input to MicroImages product
improvement and development, or effectively promote the TNT
products.
Canada.
GlobalPoint Technologies.
[Steven Ge] located in Richmond is discontinued.
China.
Spatial Port Network Technologies (SPNT)
Ltd. [Guowei Wang] located in Beijing
is discontinued.
Egypt.
iTarget.
[Sherif Khattab] located in Cairo is discontinued.
Germany.
geo-konzept GmbH.
[Thomas Muhr] located in Adelschlag is discontinued.
Ghana.
Dei Consult.
[Alfred Dei] located in Cape Coast is discontinued.
Guatemala.
SAESA.
[Eddie Alveno] located in Guatemala City is discontinued.
Mexico.
Caddland.
[Salvador Silva] located in Guanjuarto is discontinued.
Netherlands.
eXQte.
[Hans van der Maarel] located in Klundert is discontinued.
Pakistan.
Digitek.
[Hassan Mian] located in Lahore is discontinued.
Poland.
EKO-GIS Services [Marek Kamieniecki] in Szczecin is discontinued.
Russia.
RACURS Co.
[Dmitry
Kochergin] located in Moscow is discontinued.
ESTI MAP Ltd.
[Alexei Prossianov] located in Moscow is discontinued.
Serbia
and Montenegro.
PrimaRes d.o.o.
[Jasmin Babic] located in Belgrade is discontinued.
Spain.
URBITEC NETWORKS, S.L.
[Marina Emelianova] located in Madrid is discontinued.
Switzerland.
GeoMatics.
[Isabella Pacchiani] located in Geneva is discontinued.
USA,
Florida.
Satellite Imaging Group.
[Sean Morrissey] located in Coconut Creek is discontinued.
USA,
Colorado
United Arab Emirates.
Global Environmental Solutions.
[Saleh Al-Bashir] located in Abu Dhabi is discontinued.
For
simplicity, the following abbreviations were used in this MEMO.
RV7.0
= the official and first release of RV7.0
of the TNT products matching the
version on the CDs distributed.
PV7.0
= any version of the TNT products
created subsequent to RV7.0 to which
patches have been applied to update RV7.0
or a PV7.0.
DV7.1
= The partially complete development version of the TNT
products which will eventually be officially released as RV7.1
when complete.
W95
= Microsoft Windows 95.
W98
= Microsoft Windows 98.
WME
= Windows Millennium Edition.
NT
or NT4 = Microsoft NT 4.0 (the TNT
products require the use of NT4.0 and its subsequent Service Packs).
NT4 now has a Service Pack 6a available.
Windows 2000 now has Service Pack 2, which is recommended if you are
working with large files.
W2000
= Microsoft Windows 2000.
XP
= Microsoft Windows XP.
Mac
10.3.5 = Apple Macintosh using Mac OS
X version 10.3.2.
MI/X
= MicroImages’ X Server for Mac and PC microcomputer platforms and operating
systems.
GRE
= MicroImages’ Geospatial Rendering Engine, that is at the heart of most
MicroImages products. The current GRE
will respond and render requests from either X/LessTif or Windows.
VB
= Microsoft Visual Basic
MB
= megabyte (1,000,000 bytes)
GB
= gigabyte (1000 megabytes) or 109 bytes
TB
= terabyte (1000 gigabytes) or 1012 bytes
©MicroImages, Inc. 2013 Published in the United States of America
11th Floor - Sharp Tower, 206 South 13th Street, Lincoln NE 68508-2010 USA
Business & Sales: (402)477-9554 Support: (402)477-9562 Fax: (402)477-9559
Business info@microimages.com
Support support@microimages.com
Web webmaster@microimages.com
|